pdfcoffee.com capsula-xl-2-new-ru2a02e-3-pdf-free

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual How to Use PDF Manual FCR CAPSULA XL II / FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2 Checkpoints during Installation Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Search the error code. Distinguish between abnormal images. Abnormal image occurs. Gather log data. Installation Specifications Preparation for Installation Installation Procedures (Mechanical) Installation Procedures (Software Setup) Installing Optional Items (Anti-Topple Retainer) Installing Optional Items (Supporter) When Installed in Patient Environment Registering the Master CL Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Software Control (relationship with DX Console) Electrical Block Diagrams/Short-Circuit Detection Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection check) I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview Unit Locations Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths Image Data Flows Voltage Check Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Programs List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts: 2nd-Year/3rd-Year/4th-Year Procedures Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints Sensitivity/Shading Correction Install/version update software and applications. Gather log data. Back up/restore machine shipment control data. Back up/restore configuration data. Machine Maintenance Utility RU PC-TOOL MUTL Parts Related Checkpoints Parts List (INDEX) -1- CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE To GUIDE PAGE FCR CAPSULA XL II / FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2 Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations Features of the Client PC Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations List of CLIENT PC-TOOL Commands Operation in ON-LINE Mode Operation in OFF-LINE Mode Precautions in Using the Client PC Data Flow of Commands Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD-ROM Drive UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD Precautions in Setting the “Windows Firewall” in DX Console READ and WRITE Import and Export Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options” in Client PC Maintenance Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL Acquisition of Log Information Check/Acquisition of History Data Check/Acquisition of Configuration Data MUTL Version Update -2- How to Use PDF Manual Hyperlinks A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored mark in this manual. Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section. - Example of Hyperlink {MC:3.1_Cover} Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section. -3- BLANK PAGE -4- FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY FCR CAPSULA XL II / FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2 CR-IR 359 Service Manual l Target devices of this Service Manual The target device of this Service Manual (014-247-xxE) is CR-IR 359 with serial numbers # xxx40001 to 49999 and # xxx70001 or later. For CR-IR 359 with serial number # xxx50000 to 70000, please use CR-IR 359 Service Manual (014-211-xxE). l Software to be used in this device Software "114Y5039004Axx" or "114Y5039004Bxx" is used in this device. The part number of the software must be confirmed before performing the software installation and upgrade. The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows. 1 mR = 0.258μC/kg FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation <No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.> Copyright © 2013-2014 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation. Document No. 014-247-02E 1st Edition May 31, 2013 Revised Edition Jan 31, 2014 Printed in Japan BLANK PAGE 0.1 1. Handling of This Manual 1.1 About This Manual n Scope This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 359 (# xxx40001 to 49999, and # xxx70001 or later). The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. n Notation of Unit Symbols For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases. 1.2 Precautions for Handling of This Manual 1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. 2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by FUJIFILM Corporation. 3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual. 4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM Corporation: - Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual - Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel. - Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than technical servicing of the product. 1.3 About Notation in the Manual n Notation of cautions, warnings, etc. The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "Instruction", "note", and "reference" are shown below. WARNING Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed. CAUTION Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction is not observed. Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or difficult-to-recover trouble). u INSTRUCTION u Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if the instruction is not observed. u NOTE u Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure. REFERENCE Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations. n Indication of Refer To The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to. Its format is as indicated below. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} n Notation in the Manual In this Service Manual, the CR-IR 359 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU (Reader Unit), and the DR-ID 300CL as the DX Console. 5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on the product. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.1 0.2 n Notation of Symbols - Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the installation location when the part or component removed is to be reinstalled. CHECK1 This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant " Check/Adjustment Procedures." - Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly procedures. 1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/ Calibration The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate. If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below. The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools. n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration Name Inspection Calibration Dosimeter -  Steel rule (150 mm)  - Steel rule (300 mm)  - Digital multimeter    (*) - Calipers * : A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.2 0.3 Contents Safety Precautions CR-IR 359 Service Manual - Contents Safety Precaution 1. Safety Precautions ........................................... Safety-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 General Precautions ............................................................... Safety-1 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ....................................... Safety-2 Precautions on Patient Environment ........................................ Safety-2 Precautions in Retaining the Machine ...................................... Safety-3 Notes on Supporter Use.......................................................... Safety-3 1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where the Supporter Is Used........................................................Safety-3 1.5.2 Precautions in Preventing the Supporter from Toppling................Safety-3 4. CLASSIFICATION ........................................... Safety-10 5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ............Safety-11 5.1 5.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .....................................Safety-11 Further information for IEC60601-1-2 .....................................Safety-11 6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS ................... Safety-14 7. Cautions on Network ..................................... Safety-15 2. Labels ................................................................ Safety-4 2.1 Laser Precaution Labels.......................................................... Safety-4 2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations..............................Safety-4 2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels.....................................................Safety-5 2.2 2.3 Ratings Indication Labels ........................................................ Safety-6 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations ............ Safety-7 2.3.1 Erasure Unit..................................................................................Safety-7 2.3.2 Scanning Optics Unit.....................................................................Safety-7 2.3.3 Covers...........................................................................................Safety-8 2.3.4 Cassette Insertion Operation Label, Cassette Right-Justifying Label.....................................................Safety-8 2.3.5 Exposure Marker Instruction Label...............................................Safety-9 2.3.6 Power Cable Caution Label..........................................................Safety-9 3. Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure ................................ Safety-10 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.3 0.4 Contents Safety Precautions Product Specifications 1. Specifications of Machine ..................................Spec-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Product Code ............................................................................ Spec-1 Available IP Sizes and Types .................................................... Spec-1 Available Cassette Types and Sizes.......................................... Spec-1 List of Optional Items ................................................................ Spec-1 Product Specifications............................................................... Spec-2 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity ............................... Spec-2 Moving Means for the Machine ................................................. Spec-3 Retaining Means for the Machine .............................................. Spec-3 1.8.1 Retaining the Machine on Adjustable Feet......................................Spec-3 1.8.2 Retaining the Machine by Use of Anti-Topple Retainer...................Spec-4 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 Environmental Conditions.......................................................... Spec-5 Electrical Specifications ............................................................. Spec-5 Servicing Space ........................................................................ Spec-6 Installation Space ...................................................................... Spec-6 1.12.1 For Fixing by Adjustable Feet..........................................................Spec-6 1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer........................Spec-7 1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used......Spec-7 1.12.4 Using the Supporter........................................................................Spec-8 1.13 Disposal .................................................................................... Spec-9 1.13.1 Disposal of IP..................................................................................Spec-9 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.4 0.5 Contents Machine Description (MD) Machine Description (MD) 1. Machine Overview ..................................................MD-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Features ...................................................................................... MD-1 System Configuration ................................................................... MD-1 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names................MD-2 1.3.1 External View of Machine .................................................................... MD-2 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions .............................................................. MD-2 1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents .......................................... MD-3 1.4 Machine Components ..................................................................MD-4 1.4.1 Unit Locations ...................................................................................... MD-4 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths ............................................ MD-4 1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ....................................MD-5 1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit - 1 ........................................................................... MD-5 1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2 ........................................................................... MD-6 1.5.3 Cassette Set Unit - 3 ........................................................................... MD-7 1.5.4 Cassette Set Unit - 4 ........................................................................... MD-8 1.5.5 Subscanning Unit - 1 ........................................................................... MD-9 1.5.6 Subscanning Unit - 2 ......................................................................... MD-10 1.5.7 Housing ..............................................................................................MD-11 1.6 Board Locations ......................................................................... MD-12 1.6.1 Housing ............................................................................................. MD-12 1.6.2 Erasure Unit ...................................................................................... MD-12 1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit ......................................................................... MD-13 1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit .......................................................................... MD-13 1.6.5 Subscanning Unit .............................................................................. MD-13 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 2. Descriptions of Software Control .......................MD-14 2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console.......................................... MD-14 2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing ............................................... MD-14 2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data ............................................................ MD-14 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Error Handling ............................................................................ MD-15 What Is Sleep Mode? ................................................................. MD-15 RU Bootup Processing ............................................................... MD-16 RU Termination Processing ........................................................ MD-16 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations ................MD-17 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function....................... MD-17 3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit and the Components to Be Protected ............................................... MD-17 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected .................................... MD-17 3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram ................................... MD-18 3.2 3.3 Erasure Unit Control................................................................... MD-19 LEDs on the SND27A Board and the CPU63A Board.................MD-20 3.3.1 LEDs on the SND27A Board ............................................................. MD-20 3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU63A Board ............................................................. MD-21 3.4 Checking the Voltage .................................................................MD-22 3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of the PIF63A Board / Alfha II Power Source ........................................................................ MD-22 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.5 0.6 Contents Machine Description (MD) 4. Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation .........................................................MD-23 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence .............................MD-23 Correction Data..........................................................................MD-24 Image Data Flow ........................................................................MD-25 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem ......................................MD-26 5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their Operations ...........................................MD-27 5.1 5.2 IP Conveyance Flow ..................................................................MD-27 Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................MD-28 5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation ............................................................ MD-28 5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation ............................................................. MD-32 5.3 Erasure Unit ...............................................................................MD-35 5.3.1 5.4 IP Dust Removal by Brush Rollers and Cleaning the Brush Roller ... MD-36 Subscanning Unit .......................................................................MD-37 5.4.1 IP Reading ......................................................................................... MD-37 5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading .................................................... MD-37 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.6 0.7 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) Troubleshooting (MT) 1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1 1.1 1.2 Flow of Troubleshooting..............................................................MT-1 Troubleshooting from Error Log..................................................MT-2 1.2.1 Checking the Error Log......................................................................MT-2 1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble...................MT-3 1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table.......................................................MT-4 1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch.........................................MT-6 2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7 3. Abnormal Images.................................................. MT-80 3.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images............................................MT-80 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.7 0.8 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit......MC-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ................. MC-1 Types of Screws .......................................................................... MC-1 Checking the Protective Grounding .............................................. MC-1 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance......................... MC-1 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image .............................. MC-1 2. Table of Contents ...................................................MC-2 3. Cover .......................................................................MC-4 3.1 3.2 Cover ...........................................................................................MC-4 Plate ............................................................................................MC-5 4. Housing Unit ...........................................................MC-6 4.1 4.2 4.3 Alpha II Power Supply ..................................................................MC-6 PIF63A Board ..............................................................................MC-8 CPU Board ..................................................................................MC-9 4.3.1 Replacement Procedures .................................................................... MC-9 4.3.2 Machine Data Backup ......................................................................... MC-9 4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board ..................................................................MC-11 4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU ................................................... MC-13 4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version .................................................... MC-18 4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key ............................................... MC-21 4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data .............................................................. MC-22 4.3.8 Confirming the S Value ...................................................................... MC-23 4.3.9 S Value Correction/LED Initialize....................................................... MC-23 4.4 SND Board ................................................................................MC-24 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 Antistatic Member ......................................................................MC-25 IP Sensor (SG1) .........................................................................MC-26 Main Power Switch Assembly ....................................................MC-27 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet ..........................MC-28 Operation Panel Assembly .........................................................MC-29 LAN Cover ................................................................................. MC-31 5. Cassette Set Unit ..................................................MC-32 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18 Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................MC-32 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly ........................................................MC-35 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) .........MC-37 Cable Junction Bracket ..............................................................MC-38 Shutter Drive Arm ......................................................................MC-39 Spur Gear (Reference Side).......................................................MC-40 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) ........................................ MC-41 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly ............................................MC-42 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft .......................MC-44 Shutter Assembly .......................................................................MC-46 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) .............................MC-48 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear ......................MC-49 Cassette Hold Release Arm .......................................................MC-50 Cassette IP Holding Arm ............................................................ MC-51 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly ...................................................MC-53 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) ...............................................MC-54 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) ..........MC-55 IP Suction Link Mechanism ........................................................MC-56 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.8 0.9 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 5.19 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 5.24 5.25 5.26 5.27 5.28 5.29 5.30 5.31 5.32 5.33 5.34 5.35 5.36 5.37 5.38 5.39 5.40 5.41 5.42 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) ...............................................MC-58 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft.........................MC-59 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly ............................................. MC-61 Hose ..........................................................................................MC-63 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) ..................................MC-64 IP Suction Pump (PA1) ...............................................................MC-65 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) ...........................MC-66 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side) ........................MC-67 Guide .........................................................................................MC-68 Suction Cup ...............................................................................MC-69 IP Transport Motor (MA4) ........................................................... MC-71 Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear ...........................MC-72 Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) ............................MC-73 Actuator Assembly .....................................................................MC-76 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6)....................................................MC-77 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) .............MC-78 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) ................................MC-79 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) ..................MC-80 Movable Guide Assembly ...........................................................MC-82 “15x30 Cassette” Movable Guide Assembly...............................MC-84 IP Suction Arm ...........................................................................MC-85 IP Suction Link Shaft ..................................................................MC-87 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly ....................................MC-88 Guide Plates (A) and (B) ............................................................MC-90 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 6. Erasure Unit ..........................................................MC-92 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 Erasure Unit ...............................................................................MC-92 Reflection Plate ..........................................................................MC-94 Brush Roller Assembly ...............................................................MC-96 Brush Roller ...............................................................................MC-97 Filter ..........................................................................................MC-99 Lamp Assembly ....................................................................... MC-101 7. Light-Collecting Unit ..........................................MC-103 7.1 7.2 Light-Collecting Unit ................................................................. MC-103 PMT Board .............................................................................. MC-106 8. Scanning Optics Unit .........................................MC-108 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit ................................................................ MC-108 9. Subscanning Unit ...............................................MC-112 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 Subscanning Unit ..................................................................... MC-112 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly ................................. MC-114 Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)................................. MC-115 Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) .................... MC-116 Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ........................................................ MC-116 IP Transport Motor (MC1) ......................................................... MC-117 Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2) ................................. MC-117 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) ................................................. MC-118 Light-Collecting Shaft (Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic Member) ............................... MC-119 9.10 Rubber Roller (A, B) ................................................................. MC-121 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.9 0.10 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 9.15 9.16 9.17 9.18 9.19 9.20 9.21 9.22 9.23 9.24 Rubber Roller (C, D)................................................................. MC-123 Rubber Roller (E) ..................................................................... MC-125 Conveyor Guide Assembly ....................................................... MC-128 Rubber Roller (F) ..................................................................... MC-129 Grip Release Arm..................................................................... MC-130 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) ............................................... MC-131 Subscanning Grip Assembly ..................................................... MC-133 IP Sensor (SC3) ....................................................................... MC-135 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) .................... MC-136 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ............................................... MC-137 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)............................................... MC-139 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) .............................................. MC-141 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) .............................................. MC-143 Center Roller............................................................................MC-145 10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations........MC-147 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures .................... MC-147 CPU Board Fuses ....................................................................MC-148 SND Board Fuses ....................................................................MC-148 PIF63A Board Fuses ................................................................MC-149 11. List of Jigs and Tools .........................................MC-150 11.1 Jigs and Tools .......................................................................... MC-150 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.10 0.11 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) Maintenance Utility (MU) 1. Overview of RU Service Utility ..............................MU-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Tree of RU Service Utility ............................................................. MU-1 RU Operation Panel ..................................................................... MU-1 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes ..........................MU-2 1.3.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-2 1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection ........................................................... MU-3 1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses..................................................MU-4 1.4.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-4 1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the Address ................................................ MU-5 2. User Utility ..............................................................MU-6 2.1 2.2 Overview of User Utility ................................................................MU-6 Starting and Exiting the User Utility...............................................MU-8 2.2.1 Starting the User Utility ........................................................................ MU-8 2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility ......................................................................... MU-8 2.3 Select master IIP console .............................................................MU-8 2.3.1 Function ............................................................................................... MU-8 2.3.2 Procedures .......................................................................................... MU-8 3. Machine Maintenance Utility .................................MU-9 3.1 3.2 Tree of Machine Maintenance Utility .............................................MU-9 Reader Unit IP Address .............................................................. MU-10 3.2.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-10 3.2.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-10 3.3 Subnet Mask .............................................................................. MU-11 3.3.1 Function ..............................................................................................MU-11 3.3.2 Procedures .........................................................................................MU-11 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 3.4 FTP Server IP Address .............................................................. MU-12 3.4.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-12 3.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-12 3.5 Default Gateway ........................................................................ MU-13 3.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-13 3.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-13 3.6 Secure Host ............................................................................... MU-14 3.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-14 3.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-14 3.7 Secure Net................................................................................. MU-15 3.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-15 3.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-15 3.8 Network Check .......................................................................... MU-16 3.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-16 3.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-16 3.9 HV On/Off .................................................................................. MU-17 3.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-17 3.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-17 3.10 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility .................. MU-18 3.10.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization ........... MU-18 3.10.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY State ... MU-19 3.10.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility ............................................ MU-20 3.10.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred ........ MU-20 4. RU PC-TOOL .........................................................MU-21 4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree ........................................ MU-21 4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window .............................................................. MU-21 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.11 0.12 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-21 4.10.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-30 Outline of RU PC-TOOL .............................................................MU-22 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window .......................................................... MU-30 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel ................. MU-22 4.11 VERSION UP............................................................................. MU-31 4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display .................................................. MU-23 4.11.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-31 LIST OF EXISTING RU ..............................................................MU-24 4.11.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-31 4.3 Function ............................................................................................. MU-24 4.12 EDIT HISTORY ..........................................................................MU-32 NEW ..........................................................................................MU-24 4.12.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-32 4.3.1 4.4 4.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-24 4.12.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-32 4.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-24 4.12.3 Details of USE ................................................................................... MU-33 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-25 4.12.4 Details of IP ....................................................................................... MU-34 4.5 4.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-25 4.12.5 Details of BARCODE ......................................................................... MU-35 4.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-25 4.12.6 Details of LASER ............................................................................... MU-36 MUTL.........................................................................................MU-25 4.12.7 Details of LAMP ................................................................................. MU-37 4.6 4.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-25 4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION ............................................................MU-38 4.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-25 4.13.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-38 PING ..........................................................................................MU-26 4.13.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-38 4.7 4.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-26 4.14 EDIT CL NAME ..........................................................................MU-42 4.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-26 4.14.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-42 MON ..........................................................................................MU-27 4.14.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination ........ MU-42 4.8 4.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-27 4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ........................................................... MU-43 4.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-28 4.14.4 Switching the Master CL.................................................................... MU-44 FTP............................................................................................MU-29 4.15 BACKUP ....................................................................................MU-45 4.9 4.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-29 4.15.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-45 4.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-29 4.15.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-45 4.10 INSTALL ....................................................................................MU-30 4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable Causes ...................................................................... MU-46 4.10.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-30 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.12 0.13 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 4.16 RESTORE .................................................................................MU-47 4.16.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-47 4.16.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-47 4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable Causes ...................................................................... MU-48 4.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ..................................................................MU-49 4.17.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-49 4.17.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-50 4.18 ERROR DB................................................................................ MU-51 4.18.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-51 4.18.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-52 4.19 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs ................................................................MU-53 4.19.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-53 4.19.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-53 4.20 VERSION UP: ALL RUs .............................................................MU-55 4.20.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-55 4.20.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-55 4.21 CDPath ......................................................................................MU-57 4.21.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-57 4.21.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"....................................................... MU-57 4.21.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" .................................................. MU-58 4.22 Initialize APL...............................................................................MU-59 4.22.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-59 4.22.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-59 4.23 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL..............................................MU-60 4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL ....................................................................... MU-60 5. Client PC ...............................................................MU-61 5.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC .................................. MU-61 5.1.1 Features of the Client PC .................................................................. MU-61 5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC ............................................................... MU-62 5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC .................................................. MU-63 5.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive ...... MU-63 5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the DX Console ............................................. MU-63 5.2 Setting Up the Client PC ............................................................MU-64 5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM .................. MU-65 5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive ....... MU-66 5.3 5.4 5.5 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.........................................................MU-68 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification ................MU-69 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List .............................................. MU-71 5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-71 5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List ..................................................... MU-72 5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry ............................................................ MU-73 5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications .................................................. MU-74 5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE.............................................................MU-75 5.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations ................. MU-75 5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode ............................................................. MU-76 5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode ........................................................... MU-77 5.7 Data Flow of Each Command ....................................................MU-78 5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD .............................................................. MU-78 5.7.2 READ and WRITE ............................................................................. MU-78 5.7.3 Import and Export .............................................................................. MU-78 4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL......................................................................... MU-60 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.13 0.14 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation .....................................MU-79 5.8.1 Solution-1 .......................................................................................... MU-79 5.8.2 Solution-2 .......................................................................................... MU-80 5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL....................................................... MU-81 5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM ................. MU-81 5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive .... MU-83 5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC........MU-86 5.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC ............MU-87 6. CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................................MU-88 6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree .................................MU-88 6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window ...................................................... MU-88 6.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-88 6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL ................................................MU-89 6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel ................. MU-89 6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display ........................................... MU-90 6.3 Hospital List ............................................................................... MU-91 6.3.1 6.4 Function ............................................................................................. MU-91 NEW RU ....................................................................................MU-92 6.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-92 6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-92 6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site Name .... MU-94 6.4.4 Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server ............................. MU-96 6.5 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-98 6.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-98 6.5.2 Deleting an RU Only .......................................................................... MU-98 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6.5.3 Deleting an FTP Server ..................................................................... MU-99 6.5.4 Deleting a Site ................................................................................... MU-99 6.5.5 Deleting the Entire Tree Information ................................................ MU-100 6.6 COPY ...................................................................................... MU-101 6.6.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-101 6.6.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-101 6.7 RENAME ................................................................................. MU-103 6.7.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-103 6.7.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-103 6.8 GET VERSION ........................................................................ MU-104 6.8.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-104 6.8.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-104 6.9 MUTL....................................................................................... MU-105 6.9.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-105 6.9.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-105 6.10 PING ........................................................................................ MU-106 6.10.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-106 6.10.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-106 6.11 MON ........................................................................................ MU-107 6.11.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-107 6.11.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-108 6.12 FTP.......................................................................................... MU-110 6.12.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-110 6.12.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-110 6.13 VERSION UP............................................................................MU-111 6.13.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-111 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.14 0.15 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 6.13.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-111 6.21.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-128 6.14 EDIT HISTORY ........................................................................ MU-112 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and their Probable Causes ..................................................................... MU-129 6.14.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-112 6.14.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-112 6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION .......................................................... MU-114 6.15.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-114 6.15.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-114 6.16 EDIT CL NAME ........................................................................ MU-116 6.16.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-116 6.16.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination .......MU-116 6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ..........................................................MU-118 6.16.4 Switching the Master CL...................................................................MU-119 6.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ................................................................ MU-120 6.17.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-120 6.17.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-121 6.18 ERROR DB.............................................................................. MU-122 6.18.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-122 6.18.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-123 6.19 READ ...................................................................................... MU-124 6.19.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-124 6.19.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-124 6.20 WRITE ..................................................................................... MU-126 6.20.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-126 6.20.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-126 6.21 UPLOAD .................................................................................. MU-128 6.21.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-128 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6.22 DOWNLOAD ........................................................................... MU-130 6.22.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-130 6.22.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-130 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and their Probable Causes ..................................................................... MU-131 6.23 CDPath .................................................................................... MU-132 6.23.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-132 6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"..................................................... MU-132 6.23.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" ................................................ MU-133 6.23.4 Verifying the "CDPath" Setting ........................................................ MU-134 6.24 Export ...................................................................................... MU-135 6.24.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-135 6.24.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-135 6.25 Import ...................................................................................... MU-136 6.25.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-136 6.25.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-136 6.26 OnLine ..................................................................................... MU-137 6.26.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-137 6.26.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-137 6.27 Network ................................................................................... MU-138 6.27.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-138 6.27.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-138 6.28 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................... MU-139 6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL) .... MU-139 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.15 0.16 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window .................... MU-140 [5-2] Laser ............................................................................................... MU-154 6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL ............................................................... MU-140 [5-3] HV Diagnostic .................................................................................. MU-155 7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions .............MU-141 7.1 7.2 Tree of MUTL........................................................................... MU-141 Starting and Exiting the MUTL .................................................. MU-143 7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL ................................. MU-143 7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL.......................... MU-144 7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL ............................................................................. MU-145 7.3 Details of MUTL ....................................................................... MU-146 [1] Conveyance Check ......................................................................... MU-146 [1-1] Conveyance Setting ........................................................................ MU-148 [1-2] Processing Mode Setting ................................................................ MU-148 [1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting ...................................................... MU-148 [2] Board Check .................................................................................... MU-149 [2-1] CPU Board Setting Display ............................................................. MU-149 [2-2] Panel Check .................................................................................... MU-150 [2-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off.......................................................................... MU-150 [2-2-2] BUZZER On/Off............................................................................... MU-150 [3] Software Check ............................................................................... MU-151 [3-1] Ver. Display ..................................................................................... MU-151 [3-2] MAC Address Display ...................................................................... MU-151 [4] Virtual Image Check ........................................................................ MU-152 [4-1] LED Virtual Read ............................................................................. MU-152 [4-2] PMT Virtual Read ............................................................................ MU-153 [5] Scanner Check ................................................................................ MU-154 [5-1] Polygon Mortor ................................................................................ MU-154 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 [5-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic ..................................................................... MU-155 [5-4] Format Adjustment .......................................................................... MU-156 [5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) ............................................................ MU-156 [5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel) ............................................................... MU-158 [5-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line) ................................................................ MU-160 [5-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel) .......................................................... MU-162 [5-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ) ................................................................... MU-164 [5-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel) ...................................................................... MU-164 [5-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ) ...................................................................... MU-164 [5-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel) ......................................................................... MU-164 [5-5] Correction ........................................................................................ MU-165 [5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST) ................................................ MU-165 [5-5-2] Shading Correction (HR) ................................................................. MU-166 [5-5-3] Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed) .......................................... MU-167 [5-5-4] Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR)) .............................................. MU-168 [5-5-5] Sensitivity Correction (ST) ............................................................... MU-169 [5-5-6] Sensitivity Correction (HR) .............................................................. MU-170 [5-5-7] Special Sensitivity Correction .......................................................... MU-171 [5-5-8] Sensitivity S-Value Correction ......................................................... MU-176 [5-6] Trouble Shooting ............................................................................. MU-177 [5-6-1] Shading Correction .......................................................................... MU-177 [5-7] HV ON/OFF ..................................................................................... MU-177 [5-8] S Value ............................................................................................ MU-178 [5-8-1] S value now ..................................................................................... MU-178 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.16 0.17 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) [5-8-2] S value calculate ............................................................................. MU-178 [5-8-3] PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize......................................... MU-179 [6] 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 For Design ....................................................................................... MU-180 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.17 0.18 Contents Service Parts List (SP) Service Parts List (SP) How to Use Service Parts List .................................................................SP-1 INDEX SP-2 01A COVER 1......................................................................................SP-3 01B COVER 2......................................................................................SP-4 FRAME .........................................................................................SP-5 02 03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ...............................................................SP-6 03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ...............................................................SP-7 03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 ...............................................................SP-8 03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 ...............................................................SP-9 03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-10 03F CASSETTE SET UNIT 6 ............................................................. SP-11 03G CASSETTE SET UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-12 03H CASSETTE SET UNIT 8 .............................................................SP-13 03I CASSETTE SET UNIT 9 .............................................................SP-14 03J CASSETTE SET UNIT 10 ...........................................................SP-15 03K CASSETTE SET UNIT 11 ...........................................................SP-16 03L CASSETTE SET UNIT 12 ...........................................................SP-17 03M CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 ...........................................................SP-18 04A ERASURE UNIT 1 ......................................................................SP-19 04B ERASURE UNIT 2 ......................................................................SP-20 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ..........................................................SP-21 05 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT .........................................................SP-22 06 07A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 .............................................................SP-23 07B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 .............................................................SP-24 07C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 .............................................................SP-25 07D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 .............................................................SP-26 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6149 07E 07F 07G 07H 07I 07J 07K 08 09 10 11 12 13 SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-27 SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 .............................................................SP-28 SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-29 SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 .............................................................SP-30 SUB SCANNING UNIT 9 .............................................................SP-31 SUB SCANNING UNIT 10 ...........................................................SP-32 SUB SCANNING UNIT 11 ...........................................................SP-33 CONTROLLER ...........................................................................SP-34 OPTION ......................................................................................SP-35 CABLE........................................................................................SP-36 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................................................................SP-37 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ...................................................SP-40 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring...............................SP-42 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.18 0.19 Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) Preventive Maintenance (PM) 1. How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Section....PM-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List....................................... PM-2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached.......... PM-4 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached........... PM-5 2. Details of Maintenance Procedures.......................PM-6 2.1 2.2 2.3 Backing Up the Log................................................................... PM-6 Checking the Error Log.............................................................. PM-7 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................................. PM-8 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance..........................PM-9 4. Pulling Out the Machine.......................................PM-10 5. Removing the Covers/Plates................................PM-12 5.1 5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years).......................PM-12 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years)............................PM-12 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.....................................................PM-14 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter.............................PM-15 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of the Housing Unit.......................................................................PM-15 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit.............................................PM-16 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly...................PM-16 8. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-17 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Cleaning the Filter.....................................................................PM-17 Replacing the Filter...................................................................PM-17 Cleaning the Brush Roller.........................................................PM-18 Cleaning the Reflection Plate....................................................PM-18 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit.....................................................PM-19 9. Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-20 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly.......... PM-20 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit.......................................... PM-20 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide......................................... PM-20 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit.......................................... PM-20 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly.... PM-20 6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-12 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-21 7. Cassette Set Unit...................................................PM-13 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates...............PM-21 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Removing the Erasure Unit.......................................................PM-13 Removing the Cassette Set Unit...............................................PM-13 Cleaning the Roller (Small).......................................................PM-13 Cleaning the Suction Cups.......................................................PM-14 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)..........PM-21 11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)...............PM-21 12. Securing the Machine...........................................PM-22 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.19 0.20 Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding....PM-22 14. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-22 15. Confirming the S Value.........................................PM-23 16. Checking the Error Log........................................PM-23 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.20 0.21 Contents Installation (IN) Installation (IN) 1. Specifications of Machine .......................................IN-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Dimensions and Weight ................................................................. IN-1 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine...................................... IN-1 Servicing Space .............................................................................IN-2 1.3.1 Retaining with the Adjustable Feet...................................................... IN-2 1.3.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer............................ IN-3 1.3.3 Installing the Machine at a User’s Site where Long Cassettes are Used.................................................................... IN-3 1.3.4 Using the Supporter............................................................................ IN-4 2. Installation Work Flowchart ....................................IN-5 3. Preparation for Installation......................................IN-6 3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation .................................................IN-6 3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements............................................................ IN-6 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................... IN-6 3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit...........IN-6 3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection.................................................... IN-6 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Unloading.......................................................................................IN-7 Transfer ....................................................................................... IN-17 Temporary Placement .................................................................. IN-17 Checking the Items Supplied ........................................................ IN-18 4. Installation Procedures..........................................IN-19 6. Final Placement ......................................................IN-23 6.1 6.2 Securing the Machine...................................................................IN-23 Securing the Cable.......................................................................IN-24 7. DX Console Installation Procedures ....................IN-24 8. Installing RU Software ...........................................IN-25 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility ......................................IN-25 Setting the RU IP Address ............................................................IN-26 Setting the FTP Server IP Address ...............................................IN-27 Checking the Connection with the DX Console.............................IN-29 Installing the RU PC-TOOL ..........................................................IN-30 Installing RU Software ..................................................................IN-32 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit ......................................IN-37 9. Image/Conveyance Checks ...................................IN-39 9.1 9.2 Check Before Procedures ............................................................IN-39 Image/Conveyance Checks .........................................................IN-40 10. Confirming the S Value ..........................................IN-42 10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST ..........................................IN-42 10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR ..........................................IN-44 11. Backing Up the Scanner Data ...............................IN-47 Removing the Transportation Protective Member ......................... IN-19 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU .......................IN-47 5. Connecting the Cables ..........................................IN-20 13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU ................................IN-48 4.1 5.1 5.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value......IN-20 Connecting the Interface Cable ....................................................IN-22 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label ......................IN-48 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.21 0.22 Contents Installation (IN) Appendix 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING ..................................Appx IN-1 Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer ...............Appx IN-2 1. 2. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit ................................Appx IN-2 Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer ..............Appx IN-3 Appendix 3 Assembling and Securing the Supporter ...............................Appx IN-12 1. 2. 3. Components of the Supporter ............................................. Appx IN-12 Assembling the Supporter ................................................... Appx IN-14 Attachment of the Options................................................... Appx IN-18 3.1 Mounting the Arm..................................................................... Appx IN-18 3.2 Mounting the Base................................................................... Appx IN-20 3.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack.................................................... Appx IN-21 4. 5. Securing the Machine..........................................................Appx IN-22 Securing the Supporter .......................................................Appx IN-26 5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes ........................................................ Appx IN-27 5.2 Nothing..................................................................................... Appx IN-28 5.3 Fixing the Supporter to the Floor.............................................. Appx IN-29 5.4 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall............................................... Appx IN-32 5.5 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via the Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type)..................................... Appx IN-34 5.6 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts..................... Appx IN-36 5.7 Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)...................................... Appx IN-39 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6. 7. 8. Applying the Seal ................................................................Appx IN-43 Nothing ...............................................................................Appx IN-43 Nothing ...............................................................................Appx IN-44 Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL..................Appx IN-45 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on the CL1) .....................................................Appx IN-45 Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2).......................Appx IN-48 Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) ............................................Appx IN-49 Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility ...................Appx IN-49 Verifying Switching of Master CL .........................................Appx IN-50 Appendix 5. Changing the RU's IP Address ...Appx IN-52 1. 2. 3. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility .............................Appx IN-52 Setting the RU IP Address ...................................................Appx IN-52 Setting the FTP Server IP address ......................................Appx IN-52 Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU Software .....Appx IN-53 1. 2. Deleting an Installed RU ......................................................Appx IN-53 Reinstalling the RU Software...............................................Appx IN-53 Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software ..........Appx IN-54 1. 2. 3. Verifying the connection to the DX Console .........................Appx IN-54 Installing the RU PC-TOOL .................................................Appx IN-54 Installing the RU Software ...................................................Appx IN-54 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.22 0.23 Contents Installation (IN) Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PC-TOOL Installation ............Appx IN-55 1. 2. Corrective Procedure 1 .......................................................Appx IN-55 Corrective Procedure 2 .......................................................Appx IN-56 Appendix 9. Installing the Mobile Kit ..............Appx IN-57 1. 2. 3. Components of the Mobile Kit .............................................Appx IN-57 Attaching the Tape .............................................................Appx IN-57 Installing the Anti-Topple Retainer Kit...................................Appx IN-58 Appendix 10. Uninstallation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit ..................................Appx IN-59 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.23 0.24 Contents Performance Check (PC) Performance Check (PC) CR-IR 359 Performance Check List ............................ PC-1 Installation Information ............................................................................PC-1 Checklist .................................................................................................PC-1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.24 0.25 Contents Performance Check (PC) BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.25 0.26 Contents Performance Check (PC) BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.26 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 7-10 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety Precaution 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected Safety-1 1. Safety Precautions Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. 1.1 General Precautions WARNING - No modification of this equipment is allowed. - Exceeded US Deviation limit, however instructions provided in operation and service manuals instructing user to connect unit to center-tapped, 240V, single phase circuit. n Power Supply Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged, you may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even when the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing procedures, such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, as instructed in this manual. - Do not connect any unspecified device. - Ensure sufficient space around the power plug or the inlet. n Drive Mechanism Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other drive mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. n Heavy Objects Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and installation of heavy objects. n Safety Devices Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, panels, and covers) should always be enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may impair their safety features. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 n Optical Parts l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure to turn OFF the power switch. l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service manual. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal carelessly). l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. n Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the operation panel, the photomultiplier and the erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the inside of a broken part. n Other Working Precautions l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch). Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed protective housings back exactly where they were. l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered, because of possible electric shock hazards. l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise due care against electric shock or other hazards. l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature because you may suffer burns. l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body. Static electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards. l Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or retainers. l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put another label over them. l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures, make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine. n Grounding Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-1 Safety-2 1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the right-hand side cover of the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1 (Amendment 2).” The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 50 mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in the service manual. n Precautions Against Laser Exposure Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the removed protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine. - Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit. - Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts. 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient environment or not. n Additional Protective Grounding When the RU is to be installed in the patient environment, connect the RU with the medical use grounding terminal through the additional protective grounding wire. Definition of "patient environment" is given below. l Patient environment Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room. l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified. l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. - Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you may be exposed to laser beam radiation. - Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path. - Do not alter the light path of a laser beam. - Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized. - Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-2 Safety-3 1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine The installation space and the method of retaining the machine are limited in a site where a long cassette is used. WARNING Be sure to follow the precautions below in a site where a long cassette is used. - Always fix the machine by an optional anti-topple retainer. - Install the machine in a space with a height of the ceiling of 1750 mm or higher. 1.5 Notes on Supporter Use 1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where the Supporter Is Used Exercise care in the following when working in a user’s site where the supporter (option) is used. CAUTION When pushing the machine into the supporter or pulling the machine out of the supporter, exercise care so that your fingers are not caught between the supporter and machine. 1.5.2 Precautions in Preventing the Supporter from Toppling Refer to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter” for retaining the supporter to prevent the supporter from toppling. {IN:Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-3 Safety-4 2. Labels 2.1 Laser Precaution Labels 2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)" and "IEC60825-1 (Amendment 2).” issued by the FDA of the U.S. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-4 Safety-5 2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels n IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label n HHS Certification and Identification Label 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-5 Safety-6 2.2 Ratings Indication Labels n Ratings Indication Labels n Attachment Position n Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use Period) Label 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-6 Safety-7 2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations 2.3.2 Scanning Optics Unit Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the scanning optics unit. 2.3.1 Erasure Unit 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-7 Safety-8 2.3.3 Covers u NOTE u Always use a cable conforming to the specifications at a position with a caution label applied. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 2.3.4 Cassette Insertion Operation Label, Cassette Right-Justifying Label The cassette insertion operation label differs depending on the type of the cassette used in the user’s site. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-8 Safety-9 2.3.5 Exposure Marker Instruction Label Apply the exposure marker instruction label suitable for the local language. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 2.3.6 Power Cable Caution Label Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for U.S.A.) CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-9 Safety-10 3. Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, a laser beam will never leak out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation. During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the protective housings removed back exactly where they were. n Protective Housing of the Machine The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The three covers marked by ∗ in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure. 4. CLASSIFICATION 1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT 2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock NO APPLIED PART 3. Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter IP00 4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide. Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide. 5. According to the mode of operation CONTINUOUS OPERATION 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-10 Safety-11 5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2 Further information for IEC60601-1-2 Model name Allegro-HR is referred to as CR-IR 359 in this section. 5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices to the IEC60601-1-2 : 1993 (up to 24999), IEC60601-1-2 : 2001 (after 25001), Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a typical medical installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other devices in the vicinity. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; - Reorient or relocate the receiving device. - Increase the separation between the equipment. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other device(s) are connected. Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help. - Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as follows. - Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical equipment. - The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the CR-IR 359. List of Cables Name Power Cable I/F Cable FUJIFILM Corporation Parts code 136N0377 (Europe) 136N0376 (UK) - General Specification UTP cable of straight type and category 5E or more. - The CR-IR 359 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the CR-IR 359 should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in such an environment. Electromagnetic environment Emissions test Compliance guidance RF emissions The CR-IR 359 uses RF energy only CISPR 11 for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not Group 1 likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment. RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The CR-IR 359 is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and Harmonic emissions those directly connected to the public Class A IEC 61000-3-2 low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic Voltage fluctuations/ purposes. flicker emissions Complies IEC 61000-3-3 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-11 Safety-12 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in such an environment. Immunity test Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 Electrical fast transient/burst IEC 61000-4-4 Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines IEC 61000-4-11 Power frequency (50/60 Hz) magnetic field Electromagnetic environment guidance ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ±8kV air ±6kV contact ceramic tile. If floors are covered with ±2kV air synthetic material, ±4kV air the relative humidity ±8kV air should be at least 30%. ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality lines should be that of a lines ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or lines lines hospital environment. ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or hospital environment. Mains power quality < 5 % UT < 5 % UT (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a typical commercial or for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle hospital environment. If the user of the 40 % UT 40 % UT CR-IR 359 requires (60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) continued operation for 5 cycles for 5 cycles during power mains interruptions, it is 70 % UT 70 % UT (30% dip in UT ) recommended that (30% dip in UT ) for 25 cycles the CR-IR 359 be for 25 cycles powered from an < 5 % UT uninterruptible power < 5 % UT (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery. (>95% dip in UT ) for 5 s for 5 s IEC 60601test level 3 A/m Compliance level 3 A/m IEC 61000-4-8 Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in such an environment. Immunity test Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6 Recommended separation distance Radiated RF 3 V/m IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz 2.5GHz 3 V/m d = 1.2 d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m). Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey,a should be less than the compliance level in each frequency range.b Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol: NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies. NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people. a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CR-IR 359 is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR 359 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR 359. b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m. NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 IEC 60601 test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance level level 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any 150kHz part of the CR-IR 359, including cables, 80MHz than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-12 Safety-13 Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR 359 The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the CR-IR 359 as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment. Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter Rated maximum m output power of transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz W d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3 0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23 0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73 1 1.2 1.2 2.3 10 3.8 3.8 7.3 12 12 100 23 For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer. NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies. NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-13 Safety-14 6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local representative. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-14 Safety-15 7. Cautions on Network - Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network separation. - After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected, take appropriate countermeasures including: - Replacing connected devices - Connecting additional devices - Removing devices - Updating devices - Upgrading devices 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-15 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 2 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Product Specifications 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected Spec-1 1. 1.1 Specifications of Machine Available Cassette Types and Sizes Cassette type Product Code Abbreviated product name Description Operation panel Qty. screen contents Image reader main body CR IR 359 RU2 USA 1 : E CR-IR 359 (For the U.S.) Image reader main body CR IR 359 RU2 USA 2 : E CR-IR 359 (For the U.S.) Image reader main body CR-IR 359 (For European and other foreign countries) CR IR 359 RU2 : E 1.2 1.3 1 1 1 - For use at hospitals - English indications Remarks - For use at hospitals - English indications - For use at hospitals - English indications Metric-type specification Available IP Sizes and Types n Available IP types - ST-VI type - HR-V type (with the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed) - HR-VI type (with the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed) n Available IP sizes Inch (inch) Metric (cm) IP size Standard type (ST-VI) 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10 Standard type (ST-VI) 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30 High resolution type (HR-V/HR-VI)*1 24 x 30, 18 x 24 Cassette CC (ST Cassette) 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10 Cassette PC 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12 Cassette LC (Long Cassette) - Inch-type specification - For FMSU direct selling - With the 50 micron upgrade kit installed - Inch-type specification - For selling by FMSU franchised stores - With the 50 micron upgrade kit installed IP type Inch (inch) Metric (cm) IP size Twin cassette 14 x 17 - twin, 10 x 12 - twin Triple cassette 14 x 17 - triple, 14 x 14 - triple Cassette CC (ST Cassette) 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30 Cassette LC (Long Cassette) 24 x 30 - twin Cassette CH*1 24 x 30 *2, 18 x 24 *1: With the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed *2: Use an adapter when reading a 24x30CH cassette. 1.4 List of Optional Items Abbreviated product name Description Qty Remarks For retaining the machine IR 355 FLOOR FIX KIT RH E Anti-topple retainer kit 1 IR 355 STAND #(E) Supporter 1 IR 355 CASSETTE RACK #(E) Cassette rack 1 IR 355 CASSETE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1 IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 IR 355 IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1 IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm for LCD monitor 1 Except for USA IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) Retainer for fixing to wall (long type) 1 Except for USA IR 355 MBL KIT #(E) Mobile kit 1 IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E AC cable for BSI 1 IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E AC cable for CEE 1 IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V UL E AC cable for USA 1 Except for USA Except for USA *1: With the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-1 Spec-2 1.5 Product Specifications n Maximum Heat Generation Standby: 0.36 MJ/h or less Operating: 1.05 MJ/h or less Hibernation: 0.07 MJ/h or less 1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity n Dimensions W590 × D380 × H810 (mm) (except protrusions) n Noise Operating: 55 dB or less n Warm-up Time l Power non-interlinked setting (when RU is started up alone) 42 seconds or less l Power interlinked setting (when RU is started up by DX Console) 98 seconds or less n I/F cable UTP cable of straight type and Category 5E or more n Center of Gravity Height: 350 mm approx. From right-hand side: 290 mm approx. From front: 200 mm approx. u NOTE u The center of gravity is as measured from the adjustable foot. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-2 Spec-3 1.7 Moving Means for the Machine Two-wheeled casters (direction-variable/without brake): Four casters 1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine The following two kinds of retaining means of the machine are available. - Retaining on the adjustable feet - Retaining through the use of a anti-topple retainer 1.8.1 Retaining the Machine on Adjustable Feet The machine is fixed by four adjustable feet. The long cassette cannot be used while the machine is fixed by the adjustable feet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-3 Spec-4 1.8.2 Retaining the Machine by Use of Anti-Topple Retainer The machine is fixed through the use of an optional anti-topple retainer in the following cases: - When the machine is to be fixed to the floor through the use of the safety as required by the user; - When the long cassette is to be used; 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-4 Spec-5 1.9 Environmental Conditions n Climate Conditions l Operating Temperature: 15 °C (40%) to 30 °C (80 %) Relative humidity: 15 % RH (30 °C) to 80 % RH (30 °C) (without moisture condensation) Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa 1.10 Electrical Specifications n Frequency Single-phase, 50-60 Hz, ±3% n Input Voltage Single-phase, 100-240 VAC ±10% n Rated Amperage Single-phase, 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz : 5-2.1A n Power Consumption Operating: 290 VA or less Standby: 100 VA or less Remote standby: 20 VA or less l Non-operating Temperature: 0 to 45 °C (Should not freeze) Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation) Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa n Grounding Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less) n Overload Protection 10 A l Transit/storage Temperature: -10 to 50 °C (Should not freeze) Relative humidity: 10 to 90 % RH (without moisture condensation) Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1,060 hPa n Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration 10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.015 mm or less in amplitude n Floor Levelness 10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left n Floor Flatness 10 mm/m or less n Variable Magnetic Field DC 0.3 Gauss or less 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-5 Spec-6 1.11 Servicing Space When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 1.12 1.12.1 Installation Space For Fixing by Adjustable Feet CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-6 Spec-7 1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer l Top view 1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used l Top view and side view l Location of holes for the anti-topple retainer l Location of holes for the anti-topple retainer 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-7 Spec-8 1.12.4 Using the Supporter l Installation space required when the base is attached to the supporter The base mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical. l Installation space required for the supporter only l Installation space required when the cassette rack is attached to the supporter The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-8 Spec-9 1.13 1.13.1 Disposal Disposal of IP Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in each country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-9 Spec-10 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-10 Spec-11 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-11 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 10, 29, 30 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Machine Description (MD) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected MD-1 1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration This machine supports the following two system configurations. 1.1 Features n Features of the Machine l Target This machine is intended for small hospital, where a daily process count of IP is between 1 to 20. l Improved dust resistance Dust resistance is improved as there is no opening on the machine. l Power supply n System Configuration 1 The machine is connected to the Console via a network. Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX). RU HUB Console FRRB101001.ai n System Configuration 2 Connect the machine, Console, and printer via network. Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX). Printer A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to the machine. l Reading IP type HR-V The machine which the upgrade kit (option key for reading HR) for reading 50μ has been installed, can read IP type HR. l Removal of IP static electricity RU HUB IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing attached to each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush attached to the IP conveyance path. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Console FRRB101002.ai CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-1 MD-2 1.3 1.3.1 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names External View of Machine 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions Name Function Operation Panel Operation panel for the RU main body. System power switch Power switch for the RU. When this switch is pressed with the system power switch in the RU setting and the circuit breaker in the ON state, the RU is powered ON. Power lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I" position and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker remains in the ON state, the POWER lamp is always lit. Cassette loading lamp It is lit (in green) when the RU starts up normally, indicating that cassette loading is ready. While it is not lit, a cassette cannot be loaded. Cassette processing lamp It is lit (in green) while the cassette loaded into the RU is being processed. It blinks when the IP erasure is complete and goes out when the IP is ejected to the cassette. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Cassette removal lamp It is lit (in blue) when removal of a processed cassette is ready. Backlight OFF lamp It blinks (in green) when the RU comes into the HIBERNATION mode. CALL lamp It is lit (in yellow) when an error of level 0 or level 1 occurs. Circuit breaker ON (1): Main power ON OFF (0): Main power OFF Keep ON for usual operation. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-2 MD-3 1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents The language to be displayed on the operation panel and the window vary as shown below depending on the “LANGUAGE” and “SCREEN TYPE” selected at the time of installation of RU software. u NOTE u The Configuration setting on the DX Console need be changed according to the “SCREEN TYPE” of the RU. The connection between the RU and the DX Console is not assured if different selection is made. - When SCREEN TYPE is “CLINIC”, only “1:1 connection” is available. - When SCREEN TYPE is “HOSPITAL”, only “N:N connection” is available. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-3 MD-4 1.4 1.4.1 Machine Components Unit Locations 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-4 MD-5 1.5 1.5.1 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions Cassette Set Unit - 1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Symbol Name Type Function SA1 Cassette IN sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is loaded, and is in CLOSE state when the cassette is loaded. SA2 Cassette hold sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is held, and is in CLOSE state when the cassette is held. SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor determines a 15x30 cassette. It is in OPEN state when the 15x30 cassette is inserted, and in CLOSE state when a cassette of another size is inserted. SA11 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is ejected, is in CLOSE state when the cassette is inserted, and in OPEN state when the cassette is ejected. SA16 Inch/metric sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects the type (inch/metric) of a small-sized cassette. The sensor is in CLOSE state when a smallsized metric cassette is loaded, and is in OPEN state when a small-sized inch cassette is loaded. SOLA1 Cassette hold pin solenoid Power down Holds/releases the cassette hold pin. The sensor is in solenoid OFF state when holding and in ON state when releasing. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-5 MD-6 1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2 Symbol MA1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Name Type Cassette cover opening Two-phase mechanism driving pulse motor motor Function Drives the IP retaining arm, the cassette cover-open mechanism and the debris fall prevention shutter. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-6 MD-7 1.5.3 Cassette Set Unit - 3 Symbol 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Name Type Function SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects whether the debris fall prevention shutter opens or closes, is in OPEN state when the debris fall prevention shutter opens, and in CLOSE state when the shutter closes. SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the IP retaining arm, the cassette cover-open mechanism and the debris fall prevention shutter are at the home position (HP), and is in CLOSE state when they are at the home position. SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette cover-close mechanism is at the home position, and is in CLOSE state when the mechanism is at the home position. SA10 Old/new cassette judgment sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the IP in the cassette is pressed, and is in OPEN state when the IP is pressed. It also detects whether a new cassette or an old cassette is inserted, is in OPEN state when the new cassette is inserted, and stays in CLOSE state when the old cassette is inserted. SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette cover-close mechanism is at a close-cover position, and comes into CLOSE state. MA2 Cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor DC motor Drives the cassette cover-close mechanism. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-7 MD-8 1.5.4 Cassette Set Unit - 4 Symbol 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Name Type Separate transmitting type sensor Function SA4 (SA4-1, SA4-2) IP dropping sensor The sensor detects that the IP drops. An error is detected when the sensor is in CLOSE state with the IP having dropped before suction, or when it is in CLOSE state after the IP is returned to the cassette and before the cassette cover closes. SA4-1: Light emitting side SA4-2: Light receiving side SA6 Suction arm HP sensor PI (5 mm) MA3 Suction arm driving motor Two-phase pulse motor Drives the removal arm. MA4 IP transport motor Two-phase pulse motor Conveys the IP. PA1 IP suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP. It sucks the IP turned ON. SVA1 IP air leak valve Solenoid valve Feeds the air to the suction cup to leak the IP from the suction cup. It leaks the IP when turned ON. SVA2 IP suction path changeover valve Solenoid valve Changes over the suction modes. ON : Two suction cups vacuum-retain an IP other than a 15 x 30 size IP. OFF : One suction cup vacuum-retains a 15 x 30 size IP. The sensor detects that the removal arm is at the home position, and is in CLOSE state when the arm is at the home position. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-8 MD-9 1.5.5 Subscanning Unit - 1 Symbol 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Name Type Function SC1 Grip release/Dust remove HP sensor PI (5 mm) Detects that the grip release mechanism and dust remove mechanism are at their home positions (HP). Sensor becomes OPEN when they are at HPs. SC3 IP sensor 1 PI (19 mm) Detect the IP. When the leading edge of IP reaches this sensor, the signal is sent to the SND board. Then, the IP conveyance speed changes from normal conveyance speed to reading conveyance speed. Sensor becomes OPEN when IP is detected. SC9 "15x30/24x30 IP width" Reflecting-type Detects the size of remaining IPs during bootup. identifying sensor photo-sensor BCRC1 Barcode reader Barcode reader Reads IP barcode. MC1 Side-positioning IP transport motor Two-phase pulse motor Conveys the IP. MC2 Grip release/Dust remove motor Two-phase pulse motor Drives the grip release mechanism and dust remove mechanism. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-9 MD-10 1.5.6 Subscanning Unit - 2 Symbol 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Name Type Function SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light (SED27A) receiving element SZ2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5 mm) MZ1 Subscanning motor Two-phase pulse motor Conveys the IP. MZ2 Grip release motor Two-phase pulse motor Drives the grip mechanism. Detects the tip of the IP to be read. Detects that the grip release mechanism is at its home position (HP). CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-10 MD-11 1.5.7 Housing Symbol SG1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Name IP sensor 2 Type PI (19 mm) Function Detects that the IP being conveyed is present. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-11 MD-12 1.6 1.6.1 Board Locations 1.6.2 Erasure Unit Housing 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-12 MD-13 1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit 1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 1.6.5 Subscanning Unit CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-13 MD-14 2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.1.2 l Settable items and default values u NOTE u In this chapter, the "RU Application", "RU IP Address", and "RU Configuration" are referred to shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively. 2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console The exchange of data between the RU and Console is described below. 2.1.1 Flow of Network Setting Data Data Flow during Routine Processing l Flow of image data The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the CPU board, and transferred to the Console via the network. l Flow of log data - The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon occurrence of a FATAL error. - The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is reached, and, once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis. Console RU COMMON Setup items FLASH ROM Default values RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.10 RU subnet mask RU PC-TOOL 255.255.0.0 RU default gateway RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.0 FTP server IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.20 RU secure IP address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0 RU secure net address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0 l Flow of network setting data The network setting data is not written into the CPU board only by clicking [SET] button on the RU PC-TOOL window. You need click [UPDATE] button to write the network setting data into the CPU board. The contents set from the RU PC-TOOL are stored on the CPU board FLASH ROM. Console RU CPU board Network setting data CPU board Setting means RU IP address RU PC-TOOL Image data FTP server The settings are made from the RU PC-TOOL. The settable items and their default values are as follows. FLASH ROM [SET] [UPDATE] Memory (SDRAM) Network setting data Image data Log data Log data FRRB102001.ai RU-specific data FRRB102002.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-14 MD-15 2.2 Error Handling The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where it is inoperable. n Error Handling When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP reading, the IP is returned to the cassette. n Cases where Retry Is Impossible (FATAL Error) (1) When the function of the CPU board stops. (2) When the power supply voltage output stops. 2.3 What Is Sleep Mode? The "Sleep mode" is such that, in order to save power, the conditions in the machine automatically change to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within a specified period of time. n Operation in the Sleep Mode Upon entering the Sleep mode, only the power of the CPU board is kept ON, while the power of other components is left OFF. Only the power/erasing mode indicator lamp on the operation panel lights up in green in the Sleep mode. n Transition to the Sleep Mode l Transition requirements - If "Sleep mode ON" is set in the CONFIGURATION and the RU is not operated within the preset "Sleep mode transition time" while the RU remains in READY state, the machine transits to the Sleep mode. - The stand-by switch is kept pressed for 4 seconds. - When the Console is shut down. l Setting the Sleep mode You can specify whether the Sleep mode is to be used and the period of time in which the machine transits to the Sleep mode in the CONFIGURATION. - Whether the Sleep mode is to be used Set by the “Sleep mode Change” command in the CONFIGURATION. - Time to transit to the Sleep mode Set by the “Sleep Mode Change Time ([min])” command in the CONFIGURATION. n Recovery from Sleep Mode l Recover requirements Press the stand-by switch. l Processing upon recovery Upon recovery from the Sleep mode, the RU performs a home-positioning operation of the suction arm. In addition, the initial self-diagnosis of the mechanical components takes place, as well as home-positioning of the RU suction arm, under one of the following conditions. - The mechanical components are located at other than the home positions. - One of sensors detects an IP. - A cassette is set in the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-15 MD-16 2.4 RU Bootup Processing The following self-diagnoses are carried out after the power is turned ON. Connection verification between the RU and the Console is also carried out concurrently with the selfdiagnoses. n Initialization of the Mechanical Components 2.5 RU Termination Processing Termination processing of the mechanism and the log data storage take place. u NOTE u If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be saved. The initialization of the mechanical components consists of the following five stages. l Before IP search stage The cassette cover opening mechanism is moved to the reference position, and the suction arm is moved to the home position. l IP search stage The motor is rotated by an appropriate amount to convey the IP to a position where it can be confirmed by the sensor, on the assumption that the IP is located at a position where it cannot be detected by the sensor within the machine. n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing (1) "Shutdown processing" command Two instructions are available for a case where “system shutdown of the Console is carried out” and a case where “the stand-by switch of the RU is pressed”. (2) Execute "saving of log data", and turn OFF the power. Saving of log data: Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server. l After IP search stage The suction arm is moved to the home position. l Remaining IP ejection stage When an IP is found within the machine during the IP search stage, its size is measured and the IP is returned to the cassette. If a cassette is not set in the RU, the message prompting to set an empty cassette appears. l After remaining IP ejection The self-diagnosis of the cassette cover closing mechanism is carried out, and the cassette hold is released. n Initialization of the Scanner Mechanism The scanner mechanism is initialized. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-16 MD-17 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected Fuse mounted Board CPU63A board To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage output detection function, which offers the following features: - Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault. - The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors the power supply voltage output. - The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection circuits (points) in which an error has occurred. - The DC motors are protected by a driver circuit (mounted on the board) which incorporates an overcurrent protection circuit. The driver circuit always detects a current and outputs a current of up to 2 A. If it detects the current larger than 2 A, it stops outputting the current by the protection circuit. 3.1.1 SND27A board PIF63A board Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit and the Components to Be Protected Protection circuit mounted part SND27A board Power supply +24 V Component to be protected DC motor: MA2 ERS37A board Power supply Fuse No. Component to be protected +5V F20 Barcode reader +5V F13 SYN27A, SED27A +5V F7 PNL63A +12V F19 PNL63A +24V F8 IP suction pump : PA1 +24V F9 Driver IC : U14 +5V F10 Sensor : SG1, SC3, SC9, SZ2, SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4-1, SA4-2, SA6 ,SA7, SA8, SA9, SA10, SA11, SA12, SC1, SA16 +12V F1 CPU63A +5V F20 CPU63A +24V F3 CPU63A +24V F12 SND27A +15V F4 CPU63A -15V F5 CPU63A +24V F1 LED REFERENCE The pulse motors (MA1, MA3, MA4, MC1, MZ1 and MZ2) are protected by the PIF63A board fuse (F12). 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-17 MD-18 3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram Sensor drive board: SND27A F8 IP suction pump: PA1 F9 Alpha II Power supply +12V Power interface board: PIF63A F1 +5V +5V +24V DRV Pulse motor: MC2 DRV Pulse motor: MA1 DRV Pulse motor: MA3 DRV Pulse motor: MA4 DRV Pulse motor: MC1 F10 Sensors: SG1, SC1, SC3, SC9, SZ2, SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4-1, SA4-2, SA6, SA7, SA8, SA9, SA10, SA11, SA12, SA16 F2 +15V F4 -15V F5 +24V F3 F12 DRV Pulse motor: MZ1 DRV Pulse motor: MZ2 DRV DC motor: MA2 CPU board: CPU63A +12V +5V +24V IP leading-edge detection board: SED27A F13 Start-point detection board : SYN27A F20 +15V -15V +5V +24V +24V Barcode reader PNL board: PNL63A F7 F19 Fuse F1 LED LED erasure board: ERS37A F1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Fuse, and blown fuse detection circuit LED erasure board: ERS37A LED DRV Driver circuit incorporating an overcurrent protection circuit (upper limit of 2 A) DRV Driver circuit without an overcurrent protection circuit CR-IR 359 Service Manual XL2A103004.ai MD-18 MD-19 3.2 Erasure Unit Control n Erasure Unit Control The erasure LED control circuit is located on the ERS board. It is for turning ON/OFF the LED and controlling detection of unlit LED. n Erasure Operation Three kinds of operations are used, one for erasure after the IP reading (routine erasure) and the other for erasure when the erasure button on the RU operation panel is pressed (primary erasure/secondary erasure). The difference between the two modes is whether or not an image is to be output. - Routine erasure A dose exposed to the IP is measured, and the erasing method is changed depending on the detected dose. The dose is measured when the image is read by the scanner unit (light-collecting unit). - Primary erasure The IP is erased similarly to routine erasure. Difference from the routine erasure is that no image is output. - Secondary erasure Difference from the primary erasure is that the erasure is performed periodically regardless of an X-ray dose exposed to the IP. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-19 MD-20 3.3 3.3.1 LEDs on the SND27A Board and the CPU63A Board LEDs on the SND27A Board LED No. (illumination Name color) D18 (green) Suction arm HP D21 (green) ERS37A board D24 (green) Cassette cover opening mechanism HP D27 (green) D33 (green) D36 (green) Cassette cover closing mechanism HP 15x30 cassette identification Sensor not connected ERS37A board D39 (green) Cassette ejection D42 (green) Cassette cover close position D45 (green) D47 (green) D49 (green) IP drop Sensor not connected IP sensor 2 D51 (green) D52 (green) IP sensor 1 15x30/24x30 IP width identification Grip release HP sensor D30 (green) D53 (green) LED No. (illumination Name color) D6 (green) Cassette IN D9 (green) D12 (green) D15 (green) Cassette hold Debris fall prevention shutter Old/new cassette judgement 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Significance when the LED lights or flashes Lit when the cassette is loaded/ Unlit when the cassette is not loaded Lit when the cassette is held/Unlit otherwise Lit when the shutter is closed/ Unlit when the shutter opens Lit when the cassette IP is not retained or an old cassette is loaded/ Unlit when the IP is retained and a new cassette is loaded D54 (green) D55 (green) D59 (green) D60 (green) D61 (green) D62 (green) D7 (orange) D10 (orange) D13 (orange) Sensor not connected Sensor not connected DSP1 DSP1 DSP2 DSP2 Cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor Cassette hold solenoid Cassette hold solenoid D16 (orange) D19 (orange) D56 (orange) IP leak Suction switchover IP suction pump Significance when the LED lights or flashes Lit when the removal arm is at the home position/ Unlit when the removal arm is at another position Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/ Unlit when not detected Lit when the IP retaining arm, the cassette cover opening mechanism, and the debris fall prevention shutter are at their home positions/Unlit otherwise Lit when the cassette cover closing mechanism is at the home position/Unlit otherwise Lit when a cassette other than the 15x30 cassette is loaded/ Unlit the 15x30 cassette is loaded Always lit after the machine power is turned ON Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/ Unlit when not detected Lit when the cassette is loaded/ Unlit when the cassette is ejected Lit when the cassette cover closing mechanism is at the position of closing the cassette cover/ Unlit when the mechanism is not at the closing position Lit when the IP drops/Unlit otherwise Always lit after the machine power is turned ON Lit when the IP being conveyed is present/ Unlit when no IP is present Lit when no IP is detected/Unlit when an IP is detected Lit when no remaining IP is detected during bootup/ Unlit when detected Lit when the grip mechanism is at the home position/ Unlit otherwise Always lit after the machine power is turned ON Always lit after the machine power is turned ON Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-20 MD-21 3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU63A Board LED No. (illumination color) D7 (green) D8 (green) D10 (green) D11 (green) D12 (green) D13 (green) D14 (green) D15 (green) D16 (green) D17 (green) D18 (green) D19 (green) D20 (green) D21 (green) D22 (green) D23 (green) D24 (green) D25 (green) D27 (red) Significance when the LED lights or flashes Lit when communicating with the PC/Unlit otherwise Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise Always flashes 45 seconds after the machine power is turned ON Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise Polygon speed HR_MODE enabled (unlit during normal operation) PMT artificial voltage ON enabled (unlit during normal operation) PMT artificial light source forcible OFF enabled (unlit during normal operation) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise For debugging use (Normally unlit) For debugging use (Lit during scanning)/Unlit otherwise For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON) Lit when the high-voltage switch is turned ON/ Unlit when the high-voltage switch is turned OFF CN10 Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected (green and orange) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-21 MD-22 3.4 Checking the Voltage n PIF63A Board u INSTRUCTION u 3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of the PIF63A Board / Alfha II Power Source Replace the board if the power supply voltage is out of the standard range at a measurement point. n Board Location and Measurement Points Voltage +24 V +5 V +15 V +12 V -15 V Measurement point TP8 TP2 TP3 TP1 TP4 Voltage standard range 23.0 to 25.0 V 4.8 to 5.2 V 14.4 to 15.6 V 11.5 to 12.5 V -15.6 to -14.1 V Adjustment value 24.5 V 5.1 V 15.25 V 12.0 V -15.25 V n Alpha II Power Source u INSTRUCTIONS u - Voltage adjustment is not necessary. - Voltage output range: +21.6 to 26.4 V (±10%) between the 5 and 8 pins and between the 1 and 4 pins of the CN51. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-22 MD-23 4. 4.1 Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and Its Operation Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence REFERENCE The I/O names (CPU board, polygon (POL), etc.) in the following sequence correspond to the I/O names in illustration of the scanner controller unit, and are denoted in the form of: m I/O name; description of operation for that I/O name [Example] m CPU board; Correction data initial setting This means that the CPU board performs initial setting of the correction data. n Machine Power ON m CPU board; Correction data initial setting m CPU board; Scanner self-diagnostics {MD:4.4_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem} n Cassette Loading m Polygon (POL); Start Since it takes time for the polygon to get stable, it is started at the same time as the cassette is loaded. n IP Conveyance m CPU board; Setting of reading conditions Conditions are set according to a combination of the IP size, IP type, and the reading mode that is preset with the Console. m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics m Laser (LD); ON m IP sensor 2 (SG1); IP size measurement n IP Moved to the Subscanning Unit m Leading-edge sensor (SED); IP leading-edge detection Detects the laser light reflected from the IP. m PMT board, CPU board; Start of image reading {MD:4.3_Image Data Flow} m Grip release motor (MZ2); Gripping/releasing of driving shaft/driven shaft m Trailing edge detection (SED); The trailing edge of the IP is detected (completion of reading is detected) n Reading Termination Processing m Laser (LD); OFF m Polygon (POL); Stop m High voltage power supply (HV); Idling m CPU board; Erasing level detection, error determination, change-ofS-value detection n IP Moved to the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide The IP moves to the post-reading conveyance guide, and the reading operation is complete. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-23 MD-24 4.2 Correction Data Shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data, and speed correction data are located in the FLASH ROM on the CPU board. The data is copied into the SDRAM when the power of the machine is turned ON, and used in operation. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-24 MD-25 4.3 Image Data Flow The flow of image data is described below. Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2), and so forth in the image data flow illustration. It should be noted that the image data is sent to the Console nearly concurrently with reading. (1) When the laser light from the scanning optics unit hits the IP, it becomes luminescence data, which is read by the photomultiplier through the lightcollecting guide. (2) The resulting data is sent, in the form of analog data, from the photomultiplier board (PMT board) to the CPU board. (3) Analog data is converted to digital data (AD conversion) on the CPU board. (4) Digital data is output to the DSP via the FIFO, and subjected to image processing and shading correction. Thereafter, it is temporarily stored in the SDRAM on the CPU board. (5) The image data stored in the SDRAM is sent to the Console via the network under control of the main CPU located on the CPU board. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-25 MD-26 4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem (1) Error code The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the control signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to facilitate identification of their causes. (2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics (A) Polygon start (B) Laser ON (C) Scanner self-diagnostics Spurious current is made to flow, and reading takes place. Whether the reading can correctly take place is also checked. (D) Laser OFF (E) Error check for self-diagnostics (3) Polygon diagnostics It is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a predetermined time after the polygon is started. (4) Error detection during reading During reading, an error caused by a timeout is detected. (5) Check after reading is completed In order to check whether abnormal is found with reading operation, error check is performed upon completion of reading. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-26 MD-27 5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their Operations Function 5.1 IP Conveyance Flow Cassette Cassette set unit [6] [1] Erasure unit [5] Lightcollecting unit Description [1] Feeds an IP from a cassette. Opens the cover of the cassette that is inserted into the cassette set unit. Feeds the IP from the cassette and conveys it to the erasure unit. [2] Removes dust from the IP surface. Operates the brush rollers to remove dust and other foreign matter from the IP surface. [3] Reads an image. Reads an image that is recorded on the IP. [4] Conveys the IP. Transfers the IP, whose image has been read. [5] Removes dust from the brush rollers. Drops into the brush roller assembly the dust that was deposited on the brush rollers. Erases an image. Erases an image that is recorded on the IP. [6] Loads an IP into a cassette. Loads the IP, whose image has been erased, into the cassette, and closes the cassette cover. Ejects the cassette. [2] Subscanning unit Scanning optics unit [4] [3] FRRB105001.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-27 MD-28 5.2 Cassette Set Unit l From cassette insertion to cassette hold This section describes the operations that the sensors and mechanisms in the cassette set unit perform during routine processing. 5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation n Feed Conveyance Operation l Conditions before the cassette insertion The sensors are under the following conditions before the cassette is inserted. The dust cover prevents foreign matter (ballpoint pen, clip or the like) or dust from dropping into the machine before the cassette is inserted. When a cassette is inserted into the machine, the SA1 and SA11 close. Also, the movable guide assembly and 15x30 cassette movable guide assembly lowers in accordance with cassette size to open/close the "15x30 (cm) cassette" identifying sensor (SA9) and the inch/ metric detecting sensor (SA16). The size of the inserted cassette is determined in accordance with the OPEN/CLOSE status of the SA9 and SA16. Cassette size 15x30 (cm) cassette Small cassette size (metric): 24x30 (cm), 18x24 (cm) Small cassette size (inch): 10x12 (inch), 8x10 (inch) Large cassette size: 14x17 (inch), 14x14 (inch), 35x43 (cm), 35x35 (cm) SA9 CLOSE SA16 CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSE When the SA1 and SA11 close, the SOLA1 is OFF, to hold the cassette. When the SOLA1 is OFF, the SA2 opens to detect that the cassette is held. SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 SA6 SA7 SA8 SA9 SA10 SA11 SA12 SA16 SOLA1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OPEN CLOSE ON SA16 SOLA1 SA10 SA11 SA8 SA12 SA2 SA4-1 SA9 SA7 SA4-2 SA6 SA3 SA11 SA9 SOLA1 SA1 XL2A105003.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 SA16 SA2 SA1 XL2A105004.ai CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-28 MD-29 l From cassette hold to determination of IP conveyance When it is detected that the cassette is held, the MA1 is driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. When the shutter closes, the SA3 closes and the SA7 opens. When the SA3 closes and the SA7 opens, the machine determines that the IP can be conveyed. REFERENCES - The debris fall prevention shutter prevents a foreign matter (ballpoint pen, clip or the like) from falling into the conveyance path in the machine, even when the shutter of the cassette inlet is open. - The SA7 detects whether the debris fall prevention shutter is at its home position. l IP retainer operation When the IP can be conveyed, the MA1 is again driven, and the IP retaining arm retains the IP in the cassette. When the IP retaining arm moves from its home position, the SA10 opens and detects that the IP is retained. REFERENCE Pressing the cassette button by the IP retaining arm to retain the IP, the IP is prevented from falling until the IP is sucked after the cassette cover opens. Concurrently, discrimination of a new cassette and an old cassette also takes place. When a new cassette is inserted, the SA10 is kept open and when an old cassette is inserted, it is kept closed. SA10 : OPEN SA7 : OPEN SA3 : CLOSE FRRB105004.ai FRRB105005.ai 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-29 MD-30 l Opening of the cassette cover The MA1 is again driven when it is detected that the SA10 opens, to cause the cassette cover opening pin to rise and cause the cassette cover to open (SA7 opens). If the IP drops before the conveyance due to a failure in retaining the IP, the SA4 closes. l From suction of the IP to its conveyance When the cassette cover opens, the MA3 is driven to move the IP removal arm to the sucking position. When the IP removal arm moves to the sucking position, the SA6 opens. The IP is sucked by the IP suction pump (PA1). The IP removal arm, when sucking the IP, moves it to the conveyance start position, and then starts to convey the IP. SA6 : OPEN SA7 : OPEN SA5 : OPEN SA4 FRRB105007.ai REFERENCE The IP drop sensor (SA4: separate sensor) detects that the IP has dropped due to a failure in retaining the IP or the like. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 FRRB105008.ai CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-30 MD-31 l IP suction <When the IP is to be vacuum-retained by the right- and left-hand suction cups> The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2) turns ON. The PA1 operates so that the right- and left-hand suction cups vacuum-retain the IP. ON OFF PA1 SVA2 SVA1 FRRB105009.ai <When the IP is to be vacuum-retained by the reference side suction cups> The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2) turns OFF. The PA1 operates so that the left-hand suction cup vacuum-retains the IP. PA1 OFF OFF SVA2 SVA1 FRRB105010.ai <When IP suction is to be released> The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns ON and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2) turns ON. This releases IP suction. PA1 ON ON SVA2 SVA1 FRRB108011.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-31 MD-32 5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation l Returning the IP to the inside of the cassette When the suction cup sucks the IP, the IP removal arm moves and moves the IP into the cassette. When the IP is moved into the cassette, the IP retaining arm moves to retain the IP in the cassette. When the IP retaining arm moves, the SA10 opens. n Load Conveyance Operation l From reading to erasure of images The IP which has been read is conveyed to the erasure unit. Images on the IP are erased when the IP passes through the erasure unit. l IP suction The IP removal arm moves to the IP suction position to suck the IP when the IP is conveyed to a predetermined position, and the SA6 opens. When the suction cup comes into contact with the IP, the IP suction pump is turned ON to suck the IP. SA10 : OPEN FRRB105013.ai SA6 : OPEN l Moving the IP removal arm to the home position When the SA10 opens and it is detected that the IP is retained, the suction cup releases the IP it is sucking. After releasing the IP, the IP removal arm returns to the home position, and the SA6 closes. FRRB105012.ai SA6 : CLOSE FRRB105014.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-32 MD-33 l Closing the cassette cover When the SA6 closes and it is detected that the IP removal arm has returned to the home position, the cassette cover closing assembly moves to close the cassette cover. The SA8 opens and the SA12 closes then. l Moving the cassette cover closing assembly When the IP retainer is released, the cassette cover closing assembly moves to the home position. The SA12 opens and the SA8 closes then. SA8 : CLOSE SA8 : OPEN SA12 : OPEN SA12 : CLOSE FRRB105017.ai FRRB105015.ai l Releasing the IP retainer When the cassette cover closes, the IP retaining arm moves to the home position and the SA10 closes. l Opening the debris fall prevention shutter When the cassette cover closes, the debris fall prevention shutter opens to prevent foreign matter from dropping into the conveyance path. The SA7 closes and the SA3 opens then. SA10 : CLOSE SA7 : CLOSE SA3 : OPEN FRRB105018.ai FRRB105016.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-33 MD-34 l Releasing the cassette hold When the debris fall prevention shutter opens, the SOLA1 is turned ON, to release the cassette hold. When the SOLA1 is turned ON, the SA2 closes. When the cassette hold is released, the cassette can be removed. l Removing the cassette When the cassette is removed, the shutter closes. SA1 and SA11 open, and SA9 and S16 close. SA16 : CLOSE SA11 : OPEN SOLA1 : ON SA2 : CLOSE FRRB105019.ai SA9 : CLOSE SA1 : OPEN XL2A105005.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-34 MD-35 5.3 Erasure Unit n Operation of the Erasure Unit The erasure unit has three functions, that is, cleaning the IP, erasing images and cleaning the brush roller. It cleans the IP when feeding the IP, and erases the IP and cleans the brush roller when loading the IP. The operation of the erasure unit differs depending on whether the IP is being fed or loaded. l Operation when feeding the IP The brush roller on the lower part of the erasure unit removes dust from the IP. The brush roller does not rotate by the half-clutch spur gears. l Operation when loading the IP n Configuration of the Erasure Unit, and the IP Conveyance Path The IP is conveyed between the lamp assembly and the reflection plate. The IP conveyance roller is driven by the MA4 located on the cassette set unit. The erasure unit has the following two functions when loading the IP. - Erasing the image - Cleaning the brush roller Erasure unit IP front surface (exposure surface) IP rear surface Cassette set unit rubber roller Filter Reflection plate Lamp (LED) Subscanning unit rubber roller Brush roller XL2A105001.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-35 MD-36 5.3.1 IP Dust Removal by Brush Rollers and Cleaning the Brush Roller The brush rollers, which are mounted at the bottom of the erasure unit, are used to remove dust and other foreign matter from the IP. The half-clutch spur gears, which are mounted on the brush roller assembly, function so that the brush roller operation in the IP reading sequence differs from the one in the IP erasure sequence. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-36 MD-37 5.4 Subscanning Unit 5.4.1 IP Reading When the IP passes over the center roller, laser light is radiated from the scanning optics unit. When the laser radiated from the scanning optics unit comes against the IP, the image recorded on the IP emits light. The light emitted from the IP is directly gathered by the lightcollecting guide or reflected by the light collecting mirror and then gathered by the lightcollecting guide. The light collected on the light-collecting guide is fed to the photomultiplier (PMT board) and processed as image data. The configuration of the scanning optics unit, the light-collecting guide, and the rollers is as follows. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading The cam attached to the MZ2 and the SZ2 drive the grip release arm. While the IP is gripped/released, the IP is conveyed and read. If the IP shifts due to the vibration of the motor or oscillation of the machine during the IP reading, abnormalities in images might result. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-37 MD-38 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-38 MD-39 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-39 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 11, 43, 49-64, 72-83 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Troubleshooting (MT) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected MT-1 1. 1.1 Overview of Troubleshooting Flow of Troubleshooting Trouble occurred Checking the Error Log {MT:1.2.1_Checking the Error Log} 1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code {MT:1.2_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:2._Error Code Table} 2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console n Error Classifications RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories: 1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the Console screen to display an error code upon error detection 2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console Console-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready 3. Errors causing image abnormalities Errors that result in image abnormalities due to a scratched IP, laser light blockage caused by dust, or electrical/scanner system component abnormalities 4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to detect an error code Errors that occur due to a CPU board, interrupt the progress of a process, and cause the inability to detect an error code 5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU board due to an improper FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting 3. Errors causing image abnormalities 4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code and the inability of the machine to boot 5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-1 MT-2 1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log 1.2.1 Checking the Error Log Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of error codes. START n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis. Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about errors encountered during the user’s use of the machine. If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered during troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information. Therefore, you may lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s use of the machine. n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code displayed on the Console represents the last-encountered error. You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting. Back up the ERROR LOG and CONFIGURAION. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} Start the ERROR DB to view the error log. {MU:4.18_ERROR DB} END 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-2 MT-3 1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble (1) Group the errors that occurred. (2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that occurred first). (Example) - Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence groups, because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 minutes. - The first error in Group A is "12302". n When an Error Occurred after "Time Data" Was Acquired from the Console Error codes displayed on the Console screen A B Error code that occurred last Error code that occurred second Code of the error that occurred first. Perform troubleshooting with this error code. FRRB201001.ai n When an Error Occurred before "Time Data" Was Acquired from the Console Error codes displayed on the Console screen A B n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error occurrence timing. l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the Console Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time" indications. Error code Occurrence date 12256 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00257D tiphscan____ 3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817 12255 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00258D tiphscan____ 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Error code that occurred second Code of the error that occurred first. Perform troubleshooting with this error code. FRRB201003.ai l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the Console The resulting "occurrence date/time" indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25". Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field. The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first. Error Occurrence Occurrence time code date 10300 0000.00.00 00:00:19 00257D tiphscan____ 3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817 10302 0000.00.00 00:00:10 00258D tiphscan____ 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Error code that occurred second Code of the error that occurred first. Perform troubleshooting with this error code. FRRB201004.ai Error code that occurred last Error code that occurred second Code of the error that occurred first. Perform troubleshooting with this error code. n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred First If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting. FRRB201002.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-3 MT-4 1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table When the error causing the failure is identified, see the “Probable Cause and Remedy” in the error code table, and proceed with the operation. n Error Code Table Description The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search. Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence conditions. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-4 MT-5 n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category 1XYZZ 00 to 99: Reference number for each error category 0 to 9: Error category 0 to 4: Error level 1: 1 for all RU errors FRRB201005.ai l X: Error level Error level notations FATAL error: 0 - The user is notified of an error occurrence. - Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed. - It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: OS (operating system software), libraries Image processing CPU Scanner control (for front side) Conveyance control Overall control Network control Scanner control (for back side) Electrical/hardware related Reserved Others (software installation, version update, etc.) l ZZ: Reference number It is managed according to each error category. WARNING: 2 - An error is logged, but the user is not notified. - Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable. - It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action. WARNING: 1 - The user is notified of an error occurrence. - Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette or IP, etc.). - If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action. WARNING: 4 - An error is logged, but the user is not notified. - Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed. - If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action. WARNING: 3 - An error is logged, but the user is not notified. - Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-5 MT-6 1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch CAUTION Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made with the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON. The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned ON while the high-voltage switch is ON. (1) Remove the front cover and the right-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} (2) Remove the right-hand side board box plate. {MC:3.2_Plate} (3) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S11) of the CPU board. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-6 MT-7 2. Error Code Table Error Code 10001 10002 10003 10004 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy File open error (1) [During bootup] When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the DRAM. File read error (1) [During bootup] When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the DRAM. File format error (1) [During bootup] When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the DRAM. File write error (1) [During bootup] When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the DRAM. - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file. - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it. - Replace the CPU board. - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file. - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it. - Replace the CPU board. - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file. - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it. - Replace the CPU board. - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file. - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it. - Replace the CPU board. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-7 MT-8 Error Code 10005 10207 Error Name File close error (1) SED board power supply error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the DRAM. [During bootup or routine processing] An error about the connection (power supply) with the leadingedge detection (SED) board was detected. - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file. - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it. - Replace the CPU board. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the SED board connectors. - Replace the SED board. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 10220 HV high voltage power supply error [During bootup] An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out of range. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the PMT board connectors. - Replace the PMT board. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-8 MT-9 Error Code 10222 Error Name PMT 15V voltage error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup or routine processing] An error is detected for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, 15VOKL). - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the PMT board connectors. - Replace the PMT board. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 10223 HV-ON high-voltage value error [During bootup] An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out of range when HV is on. - Check the fuses of the CPU board. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and the CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the PMT board connectors. - Replace the PMT board. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. 10240 SYN interval count error [During bootup] An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count. - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. - Replace the scanning optics unit. - Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-9 MT-10 Error Code 10248 Error Name Polygon lock timeout (2nd) Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup or routine processing] The polygon OK signal cannot be detected (twice) within the specified time after turning on the polygon. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. - Replace the scanning optics unit. - Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 10250 Leading edge detection timeout [During routine processing] The interrupt for detecting the leading edge did not occur within the specified time. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the SED board connectors. - Replace the SED board. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. - Check the error log for other errors. If any error occurs, analyze it. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. 10252 Image read error [During bootup or routine processing] The image reading error occurred. - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. - Replace the scanning optics unit. - Replace the SED board. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-10 MT-11 Error Code 10253 10287 10311 10312 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy FIFO overflow [During bootup or routine processing] The image buffer FIFO was overflowed. Light-shielding check [During routine processing] It was detected that the QL value was 80 or more when detecting S-value shift. Cassette hold sensor combination inconsistency [During bootup] The cassette width sensors detected an abnormal combination when the cassette set unit performed a cassette hold operation. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold release (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). Cassette sensor combination inconsistency (1) - Replace the CPU board. - Check the installation of the plate. - Perform the check and the removal/reinstallation of the coaxial cable of the PMT board. [During bootup] The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). - Check for abnormalities in installing the cassette hold mechanism. - Check the detecting area of the sensor (SA2) for smears. - Reseat the sensor (SA2) connector. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators (SA1 and SA11). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-11 MT-12 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10325 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP release error [During bootup or routine processing] When a home position release operation was performed for the cassette cover closing mechanism, the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10326 Cassette cover closing mechanism home positioning error [During bootup or routine processing] When an attempt was made to return the cassette cover closing mechanism to its home position, the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-12 MT-13 Error Code 10327 Error Name Debris fall prevention shutter close error during bootup Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was closed). - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10328 IP hold release error during bootup [During bootup] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10329 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP detection error [During bootup or routine processing] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-13 MT-14 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10332 Debris fall prevention shutter open error (1) [During bootup or routine processing] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to perform an approaching operation). However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was open. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10333 Debris fall prevention shutter open error (2) [During bootup or routine processing] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to perform a returning operation). However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was open. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10334 Debris fall prevention shutter open error (3) [During bootup or routine processing] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse. However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was open. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-14 MT-15 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10336 Suction arm home positioning error [During bootup or routine processing] When a suction arm home positioning operation was performed, the suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven. However, it was impossible to detect that the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/ stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 or 12491 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10340 10343 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Cassette size sensor combination error (2) IP drop detection during bootup [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the cassette IN sensor and cassette ejection sensor in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-15 MT-16 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10344 IP holding arm release error during bootup (1) [During bootup] When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position, the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10345 IP holding arm release error during bootup (2) [During bootup] When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position while the cassette cover opening mechanism was in the cassette cover open position, the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-16 MT-17 Error Code 10346 10347 Error Name Feed IP drop detection during bootup (1) IP sensor combination error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] When an IP feed operation was performed for a remaining IP search process, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped. [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) and conveyor unit IP sensor 1 (SC3) were CLOSED (detected an IP). Therefore, the system went down. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When a conveyance error occurs] 10348 Remaining IP conveyance error (conveyor unit) [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time (did not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed in the conveyor unit. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-17 MT-18 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] 10349 Remaining IP conveyance error (sub scanning) [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, the IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time (did not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed in the subscanning unit. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10353 Remaining IP length measurement conveyance error (1) [During bootup] When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-18 MT-19 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10354 Remaining IP length measurement conveyance error (2) [During bootup] When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when stopping one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10355 Remaining IP length measurement conveyance error (3) [During bootup] When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-19 MT-20 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. 10356 Nonstandard IP detection - Check to make sure that the sensors (SC3 and SC9) normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. [During bootup] When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed, a nonstandard IP size was detected. - Replace the sensors. [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. 10358 Remaining IP side-positioning error (1) [During bootup] When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed, the IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check to make sure that the sensor (SC3) normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Replace the sensors. [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10359 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Remaining IP search error [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven. However, one of the motor had an error. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-20 MT-21 Error Code 10360 Error Name Feed IP drop detection during bootup (2) Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] When an IP feed operation was performed within the cassette for a remaining IP ejection process, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10361 Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning error [During bootup or routine processing] When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven. However, it was impossible to detect that the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-21 MT-22 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10364 Remaining IP load conveyance error during bootup (1) [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-22 MT-23 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10365 Remaining IP load conveyance error during bootup (2) [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10373 10379 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Cassette hold release error [During bootup or routine processing] An error was detected when releasing the cassette hold. - Update the version to the newest version. Cassette hold error [During bootup or routine processing] An error was detected when holding cassette. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-23 MT-24 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] 10380 Cassette cover opening mechanism error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was CLOSED. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10382 10386 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 IP fall prevention driving error [During routine processing] An error was detected when driving the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) for IP fall prevention. - Update the version to the newest version. Opening cover error [During routine processing] An error was detected when driving the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) to open the cover. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-24 MT-25 Error Code 10389 10390 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Feed IP suction error [During routine processing] Driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA3), turning on/ off of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on/off of the suction switching valve (SVA2), and turning on of the IP suction pump (PA1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. Error was detected in either operation. Feed IP error [During bootup or routine processing] Turning off of the leak valve (SVA1), turning off of the suction switching valve (SVA2), driving of the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1), driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA3), and driving of the the IP transport motors (MA4) were performed in the IP-feed operation. Error was detected in either operation. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10391 IP holding arm release error (1) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position after IP suction. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-25 MT-26 Error Code 10392 Error Name Feed IP leak error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During routine processing] Turning on of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the suction switching valve (SVA2), and turning off of the IP suction pump (PA1) were performed in the feed-leak operation. An error was detected in either operation. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10393 Feed IP holding error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) for IP holding was driven. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-26 MT-27 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. [When no conveyance error occurs] 10395 Pre-length-measurement IP position detection error (2) [During routine processing] The IP transport motor (MA4) was driven to return an IP to the cassette after an IP drop. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10396 10397 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Feed IP conveyance error [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4/MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an error. Feed IP conveyance retry stopped error [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4/MC1/MZ1) were stopped in feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an error. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-27 MT-28 Error Code 10400 10404 10414 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Turn roller nip HP perform error [During bootup or routine processing] When a turn roller nip configuration home positioning was performed, the turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven. However, it was impossible to detect that the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. BCR read retry conveyance error When an IP return conveyance operation was performed during routine processing for the purpose of retrying to read a barcode, the IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Subscanning conveyance error [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in reading conveyance, and one of the motors had an error. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-28 MT-29 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. 10419 Post-reading conveyance error (1) [During routing processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10420 Erasure conveyance error [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven to perform an IP erasure conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-29 MT-30 Error Code 10421 Error Name IP suction error (after IP reading) Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During routine processing] Turning on of the leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the suction switching valve (SVA2), and driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA3) were performed in the IP-loading operation. Error was detected in either operation. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an IP drops] 10422 Load IP drop (1) [During routine processing] After the cassette IP holding arm was released, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. - Check for abnormalities of the IP retaining arm mechanism. [When no IP drops] - Check for abnormalities of the sensors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10423 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Load IP drop (2) [During routine processing] After the cassette cover was closed, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-30 MT-31 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10424 IP holding error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. 10425 IP suction positioning preliminary conveyance error [During routine processing] When a suction positioning preliminary conveyance operation was performed for a load IP, the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-31 MT-32 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. 10426 IP suction positioning conveyance error [During routine processing] When a suction positioning conveyance operation was performed for a load IP, the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10427 Debris fall prevention shutter open error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-32 MT-33 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10428 IP hold release error (1) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10429 IP hold release error (2) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-33 MT-34 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10430 Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to achieve cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was closed). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10432 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 IP suction relief error [During routine processing] In the load IP leak operation, the following was performed: driving of the IP transport motor (MA4), driving of suction arm driving motor (MA3), turning off of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning off of the suction switching valve (SVA2), and turning off of the IP suction pump (PA1). Error was detected in one of the operations. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-34 MT-35 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] 10433 IP drop after cassette cover opening (1) [During routine processing] After the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to retract the cassette cover opening pin, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 10434 IP drop after cassette cover opening (2) [During routine processing] After a held IP was released in the load sequence, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-35 MT-36 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10435 IP conveyance error [During bootup or routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed between the erasure unit and conveyor unit. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10436 Cassette cover closing mechanism drive error (1) [During routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-36 MT-37 Error Code 10439 10440 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Cassette cover closing mechanism drive error (2) [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven and stopped in the operation of home-positioning the closing cover, and an error was detected in either operation. Cassette cover closing mechanism drive retry error [During bootup or routine processing] The operation for driving the cassette cover closing mechanism was retried, and the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven and stopped. An error was detected in either operation. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 10441 Debris fall prevention shutter open error (4) [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-37 MT-38 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10443 Bootup cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning error [During bootup] When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved from the reference position to the home position, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10444 Subscanning grip roller positioning error [During bootup] The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven in the operation of positioning the subscanning grip roller to the reference side before IP search, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Check if the motor is working. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-38 MT-39 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. 10445 Subscanning grip roller free rotation error [During bootup or routine processing] The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Check if the motor is working. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10446 Subscanning grip roller homepositioning error [During routine processing] The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ stopping the motor. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Check if the motor is working. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-39 MT-40 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] 10447 Rejection grip roller error [During routine processing] In the operation of rejecting grip, the subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Check if the motor is working. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. 10451 Remaining IP side-positioning error (2) [During bootup] When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed, the IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to achieve IP positioning. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit was CLOSED. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Check if the motor is working. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 10456 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor error [During bootup or routine processing] When an attempt was made to place the cassette cover closing mechanism in its reference position, the cassette cover CLOSE position sensor (SA12) was not OPEN. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-40 MT-41 Error Code 10460 Error Name Bootup cassette new/old determination error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to determine new/old cassette, and error was detected. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10461 Feed conveyance retry error [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform an IP return conveyance operation in the feed conveyance retry sequence. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 10462 Post-reading conveyance error (2) [During routing processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, error was detected when driving one of the motors. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-41 MT-42 Error Code 10470 10471 10472 10473 10474 10476 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy IP conveyance before IP measurement error [During routine processing] A feed-conveyance error occurred before measuring the IP length, and the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven to recover, but error was detected. Arranging IP position conveyance error [During routine processing] An error was detected when the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven in the processing for positioning IP for feedconveyance. Roller grip 2 release error [During routine processing] Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor (MZ2) for releasing the grip of roller 2. - Update the version to the newest version. Roller 2 grip error [During routine processing] Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor (MZ2) for engaging the grip of roller 2. - Update the version to the newest version. Roller 1 grip release error [During routine processing] Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor (MZ2) for releasing error the grip of roller 1. - Update the version to the newest version. Turn roller nip error (2) [During routine processing] The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven to perform a nip operation of the nip in the turn roller nip configuration. However, it was impossible to detect that the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was CLOSED within a predetermined period of time. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-42 MT-43 Error Code Error Name 10710 External erasure data acquisition error [During bootup] It failed to read the erasure data file. - Update the version to the newest version. - Reseat the ERS board connectors. ERS board position error [ During bootup ] It was found that the ERS board was not mounted in the correct position. For the correct board position, refer to the MD volume. 10731 10900 Configuration initialization failure Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy - Replace the CPU board. [During bootup] The Iconfiguration data (Irset.cfg) could not be loaded into the SDRAM from the flash ROM on the CPU board. - Reseat the SND board connectors (CN5 and CN6). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the ERS board. - Again set the configuration information in EDIT CONFIGURATION. - Check that the CPU board DIP switch (S7) is set as follows: Dip-SW No.2: OFF 10904 RU type error [During bootup] The RU type acquired by DIPSW of CPU board was not correct. Dip-SW No.3: OFF Dip-SW No.4: OFF - Update the version to the newest version. - Replace the CPU board. - If any error occurs immediately after replacing the CPU board, execute "Initialize APL". 11205 Image signal monitor value (simulated current) error [During bootup] When diagnosing the simulated data transfer, the A/D conversion data for simulated image were out of range. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the PMT board connectors. - Replace the PMT board. - Replace the CPU board. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-43 MT-44 Error Code 11230 11268 11269 11280 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy - Replace the scanning optics unit. LD drive current value error (during bootup) [During bootup] The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. Shifted sensitivity (±50 to ±70%) (WND&LOG) [During routine processing] The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to ±70%. - Replace the light-collecting guide. Shifted sensitivity (70% or more) (WND&LOG) [During routine processing] The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it was detected if the value was ±70% or more. - Replace the light-collecting guide. Initialization HV-OFF status [During bootup] It was found that the high voltage of the photomultiplier (PMT board) was OFF. - Turn ON the HV switch of the CPU board. Check that the red LED on the upper right of the switch is lit. - Check that there is no excessive rise in the ambient temperature. The laser drive current value (LDIF) is affected by the ambient temperature. [When the cassette is set in the RU] - Remove the cassette. 11315 Bootup improper cassette loading detection [During bootup] It was found that a cassette was improperly loaded (inserted obliquely or into a nonreference position). [When the cassette is not set in the RU] - Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1 and SA11) normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-44 MT-45 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When the cassette is set in the RU] 11316 Bootup incomplete cassette insertion detection [During bootup] It was found that a cassette was incompletely inserted. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED). - Remove the cassette. [When the cassette is not set in the RU] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. 11341 11342 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Improper cassette loading detection (1) [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, an incompletely inserted cassette was detected. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED). Improper cassette loading detection (2) [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, an incompletely inserted cassette was detected. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED). - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-45 MT-46 Error Code 11373 11375 11379 Error Name Cassette hold retry error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. An error results also when the following operation takes place. - When the cassette is loaded upside down; - When the cassette is loaded front side back. Cassette not detected [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). Cassette hold release error [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the solenoid or the sensors. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation. - Replace the sensors. - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 11381 Debris fall prevention shutter close error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-46 MT-47 Error Code 11382 Error Name Old cassette loading Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSE (old type cassette). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. It was therefore concluded that an old cassette was loaded. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 11390 Feed IP suction error [During routine processing] It was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak sequence. Although an IP feed operation was retried, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check that the IP is correctly sucked. - Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm. - Check for errors in the IP suction pump. - Check for errors in the IP air leak valve. [When a conveyance error occurs] 11396 Feed IP conveyance error (1) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-47 MT-48 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] 11397 Feed IP conveyance error (2) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 11398 11403 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Nonstandard IP size Barcode reading retry error [During bootup] When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit and "15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor (SC9) detected an abnormal combination. It was therefore concluded that a nonstandard IP size was encountered. [ During routine processing] In the feed-conveyance operation, the IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit and "15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor (SC9) were in the unlikely combination, It was therefore concluded that a nonstandard IP size was encountered. The barcode could not be read during routine processing. Although the barcode reading operation was retried, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Check to make sure that the sensors (SC3, SG1 and SC9) normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Replace the sensors. [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-48 MT-49 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Barcode reading retry conveyance error The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a barcode reading retry conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. 11406 Nonstandard IP size During routine processing, the IP size detected in an IP length measurement process and the IP type detected in a barcode reading operation formed an abnormal combination. 11407 Unacceptable IP generation/ type detection The IP type detected in a barcode reading operation during routine processing was other than specification. 11405 - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. [When a conveyance error occurs] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. 11414 Subscanning conveyance error (1) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to perform a reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. Or the leading-edge detection interrupt did not occur within a predetermined period of time. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply, the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses. - Reseat the SED board connectors. - Replace the SED board. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU board. - Replace the CPU board. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-49 MT-50 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] 11415 Subscanning conveyance error (2) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to perform a reading conveyance operation. As a result, a leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors. [When a conveyance error occurs] 11416 Subscanning conveyance error (3) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MZ1/MC1) were driven for a reading conveyance operation, and a leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. The IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit became OPEN, but a tailing-edge detection interrupt did not occur within the specified time. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors. 11454 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Empty cassette ejection request [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an empty cassette was detected. It was therefore requested that the cassette be ejected. - Remove the cassette. - Make sure that no IP remains inside the machine. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-50 MT-51 Error Code 11460 11475 11480 11495 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Error Name Old cassette loading during bootup Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup] The cassette IP holding arm performed an IP holding operation to determine whether the cassette type was old or new. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. It was therefore concluded that an old cassette was encountered. Turn roller nip error (1) [During routine processing] The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven to perform a nip operation of the nip in the turn roller nip configuration. However, it was impossible to detect that the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Insufficient erasure due to over X-ray dose [During routine processing] The over X-ray dose was detected in the erasure mode processing, so the message was displayed and the insufficiently erased IP was returned to the cassette. Unread IP ejection during bootup [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, an unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then the cassette was ejected. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. - Again erase the IP. - Confirm the S value, and carry out sensitivity correction when needed. - CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-51 MT-52 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Request for an empty cassette having a specified size [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the insertion of an empty cassette having a specified size was requested. - 11499 Unread IP ejection during bootup [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, an unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then the cassette was ejected. - 11510 Unread IP ejection The IP was ejected into the cassette without being read. - 11511 Patient information not registered <User operation> This error occurs if no menu is selected at the time of image output. <Occurrence condition analysis> The patient information relevant to the processed IP was not registered in the CL. - 11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL - 11531 Retransmission retry failure [During routine processing] An attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data from the RU to the CL after communication with the CL is suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data is lost and the cassette is ejected. 11700 Erasure time extension due to erasure lamp illumination failure Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate. Therefore, the message appeared, and a process was performed in the erasure extension mode in which the erasure time was extended. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume. 11498 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Check that the IP address of the “master CL” set in the RU is correct. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Replace the lamp assembly. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-52 MT-53 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Inadequate erasure due to erasure lamp illumination failure A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate. The erasure degeneration mode then prevailed due to inadequate erasure. An unerased IP was ejected into the cassette. The message appeared and the user made a mode selection. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. Erasure lamp life end advance notice A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. Therefore, the message appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is about to be reached. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. Erasure lamp life end 1 The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. 11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 The life end message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. 11732 Erasure time extension due to ERS board failure Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an ERS board failure. Therefore, the erasure time was extended. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. Erasure degeneration due to ERS board failure A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an ERS board failure. The erasure degeneration mode then prevailed, and an unerased IP was ejected into the cassette. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume. - Replace the lamp assembly. Inadequately erased IP ejection An IP that was inadequately erased due, for instance, to an erasure lamp illumination failure was returned to the cassette, and the cassette was ejected. - Replace the lamp assembly. 11701 11702 11703 11733 11760 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-53 MT-54 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy 11780 Erasure lamp unit cleaning preliminary message Erasure lamp cleaning preliminary message was displayed since the number of days since the last cleaning date or the number of erasure processing exceeded the specified value. - Clean the erasure filter. 11781 Erasure lamp unit cleaning warning Erasure lamp cleaning warning message was displayed since the number of days since the last cleaning date or the number of erasure processing exceeded the specified value. - Clean the erasure filter. Right-side cover air filter life end indication The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the right cover air filter was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the air filter. Erasure unit brush roller life end indication The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the erasure unit brush roller was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the brush roller. - Replace the brush roller. Erasure lamp filter life end indication The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the erasure lamp filter was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the lamp filter. - Replace the erasure filter. 11905 IP suction pump life end The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the IP suction pump was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 135,000 (3 years) was exceeded. Replace the pump. - Replace the IP suction pump. 11906 Laser life end The message appeared because a predetermined cumulative laser illumination time was exceeded. - Replace the scanning optics unit. 11901 11902 11904 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-54 MT-55 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. 11907 Log information save error during shutdown process [During shutdown processing] An error occurred when an attempt was made to save error log/trace information in the FTP server. 11950 Cassette insertion before console connection establishment The message appeared and the cassette was ejected because the cassette was inserted before the connection to the console was established. - Cassette setting failure The message appeared because the cassette was not inserted all the way in and two seconds elapsed. An error results also when the following operation takes place. - When the cassette is slantly loaded; - When the cassette is inserted into an opposite side to reference; - When a cassette of an inch type is loaded into a metric-type machine. - 11951 - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. 12001 File open error 1 (FTP) [During MUTL operation] An error occurred in the FTP server file open sequence. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. 12004 File write error 1 (FTP) - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. [During MUTL operation] An error occurred in the FTP server file write sequence. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 12207 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 SED board power supply error (during routine processing) [During routine processing] An error about the connection (power supply) with the leadingedge detection (SED) board was detected. - Take action when the error code 10207 occurs. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-55 MT-56 Error Code 12220 12223 12224 Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy HV high voltage power supply error [During routine processing] An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out of range. - Take action when the error code 10220 occurs. HV-ON high-voltage value error [During routine processing] An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out of range when HV is on. - Take action when the error code 10223 occurs. Difference value error of HV high voltage power supply [During routine processing] An error about the HV detection value signal of PMT board was detected. The difference between the minimum and maximum monitor values is out of range when compared to the setting value. - Reseat the PMT board connectors. - Replace the PMT board. - Replace the Alpha II power supply. - Replace the PIF63A board. - Replace the CPU board. - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. 12231 LD monitor value error warning [During routine processing] The difference between minimum and maximum of the laser drive current monitor value is out of specification. - Replace the scanning optics unit. - Replace the Alpha II power supply. - Replace the PIF63A board. - Replace the CPU board. - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. 12233 LD light intensity error - Replace the scanning optics unit. [During routine processing] The laser light intensity is less than 50%. - Replace the Alpha II power supply. - Replace the PIF63A board. - Replace the CPU board. 12240 SYN interval count error [During routine processing] An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count. - Take action when the error code 10240 occurs. 12245 Polygon surface counter timeout [During bootup or routine processing] The interrupt was not notified within 150 ms of LD ON. - Same as the error code 10248. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-56 MT-57 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit. 12246 SYN interval count difference value error [During bootup or routine processing] The difference between the minimum and maximum SYN interval counts during reading was out of the specified range. - Replace the scanning optics unit. - Replace the Alpha II power supply. - Replace the PIF63A board. - Replace the CPU board. Polygon improper index [During bootup or routine processing] The interrupt status occurred as there was an error of interval for the index signal, which is generated for every rotation of polygon. - Same as the error code 10248. Polygon lock timeout (1st) [During bootup or routine processing] After polygon "ON", the polygon "OK" signal cannot detect within predetermined period of time (1st time). - Same as the error code 10248. Polygon lock error [During bootup or routine processing] An error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is detected. - Same as the error code 10248. Trailing edge detection timeout [During routine processing] The interrupt for detecting the tailing edge did not occur within the specified time. - Shifted sensitivity (±50 to ±70%) (LOG) [During routine processing] The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to ±70%. - Again carry out sensitivity correction. 12269 Shifted sensitivity (70% or more) (LOG) [During routine processing] The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it was detected in case the value was ±70% or more. - Again carry out sensitivity correction. 12288 Scanner retry [During bootup or routine processing] The operation of the polygon or HV ON was retried. - 12247 12248 12249 12254 12268 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-57 MT-58 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12325 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP release retry [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven to perform a home position release operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12326 12329 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Cassette cover closing mechanism home positioning retry Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry (1) [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-58 MT-59 Error Code 12330 12331 Error Name Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry (2) Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12336 Suction arm home positioning retry (1) [During bootup or routine processing] The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-59 MT-60 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12337 Suction arm home positioning retry (2) [During bootup or routine processing] The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12338 Suction arm home positioning retry [During bootup or routine processing] The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12344 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 IP holding arm release retry during bootup (1) [During bootup] When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-60 MT-61 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12345 IP holding arm release retry during bootup (2) [During bootup] When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the cassette cover opening position, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12361 Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry (1) [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12362 Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry (2) [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-61 MT-62 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12363 Cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12373 12376 12379 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Cassette hold retry [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Therefore, a retry was performed. Cassette undetected in cassette hold sequence [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold). However, the cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). Cassette hold release retry [During routine processing] The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the solenoid or the sensors. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Replace the sensors. - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-62 MT-63 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12381 Debris fall prevention shutter close retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12382 Old cassette loading retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSE (old type cassette). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12383 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Suction arm home positioning [During bootup or routine processing] When a suction arm home position was checked, it was found that the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN. Therefore, the suction arm was returned to its home position. - CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-63 MT-64 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12386 IP drop detection (1) [During routine processing] After the cassette cover was opened, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12388 IP drop detection (2) [During routine processing] After IP suction, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12390 Feed IP suction retry [During routine processing] It was found that the IP drop sensor (SA4) was OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak sequence. Therefore, an IP feed operation was retried. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check that the IP is correctly sucked. - Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm. - Check for errors in the IP suction pump. - Check for errors in the IP air leak valve. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-64 MT-65 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12391 IP holding arm release error (2) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position after IP suction. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and an new type cassette was detected). - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12393 Feed IP fall prevention retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to hold an IP. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and a old type cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When a conveyance error occurs] 12396 Feed IP conveyance retry (1) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-65 MT-66 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] 12397 Feed IP conveyance retry (2) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When a conveyance error occurs] 12399 IP length measurement retry [During routine processing] An IP length measurement process was performed with IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit in the feed conveyance sequence. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) CLOSED within a short period of time. Therefore, the IP length measurement process was retried. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12400 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Turn grip roller mechanism home positioning retry (1) [During bootup or routine processing] The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation for a turn roller nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-66 MT-67 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Turn grip roller mechanism home positioning retry (2) [During bootup or routine processing] The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for a turn roller nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. 12402 Turn grip roller mechanism home positioning retry [During bootup or routine processing] The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for a turn roller nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. 12403 Barcode reading retry The barcode could not be read during routine processing. Therefore, the barcode reading operation was retried. 12401 [When a conveyance error occurs] 12419 Post-reading conveyance retry [During routing processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a postreading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-67 MT-68 Error Code 12422 Error Name Load IP drop retry (1) Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During routine processing] After an IP hold release operation was performed, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12423 Load IP drop retry (2) [During routine processing] After the cassette cover was closed, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and lightemitting regions). - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12424 Load IP hold retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old type cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-68 MT-69 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12428 Load IP hold release retry (1) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new type cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12429 Load IP hold release retry (2) [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new type cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12430 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP drive retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was closed). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-69 MT-70 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12436 Cassette cover closing mechanism drive retry [During routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12438 12439 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Cassette cover closing mechanism home positioning retry Cassette cover closing mechanism home positioning retry error [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-70 MT-71 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12440 Cassette cover closing mechanism close positioning error [During bootup or routine processing] The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven to place the cassette cover closing mechanism in the close position. However, the cassette cover CLOSE position sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] 12441 12442 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP check IP found in remaining IP ejection cassette during bootup [During bootup or routine processing] When a home position check was performed on the cassette cover closing mechanism, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) was OPEN. Therefore, the cassette cover closing mechanism was placed at its home position. [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an IP was found in the cassette. - Check assembly of the mechanism. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. - Set an empty cassette. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12443 Bootup cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning retry [During bootup] When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved from the reference position to the home position, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-71 MT-72 Error Code 12445 12446 Error Name Subscanning grip roller free rotation error Subscanning grip roller homepositioning error Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup or routine processing] The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [During routine processing] The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ stopping the motor. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12449 Cassette cover opening mechanism operation error [During routine processing] The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was CLOSED. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When the cassette is set in the RU] 12452 No remaining-IP ejection empty cassette during bootup [During bootup] When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, a remaining IP was detected in the machine. However, it was found that there was no ejection cassette in the cassette set unit. - Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1, SA2 and SA11) normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. [When the cassette is not set in the RU] - Set the cassette. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-72 MT-73 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a plurality of IPs are present in the machine] 12455 Two IPs remaining during bootup [During bootup] When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set unit and IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit were both CLOSED (due to IP detection). It was therefore concluded that there were a plurality of IPs in the machine. - Once turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, and then turn it ON again. (Restarting the machine, operation of automatically returning the IP to the cassette will be repeated.) [When no IP or a single IP is present in the machine] - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. [When an error occurs in mechanism operations] - Check assembly of the mechanism. 12460 Old/new cassette judgment retry during bootup [During bootup] When the cassette IP holding arm held an IP to determine whether an old or new cassette is used, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. [When the mechanism normally works] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-73 MT-74 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [When a conveyance error occurs] 12474 Feed IP conveyance error (3) [During routine processing] The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path. - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller. [When no conveyance error occurs] - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Check the SND board fuses. - Replace the sensors or the motors. 12477 Turn grip roller mechanism HP check [ During bootup or routine processing ]When a home position check was performed on the turn grip roller mechanism, the turn grip roller mechanism HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN. Therefore, the cassette cover closing mechanism was placed at its home position. [When the error 13485 concurrently occurs] - Not problem. No countermeasure is necessary. 12485 Pulse motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the pulse motor. [When the error does not concurrently occur with the error 13485] - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) 12486 12487 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 DC motor error Sensor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the DC motor. Error occurred when acquiring the sensor status. - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-74 MT-75 Error Code 12488 12489 12490 Error Name Fuse error Solenoid error Pump error Occurrence Condition - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. Error occurred when turning on/off the solenoid. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. Error occurred when turning on/off the pump. Valve error Error occurred when turning on/off the valve. 12510 Message format error [During bootup or routine processing] An illegal command was received from the CL. Message transmission failure - Update the version to the newest version. Error occurred when acquiring the fuse condition. 12491 12520 Probable Cause and Remedy - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Update the version to the newest version. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - [During bootup or routine processing] An attempt to transmit a message from the RU to the CL failed. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 12521 RES message receiving timeout [During bootup or routine processing] A REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in a time-out. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-75 MT-76 Error Code 12522 Error Name ACK receiving time-out Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy [During bootup or routine processing] A message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot receive ACK, thus resulting in a time-out. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 12523 SET command CL receiving error [During routine processing] Although the SET command was transmitted from the RU, a signal other than OK was received as a response from the CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel. 12750 Unlit erasure lamp detection error [During bootup or routine processing] An error was detected when acquiring the status of lamp being unlit. - Update the version to the newest version. Erasure lamp turning off error [During bootup or routine processing] An error was detected when turning off the erasure lamps. - Update the version to the newest version. Erasure lamp lighting error [During bootup or routine processing] An error was detected when turning on the erasure lamps. - Update the version to the newest version. ERS board port 1 failure [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the ERS-board-mounted fuse for port 1 was blown. For the ERS board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume. 12753 12754 12770 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 - - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version update. (For design analysis) - Replace the lamp assembly. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-76 MT-77 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy 12817 Blown fuse F7 of CPU board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F7 of CPU board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12818 Blown fuse F10 of CPU board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F10 of CPU board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12825 Blown fuse F19 of CPU board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F19 of CPU board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12845 Blown fuse F4 of SND board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F4 of SND board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12846 Blown fuse F9 of SND board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F9 of SND board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12847 Blown fuse F10 of SND board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F10 of SND board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12848 Blown fuse F13 of CPU board [During bootup or routine processing] It was detected that the fuse F13 of CPU board was blown. - Replace the fuse. 12990 FTP server access error [During bootup or routine processing] The FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a connection cannot be established. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 13230 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Laser drive current value error [During routine processing] The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. - Take action when the error code 10230 or 11906 occurs. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-77 MT-78 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy Updating the drive current maximum value [During bootup or routine processing] The drive current maximum value was more than the total of initial current value maximum value + specified value. - 13275 Format adjustment data error [During MUTL operation] When format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is inputted. - 13276 File restore error [During MUTL operation] An error occurred when restoring the SCN data. - Check that file extension is “.dat”. 13277 Correction recording calculation cancel [During MUTL operation] It failed to create the shading correction data. Shading correction should be performed again. - Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction. Reading IP size error [During MUTL operation] The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for shading correction, so that error is detected. - Carry out shading correction by means of a 14 x 17 inch (35 x 43 cm) or 14 x 14 inch (35 x 35 cm) IP. SHD/POLYGON correction data error [During MUTL operation] It failed to create the correction data as the difference between the minimum and maximum QL values of the shading data exceeded the specified value. - Carry out shading correction by means of a scratch-free IP. 13232 13281 13282 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-78 MT-79 Error Code Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy 13283 HVCNT value error [During MUTL operation] An out-of-spec HV is inputted. - Carry out sensitivity correction by means of IPs exposed to doses of 1 mR to 10 mR. 13288 SHD data write error [During MUTL operation] It failed to write the SHD data into the Flash ROM. - Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators. 13312 Bootup cassette sensor combination inconsistency [During bootup] The cassette IN sensor (SA1), cassette hold sensor (SA2), cassette OUT sensor (SA11) and cassette size sensor(SA9) detected an abnormal combination. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears. - Reseat the sensor connectors. - Reseat the SND board connectors. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables. - Replace the sensors. 13485 13520 Stop command for the stopped motor Detection of communication abortion to CL Although the motor was already stopped, a command for stopping was sent. [During bootup or routine processing] It is detected that the communication between the CL and the RU is broken. - - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 13521 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CL communication failure detected [During bootup or routine processing] The connection is suspended and initialization of communication between the CL and RU is performed again, because the communication between the CL and RU is broken. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-79 MT-80 Error Code 13530 13900 Error Name CL image data receive timeout FTP server data acquisition failure Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU. The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs due to hardware failure of the network, thereby causing frequent retries. [During bootup] The data cannot be gotten from FTP server and it is set to an initial value. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable and the hub. - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the connection between the CL and RU. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make sure that the FTP server is correctly set. - Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-80 MT-81 3. Abnormal Images 3.1 No.2 Image nonuniformity (entire 5 mm-pitch nonuniformity) <Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP Troubleshooting Abnormal Images [Possible cause] A scratch or crack is present on the gear of the subscanning motor (MZ1). n Image Nonuniformity (Horizontal Streaks in the Subscanning Direction) No.1 Image nonuniformity (25 mm-pitch nonuniformity) <Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP [Possible cause] A scratch or crack is present on the spur gear of the subscanning center roller. [Countermeasure] Replace the subscanning motor (MZ1). “MC 9.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1)” [Countermeasure] Replace the spur gear of the subscanning center roller. “MC 9.7 Center Roller” * Nonuniformity is observed at 5 mm intervals in the subscanning direction. The nonuniformity cannot be visually recognized. (A microscope is needed to check.) FRRB203002.ai * Nonuniformity is observed at 25 mm intervals in the subscanning direction. The nonuniformity can be visually recognized. FRRB203001.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-81 MT-82 No.3 Image nonuniformity <Example 1> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP [Possible cause] The cleaning brush is accidentally operated when reading the image (areas A to E in the left figure). A <Example 2> 14x14 inch (35x35 cm) IP B C <Example 3> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP D [Countermeasure] The cleaning brush should not be operated while reading the image. <Example 4> 18x24 cm IP E FRRB203003.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-82 MT-83 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-83 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 11, 18, 24, 27, 31-151 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected MC-1 1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit 1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment - In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume. - When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the following precautions should be observed. u INSTRUCTION u The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled. When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures. 1.2 Types of Screws The DT screw and the TP screw employed in the machine are of similar shape and color. Check the screw type referring to the figures below when attaching a screw. WARNING DT screw TP screw Has four dots on the head Has no dot on the head To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the procedures. WARNING/CAUTION Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions". 1.3 u INSTRUCTION u CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. - Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit. - Never remove the red-painted screws. u INSTRUCTION u Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators as needed. For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators. - Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the installation location when the part or component removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in the illustration CHECK that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant "n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.” - Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly procedures. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Checking the Protective Grounding 1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the inside of a broken part. 1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image When you install the covers after a check, replacement, or adjustment, make sure that the high-voltage switch is ON. After the machine is restored to normal, run an image read check to verify that a read image is normal. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-1 MC-2 2. Table of Contents 3. Cover 3. 3.1 3.2 4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit 4.1 Alpha II Power Supply 4.2 PIF63A Board 4.3 CPU Board 4.3.1 Replacement Procedures 4.3.2 Machine Data Backup 4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board 4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU 4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version 4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key 4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data 4.3.8 Confirming the S Value 4.3.9 S Value Correction/LED Initialize 4.4 SND Board 4.5 Antistatic Member 4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) 4.7 Main Power Switch Assembly 4.8 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet 4.9 Operation Panel Assembly 4.10 LAN Cover MC-6 MC-6 MC-8 MC-9 MC-9 MC-9 MC-11 MC-13 MC-18 MC-21 MC-22 MC-23 MC-23 MC-24 MC-25 MC-26 MC-27 MC-28 MC-29 MC-31 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 MC-32 MC-32 MC-35 5. Cassette Set Unit 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18 5.19 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 5.24 5.25 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Cover Cover Plate Cassette Set Unit Cassette Set Unit Dust-Tight Cover Assembly Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) Cable Junction Bracket Shutter Drive Arm Spur Gear (Reference Side) Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft Shutter Assembly Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear Cassette Hold Release Arm Cassette IP Holding Arm Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) IP Suction Link Mechanism Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Hose IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) IP Suction Pump (PA1) IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) 5.26 5.27 5.28 5.29 5.30 5.31 5.32 5.33 5.34 MC-4 MC-4 MC-5 MC-37 MC-38 MC-39 MC-40 MC-41 MC-42 MC-44 MC-46 MC-48 MC-49 MC-50 MC-51 MC-53 MC-54 MC-55 MC-56 MC-58 MC-59 MC-61 MC-63 MC-64 MC-65 MC-66 5.35 5.36 5.37 5.38 5.39 5.40 5.41 5.42 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side) Guide Suction Cup IP Transport Motor (MA4) Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) Actuator Assembly Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) Movable Guide Assembly “15x30 Cassette” Movable Guide Assembly IP Suction Arm IP Suction Link Shaft Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly Guide Plates (A) and (B) MC-67 MC-68 MC-69 MC-71 MC-72 MC-73 MC-76 MC-77 MC-78 MC-79 MC-80 MC-82 MC-84 MC-85 MC-87 MC-88 MC-90 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 7. 7.1 7.2 Erasure Unit Erasure Unit Reflection Plate Brush Roller Assembly Brush Roller Filter Lamp Assembly Light-Collecting Unit Light-Collecting Unit PMT Board MC-92 MC-92 MC-94 MC-96 MC-97 MC-99 MC-101 MC-103 MC-103 MC-106 Scanning Optics Unit 8. 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit Scanning Optics Unit MC-108 MC-108 Subscanning Unit 9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Subscanning Unit Subscanning Unit Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side) Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) Subscanning Motor (MZ1) IP Transport Motor (MC1) Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2) IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) Light-Collecting Shaft (Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic Member) Rubber Roller (A, B) Rubber Roller (C, D) Rubber Roller (E) Conveyor Guide Assembly Rubber Roller (F) Grip Release Arm Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) Subscanning Grip Assembly IP Sensor (SC3) "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) MC-112 MC-112 MC-114 MC-115 6. Erasure Unit 7. Light-Collecting Unit 8. 9. 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 9.15 9.16 9.17 9.18 9.19 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-116 MC-116 MC-117 MC-117 MC-118 MC-119 MC-121 MC-123 MC-125 MC-128 MC-129 MC-130 MC-131 MC-133 MC-135 MC-136 MC-2 MC-3 9.20 9.21 9.22 9.23 9.24 10. 11. Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) Center Roller Replacing the Fuses and Fuse 10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations Locations 10.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures 10.2 CPU Board Fuses 10.3 SND Board Fuses 10.4 PIF63A Board Fuses 11. List of Jigs and Tools List of Jigs and Tools 11.1 Jigs and Tools 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 MC-137 MC-139 MC-141 MC-143 MC-145 MC-147 MC-147 MC-148 MC-148 MC-149 MC-150 MC-150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-3 MC-4 3. Cover 3.1 Cover REFERENCE You can remove the front cover only by loosening the screws. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) n Removal Procedures (1) Reinstall the cover. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the covers. #1 Front cover #2 Louver #3 Right-hand side cover #4 Rear cover #5 Left-hand side cover 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-4 MC-5 3.2 Plate n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the plates. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} (2) Remove the plates. (A) Front plate (B) Right-hand side board box plate (C) Right-hand side power supply unit plate (D) Rear plate (E) Left-hand side plate 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-5 MC-6 4. Housing Unit 4.1 Alpha II Power Supply CAUTION When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply. (2) Remove the power supply. #1 Remove the screws and remove the bracket (x3). #2 Unclamp the clamps. #3 Disconnect the connectors (PIF1/PIF2). #4 Remove the screws and remove the cable and washer (W4). #5 Loosen the screws. #6 Remove the screws. #7 Remove the power supply. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Right-hand side power supply unit plate - Right-hand side board box plate {MC:4.7_Main Power Switch Assembly} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-6 MC-7 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the power supply. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u After removed the connector (terminal) of the power, be sure to re-connect to the original position. If the wrong connection position of the connector (terminal) has been used, the equipment will be damaged. XL2A03040003.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-7 MC-8 4.2 PIF63A Board CAUTION n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the board. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Right-hand side board box plate (2) Remove the board. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Remove the board. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-8 MC-9 4.3 CPU Board 4.3.2 The FLASH ROM of the CPU board stores the RU machine data (configuration information, scanner information and log information). Since the CPU board shipped as a service part does not contain the machine data set, it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it was before the replacement by updating the software version and adjusting the machine data after replacement. For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures depending on the RU conditions. - When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up machine data after the replacement of the CPU board. - When the machine cannot boot up and the machine data cannot be backed up, restore the machine-specific data by means of the machinespecific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. If no machine-specific data CD-ROM is available, adjust the machine data through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction. 4.3.1 u NOTE u When the CPU board is replaced, network settings on the RU all restore to the default settings. However, since the Console keeps the settings before the replacement, it cannot be connected if the network settings have been modified to site-specific values. Temporarily change the network settings for re-connection. You need take a note of the addresses for the purpose. (1) Turn ON the power of the Console. (2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. (3) Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} (4) Replace the CPU board according to the procedures mentioned in the following reference list. {4.3.2} Connect the recording medium to the Console. u NOTE u Replacement Procedures Reference Machine Data Backup Part concerned Machine Data Backup When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk of the Console, the procedure (4) need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure (5). (5) Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR {4.3.3} Replacing the CPU Board {4.3.4} Setting the IP Address of the RU and Console {4.3.5} Updating the RU Software Version {4.3.7} Restoring the Machine Data {4.3.8} Confirming the S Value {4.3.9} S Value Correction/LED Initialize BACKUP RESTORE RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx VERSION Vx.x ALL RUs SETTING RBMC07101.AI u NOTE u When the IP address of the RU of “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console of “172.16.1.20” (initial value) are employed, the procedure (7) in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup” and the procedures of “4.3.4 Setting the IP addresses of the RU and the Console” need not be taken. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-9 MC-10 (6) Back up the "CONFIGURATION", "SCN OPTICAL DATA", "HISTORY LOG". BACKUP Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME CONFIGURATION LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP RESTORE EXECUTE #2 EXECUTE #4 EXECUTE #6 #1 ALL RUs SETTING #3 #5 BACKUP SCN ALL DATA BACKUP HISTORY LOG RBMC04101.AI (7) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU. (8) Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable from the RU. (9) Eject the recording medium from the console. (10) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures. {MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-10 MC-11 4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. (2) Remove the board. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the board. u INSTRUCTION u When disconnecting the connector (CN13), hold the position as indicated in the figure and disconnect it straight. Otherwise, the cable might get damaged. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Right-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Right-hand side board box plate {MC:4.10_LAN Cover} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-11 MC-12 (3) Make the DIP switch (S7) settings of a new CPU board to be installed. u INSTRUCTIONS u - The DIP switch (S6) is mounted as a spare. Do not change its setting. - Make the DIP switch settings of a new CPU board to be installed equal to those of the removed CPU board. If differently set, the machine will not work normally. l Meaning of DIP switch settings No Item Normal setting Meaning 1 For design OFF Nothing 2 Machine selection OFF Sets the type of the machine. Set all to OFF in the machine. 3 OFF 4 OFF 5 Standard machine/ High-capacity machine ON Set to adjust the type of the machine. Set to ON in the machine. 6 15x30 IP usable/nonusable ON Set to ON for using an IP of 15x30 size. 7 Restoring applications (for troubleshooting) OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PCTOOL with the IP address of the RU fixed to “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console fixed to “172.16.1.20” . OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed. ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed. OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PCTOOL OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed. ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed. When the IP addresses of the RU and the FTP server are unknown. 8 Restoring applications (for troubleshooting) When the IP addresses of the RU and the FTP server are known. * If both No.7 and No.8 switches are ON, the function of the No.8 switch has priority. REFERENCE Refer to the following for details of “CPU Board Setting Display”. {MU:7.3 [2-1]_CPU Board Setting Display} n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the board. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. (2) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures. {MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-12 MC-13 4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU The IP address of the RU is set to the default after the replacement of the CPU board. Set the IP address of the RU to the address before the replacement of the CPU board. REFERENCE This chapter describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as follows: IP address of the RU: 172.16.1.11 IP address of the FTP server: 172.16.1.21 1. 2. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. u NOTE u Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the RU power and repeat from the procedure 1. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-13 MC-14 REFERENCE The IP address of the RU is set in the procedures 3 to 5. 3. 4. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. u NOTE u Set the IP address of the RU specified on the DX Console. Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select] button. 5. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. → The address setting window appears. → In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-14 MC-15 REFERENCE The IP address of the FTP server is to be set in the procedures 6 to 9. 6. Press the 7. Press the [Select] button. button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”. → The address setting window appears. 8. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. u NOTE u Specify the IP address of the DX Console. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-15 MC-16 9. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. REFERENCE In the procedures 11 to 14, “Check of the connection with the DX Console” is performed. 11. Press the 12. Press the [Select] button. button, and select “Network Check”. → In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores. 10. Set the following addresses according to the conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. - Subnet Mask {MU:3.3_Subnet Mask} - Default Gateway {MU:3.5_Default Gateway} - Secure Host {MU:3.6_Secure Host} - Secure Net {MU:3.7_Secure Net} → The “Network Check” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-16 MC-17 13. Press the [Check] button. 14. Confirm the display on the operation panel. u NOTES u - “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified. - Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears. {Troubleshooting} 15. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures. {MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-17 MC-18 4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK]. #1 u NOTE u - Before procedures, please confirm the part number of the software. {Front cover : ● Software for this machine} - In case of the error code "10904" occured after the replacement of the CPU board and the starting of RU, it is necessary to install the RU application by restoring the RU application procedures. {MU:4.22_Initialize APL} The RU software version is updated to update the RU software in the latest conditions. After the updating, set the master CL. (1) FRRB401007.ai l [GOOD indication] "value = 0 = 0x0" should be displayed. l [NO GOOD indication] Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the Console. Another message is displayed. → The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. (2) #2 (5) Click on [START]. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on . #2 #1 RBMC04105.AI (3) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP]. #1 LIST OF EXISTING RU RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx VERSION Vx.x FRRB401008.ai l [GOOD indication] "Transfer complete" should be displayed. l [NO GOOD indication] Another message is displayed. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP RESTORE #2 ALL RUs SETTING RBMC04106.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-18 MC-19 (6) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP]. LIST OF EXISTING RU RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx #1 VERSION Vx.x LIST OF EXISTING RU #2 RESTORE u NOTE u ALL RUs SETTING RBMC04109.AI (7) Never turn OFF the power of the RU nor the Console during the write into the FLASH ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot restart. When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the DX Console display. While the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows. RU IP ADDR BACKUP CAUTION (11) If a linac cassette is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the linac cassette is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET]. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME (10) Check the precautions for the installation. Click on [OK]. Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed. If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes. RBMC04110.AI (8) Verify the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK]. RU VERSION #1 x.x #2 RBMC04111.AI (9) Click on [OK]. RBMC04112.AI 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-19 MC-20 (12) Verify that the FLASH ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter] key. #1 #2 "Enter" (13) Click on [OK]. RBMC04114.AI RBMC04115.AI (14) Verify the RU software version. #1 RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx Vx.x Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP #2 RESTORE l GOOD indication The text is displayed in black. l NO GOOD indication The text is displayed in red or the version number is not displayed. ALL RUs SETTING RBMC04116.AI u NOTE u If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure (1), and again perform the installation. (15) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures. {MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-20 MC-21 4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key 3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key. CAUTION The following procedures are necessary only in a machine into which the 50 micron upgrade kit (HR reading option key) has been installed. Do not take the procedures in a machine without the 50 micron upgrade kit (HR reading option key) installed. 1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM (HR reading option key CD-ROM) into the drive of the DX Console. → The installation menu automatically appears. 2. Enter “1” and press the [Enter] key. → The message “Installation Completed” appears. 4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the installation is displayed, and press the [Enter] key. 5. Remove the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM (HR reading option key CD-ROM) from the drive of the DX Console. 6. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures. → The message for prompting the input of the RU’s IP address appears. {MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-21 MC-22 4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data (1) The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU board. Restore the backup data created in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”, and restore to the conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR u INSTRUCTIONS u - If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU board and you were not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by means of the machine-specific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. - If no backup data or machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for the “format adjustment” and “shading/sensitivity correction” to adjust the machine. Also perform “shading speed correction” when needed. Select the RU whose machine data is to be restored from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”. BACKUP RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx RESTORE VERSION Vx.x ALL RUs SETTING RBMC07101.AI (2) Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”. RESTORE Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME CONFIGURATION LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR l Format adjustment BACKUP RESTORE EXECUTE #2 EXECUTE #4 EXECUTE #6 #1 {MU:7.3 [5-4]_Format Adjustment} ALL RUs SETTING l Shading/sensitivity correction (when the IP type ST is used) {MU:7.3 [5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)} #3 l Shading correction (when the IP type HR is used) RESTORE SCN ALL DATA {MU:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} l Shading speed correction (when the IP type ST is used) {MU:7.3 [5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))} l Shading speed correction (when the IP type HR is used) #5 RESTORE HISTORY LOG {MU:7.3 [5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR)} RBMC04104.AI (3) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU. (4) Turn ON the main power switch of the RU. (5) Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-22 MC-23 4.3.8 (1) Confirming the S Value Confirm the S value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 4.3.9 (1) S Value Correction/LED Initialize Correct the S value and initialize LED data. {MU:7.3 [5-5-8]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction} {MU:7.3 [5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-23 MC-24 4.4 SND Board (3) Remove the board. #1 Unclamp the clamp. #2 Disconnect the connectors. #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the board. CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. #2 CN7 n Removal Procedures (1) #2 CN6 Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Right-hand side cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly} #4 #2 CN3 #2 CN11 #2 CN10 #2 CN5 #2 CN4 {MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly} (2) #2 CN12 #2 CN14 #1 #2 CN2 #2 CN9 Raise the insulation sheet. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Unclamp the clamp. #3 Raise the insulation sheet. #3 TP3x6 (x4) #1 TP3x6 (x3) XL2A03040009.ai #3 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the board. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #2 XL2A03040008.ai 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-24 MC-25 4.5 Antistatic Member n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the antistatic member. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Right-hand side cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} {MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly} {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Remove the antistatic member. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the antistatic member. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-25 MC-26 4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) #3 Disconnect the connector. #4 Remove the screws. #5 Remove the sensor. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate - Rear plate - Left-hand side plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} {MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)} {MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit} {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} (2) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the sensor (SG1). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the sensor (SG1). #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the sensor assembly. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-26 MC-27 4.7 Main Power Switch Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Reinstall the main power switch assembly. Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover (2) Remove the main power switch assembly. #1 Remove the cover. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals. #4 Remove the main power switch assembly. u INSTRUCTION u Disconnect by using the tool to press the latch shaded in the figure below. Latch RBMC04018.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-27 MC-28 4.8 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover {MC:4.7_Main Power Switch Assembly} (2) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet in the orientation as indicated in the figure. - Check that the main power switch is OFF. Remove the main power switch and the power supply inlet. #1 Remove the main power switch. #2 Remove the power supply inlet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-28 MC-29 4.9 Operation Panel Assembly n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover (2) Remove the main power switch assembly. #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Operation Panel Assembly 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the operation panel assembly Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. (2) If the operation panel is replaced with a new one, reassemble the machine and then perform the installation procedure. u INSTRUCTION u When the operation panel is supplied as a service part, its display language and display screen are not defined. If the operation panel is replaced with a new one, be sure to perform the installation procedure as directed under "n Check/Adjustment Procedures". CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-29 MC-30 n Check/Adjustment Procedures After operation panel replacement, delete the RU that is registered in the RU PC-TOOL's "LIST OF EXISTING RU," and then perform the installation procedure. u NOTE u When the operation panel is supplied as a service part, its display language and display screen are not defined. The display language and display screen for the operation panel can only be defined during the RU software installation process. Therefore, when the operation panel is replaced with a new one, be sure to reinstall the RU software. 1. 2. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," delete the RU for which the operation panel has been replaced. u NOTE u Before deleting the RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU," note down the RU's IP address. 3. {IN:Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU} Install the RU software. u NOTE u As regards the "Operation Panel Language Display (LANGUAGE)" and "Screen Display (BRAND TYPE)," which are to be specified during the installation process, select the same settings as those for the previously used operation panel. 4. 5. {IN:Appendix 7-3_Installing the RU Software} Turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-30 MC-31 4.10 LAN Cover n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Right-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Right-hand side board box plate (2) Remove the LAN cover. #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the LAN cover. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the LAN cover. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-31 MC-32 5. Cassette Set Unit 5.1 (2) Remove the blacket. Cassette Set Unit u NOTE u Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be careful about the following points when removing, reinstalling and moving. - Secure a sufficient working space before the operation. - Hold the position where the green label is stuck. - Lift the unit in a natural posture. Blacket n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Right-hand side cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly} {MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly} {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} XL2A0305004.AI (3) Raise the insulation sheet. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Unclamp the clamp. #3 Raise the insulation sheet. #1 TP3x6 (x3) #3 #2 XL2A03040008.ai 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-32 MC-33 (4) Route the cables (front face) out of the housing. (5) Route the cable (right-hand side) out of the housing. #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Disconnect the connectors. #3 Put the cables aside. #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Put the cable aside. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to put aside the cables out of the housing. The cables and the connectors might get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette set unit. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to put aside the cables out of the housing. The cables and the connectors might get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette set unit. #2 #3 #1 #3 #1 RBMC05002.AI (6) #2 CN6 #2 CN5 Remove the screws. #1 Remove the screws from the rear. #2 Remove the screws from the front. Never remove. #2 #1 #2 CN4 #1 RBMC05001.AI #1 BR4x8 (x2) #2 BR4x8 (x2) RBMC05003.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-33 MC-34 (7) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette set unit. #1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and raise the cassette set unit above the frame. #2 Remove the cassette set unit. u NOTE u Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be sure to secure a sufficient working space before the operation, and work in a natural posture. #1 Frame (1) Reinstall the cassette set unit. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the cassette set unit. Reinstall the cassette set unit after you have lifted the unit above the housing frame. Otherwise, the cassette set unit might come into contact with the housing and get damaged. - Reinstall the cassette set unit while aligning the frame of the cassette set unit with the positioning pin on the housing. Positioning pin #2 RBMC05004.AI Positioning pin RBMC05005.AI - Tighten the screws on the front before reinstalling the cassette set unit. Tighten first. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 RBMC05006.AI CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-34 MC-35 5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and raise the dust-tight cover assembly straight to remove. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Right-hand side cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly} (2) Remove the dust-tight cover assembly. #1 Remove the screws. REFERENCE Refer to the Service Parts List for the detailed development view of the dust-tight cover assembly. {SP:03A_ CASSETTE SET UNIT 1} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-35 MC-36 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) ReInstall the dust-tight cover assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Tighten the screws while pressing the half punch of the dust-tight cover assembly against the frame notch. u NOTE u Be sure to lower the dust-tight cover assembly straight for reinstallation, not to allow the assembly to tilt. If the dust-tight cover assembly is tilted, the sensor or the gear might get damaged. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-36 MC-37 5.3 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) Mount the motor (MA1). u NOTE u Remove the following components. Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the motor (MA1). #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the motor. Connector #1 RBMC05011.AI #3 #2 TP4x8 (x2) RBMC05010.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-37 MC-38 5.4 Cable Junction Bracket #3 Remove the screws. #4 Lift up the shutter driving arm. #5 Remove the cable junction bracket. n Removal Procedures (1) u INSTRUCTION u Remove the following components. Always remove the bracket with the shutter driving arm lifted up. Otherwise, the sensor installed on the bracket might interfere with the shutter driving arm, resulting in the damage of the sensor. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Remove the cable junction bracket. #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Disconnect the connectors. Shutter driving arm #1 #2 SA1 #4 Sensor #5 #2 SA3 #3 DT3x6 (x2) #1 RBMC05012.AI RBMC05013.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the cable junction bracket. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Always reinstall the bracket with the shutter driving arm lifted up. Otherwise, the sensor installed on the bracket might interfere with the shutter driving arm, resulting in the damage of the sensor. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-38 MC-39 5.5 Shutter Drive Arm n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) u NOTE u Remove the following components. Reinstall while putting the protrusion of the shutter drive arm inside the spur gear (black). {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Spur gear (black) {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} (2) Mount the shutter driving arm. Remove the shutter driving arm. #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the shutter driving arm. Protrusion RBMC05016.AI #2 #1 E4 RBMC05015.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-39 MC-40 5.6 Spur Gear (Reference Side) (3) #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the spur gear (black). n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the spur gear (black). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} (2) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA1) to a position at which the sensor (SA7) and spur gear (black) actuator do not interfere with each other. #1 Rotate the motor. #2 Check that the actuator does not interfere with the sensor. #2 #1 BR3x6 (3B) Actuator #2 Motor (MA1) RBMC05018.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the spur gear (black). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Sensor (SA7) u NOTE u Reinstall while holding up the arm. #1 RBMC05017.AI Arm RBMC05019.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-40 MC-41 5.7 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) u NOTES u Remove the following components. - Ensure that the mounted spur gears are properly oriented. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Mount the spur gear (white). Remove the spur gear (white). Outside #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the spur gear (white). #3 Remove the spur gear. #4 Remove the spur gear. Short Inside Long RBMC05021.AI - Reinstall while holding up the arm. #1 BR3x6 (3B) Arm #2 #3 #4 RBMC05020.AI RBMC05022.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-41 MC-42 5.8 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly (3) #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Put the cable aside. n Removal Procedures (1) Route the cable out of the cassette set unit. u INSTRUCTION u Remove the following components. Be sure to put aside the cables out of the cassette set unit. The cables and the connectors might get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette cover opening assembly. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} (2) Remove the guides. #1 #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the guides. #2 #1 RBMC05024.AI #1 TP3x6 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 #2 #2 #1 TP3x6 RBMC05023.AI CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-42 MC-43 (4) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette cover opening assembly while rotating the shaft end. (1) u NOTE u Exercise care not to have the sensor or the cable damaged when removing the cassette cover opening assembly. Reinstall the cassette cover opening assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Sensor Cable Shaft RBMC05025.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-43 MC-44 5.9 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft #4 Remove the screw. #5 Move the cam (inner). #6 Draw out the straight pin. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} #6 {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} #5 {MC:5.8_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly} (2) Move the cam (opposite reference side). u NOTE u When you remove the cam, the straight pin may drop. Be sure to keep track of the straight pin. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Move the cam (outer). #3 Draw out the straight pin. #4 TP3x6 RBMC05029.AI (3) Move the bearing (opposite reference side). #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Move the bearing. #2 #2 #3 #1 E6 #1 TP3x6 RBMC05028.AI RBMC05030.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-44 MC-45 (4) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft. #1 Remove the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft. #2 Remove the bearing. (1) Reinstall the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Tighten the two cams (reference side) having the marking of the driving shaft first. Marking #1 RBMC05033.AI - Mount the cams in the orientations as indicated in the figure, and check that the two inner cams and the two outer cams are in the same orientation respectively. #2 RBMC05031.AI #3 Remove the bearing. #4 Remove the cams. #5 Remove the cams on the reference side similarly to the opposite reference side. Cam mounting orientation REFERENCE The four cams have the same shape, but the attachment orientation differs between the two inner cams and the two outer cams. #3 #4 RBMC05034.AI #5 RBMC05032.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-45 MC-46 5.10 Shutter Assembly #3 Disengage the claws of the shutter assembly from the frame holes and remove the assembly. Claw REFERENCE Removal/reinstallation procedures of the shutter assembly are mentioned for the shutter assembly on the reference side. As for the center and the opposite reference side shutter assembly, follow the similar procedures as those for the reference side. #3 n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. (2) {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Remove the shutter assembly. Hole #1 Remove the screws. #2 Pull the shutter assembly toward you (toward the rear). #1 TP3x6 (x2) RBMC05036.AI #2 (3) Disassemble the shutter assembly. Guide Shutter RBMC05035.AI Torsion coil spring RBMC05037.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-46 MC-47 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the shutter assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Check that the tip of the torsion coil spring is located inside the shutter groove when assembling the shutter assembly. Groove Shutter Torsion coil spring RBMC05038.AI - Align the tip of the torsion coil spring with the groove of the guide plate (frame notch) when reinstalling the shutter assembly. Torsion coil spring Groove RBMC05039.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-47 MC-48 5.11 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Mount the sensor bracket assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12). #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the sensor bracket assembly. #4 Disconnect the connectors. #4 SA8 #1 #3 #4 SA12 #2 DT3x6 (x2) #4 SA10 RBMC05040.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-48 MC-49 5.12 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} (2) Remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear. u NOTES u - When you remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear, the straight pin may drop. Be sure to keep track of the straight pin. - When you remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear, the cassette cover closing assembly may drop. To prevent damage by the drop, support the cassette cover closing assembly on the hand beforehand. #1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to support the cassette cover closing assembly. #2 Remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear. #3 Draw out the straight pin. #4 Lower the cassette cover closing assembly to its lowermost position. #5 Remove the spur gear. #1 #3 #2 #4 #5 RBMC05042.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-49 MC-50 5.13 Cassette Hold Release Arm n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Reinstall the cassette hold release arm. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Remove the cassette hold release arm assembly. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the cassette hold release arm assembly. #2 #1 TP3x6 RBMC05043.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-50 MC-51 5.14 Cassette IP Holding Arm (3) #1 Move the cassette IP holding arm to its uppermost position. #2 Remove the levers. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the levers. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} #1 {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} {MC:5.13_Cassette Hold Release Arm} (2) Notch Removing the driving arm. Notch #1 Remove the tension coil springs. #2 Removing the driving arms. #2 #2 RBMC05046.AI #1 L=42 mm #2 #1 L=42 mm #2 RBMC05045.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-51 MC-52 (4) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette IP holding arm. (1) Mount the cassette IP holding arm. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Reinstall the cassette IP holding arm with its face with a hole facing upward. Hole RBMC05047.AI RBMC05048.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-52 MC-53 5.15 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Mount the cassette inlet guide assembly. u INSTRUCTION u Remove the following components. Tighten the screws while pressing against the half punches of the frame. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} {MC:5.13_Cassette Hold Release Arm} {MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm} (2) Remove the cassette inlet guide assembly. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the cassette inlet guide assembly. RBMC05050.AI #1 TP3x6 (x4) #2 RBMC05049.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-53 MC-54 5.16 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) (3) #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the sensor. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the sensor (SA11). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Remove the sensor assembly. #1 Unclamp the clamp. #2 Remove the screw. #1 SA11 #2 RBMC05053.AI #2 DT3x6 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SA11). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #1 RBMC05051.AI #3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to remove the sensor assembly from the frame hole. #4 Remove the sensor assembly. #3 #4 RBMC05052.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-54 MC-55 5.17 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) #4 Remove the motor. WP screw n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} (2) Remove the motor (MA2). Notch #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Disconnect the connector from the bracket. #3 Remove the screws. #4 RBMC05055.AI n Reinstallation Procedures #2 (1) Mount the motor (MA2). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #3 BR3x6 (x3) #1 MA2 RBMC05054.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-55 MC-56 5.18 IP Suction Link Mechanism (3) #1 Remove the arm. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Remove the gear. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the IP suction link mechanism (opposite reference side). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} REFERENCE You need not remove the cable junction bracket when only the IP suction link mechanism on the opposite reference side is to be removed. (2) Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to its lowermost position. u NOTE u When you remove the IP suction link mechanism, the IP suction arm may drop. Move the IP suction arm to its lowermost position beforehand to prevent damage by the drop. #2 BR3x6 (3B) #3 Motor (MA3) #1 RBMC05057.AI #4 Remove the spur gear. #5 Remove the spur gear. #5 #4 IP suction arm RBMC05056.AI RBMC05058.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-56 MC-57 (4) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the IP suction link mechanism (reference side). #1 Remove the arm. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Remove the gear. (1) Reinstall the IP suction link mechanism. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Exercise care in the mounting orientation of the spur gear when putting the gear on the opposite reference side. #3 Inside #1 #2 BR3x6 (3B) Long RBMC05059.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Outside Short RBMC05060.AI CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-57 MC-58 5.19 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Mount the motor (MA3). u NOTE u Remove the following components. Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.18_IP Suction Link Mechanism} REFERENCE Remove the IP suction link mechanism only on the opposite reference side to remove the suction arm driving motor (MA3). (2) Remove the motor (MA3). #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the motor. Connector RBMC05062.AI #2 TP4x8 (x2) #3 #1 MA3 RBMC05061.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-58 MC-59 5.20 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft (3) #1 Move the bearings. #2 Remove the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} (2) Move the spur gears. REFERENCE When you move the spur gear, the straight pin may drop. Be sure to keep track of the straight pin. #1 #1 #1 Remove the E-rings. #2 Move the spur gear while supporting it on your hand from downward. #3 Draw out the straight pin. #1 E6 #1 E6 #2 #3 #3 RBMC05064.AI #2 #3 Remove the bearings. #4 Remove the spur gears. #2 #3 #4 #4 #3 RBMC05065.AI RBMC05063.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-59 MC-60 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall while putting a shaft end with two holes facing toward the reference side. Hole RBMC05066.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-60 MC-61 5.21 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} (2) Remove the bearings. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to support the cassette cover closing assembly. #4 Remove the screws. #5 Remove the bearings. u NOTE u Be sure to hold the cassette cover closing assembly in your hand. If the cassette cover closing assembly is tilted, the actuator might come into contact with the frame notch and get damaged. {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} {MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm} {MC:5.15_Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly} Notch {MC:5.20_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft} #2 #1 TP3x6 #4 TP4x8 #5 #5 Actuator #4 TP4x8 #3 RBMC05067.AI REFERENCE The bearing on the reference side is a flanged bearing. The bearing on the opposite reference side has no flange. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-61 MC-62 (3) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette cover closing assembly. #1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to move the cassette cover closing assembly horizontally to the position where the actuator can be drawn out from the frame notch. #2 Check that the actuator does not interfere with the frame notch. (1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #2 Notch Actuator #1 RBMC05068.AI #3 Remove the cassette cover closing assembly. #3 RBMC05069.AI REFERENCE Refer to the Service Parts List for the detailed development view of the cassette cover closing assembly. {SP:03I_CASSETTE SET UNIT 9} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-62 MC-63 5.22 Hose n Reinstallation Procedures (1) REFERENCE The shape and configuration of the hose differ between a machine with an IP of 15x30 size applicable and a machine with an IP of 15x30 size not applicable. Refer to the corresponding procedures. Attach the hose. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Rear cover (2) Remove the hoses. #1 Remove the hose. #2 Remove the hose. IN l Machine supporting a 15x30 cassette RBMC05072.AI l Machine not supporting a 15x30 cassette #1 #1 #2 RBMC05070.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-63 MC-64 5.23 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) #4 Remove the screw. #5 Remove the IP air leak valve assembly. l Machine supporting a 15x30 cassette REFERENCE The shape of the IP air leak valve assembly differs between a machine with an IP of 15x30 size applicable and a machine with an IP of 15x30 size not applicable. Refer to the corresponding procedures. n Removal Procedures (1) l Machine not supporting a 15x30 cassette #5 Remove the following components. #5 {MC:3.1_Cover} - Rear cover (2) Remove the IP air leak valve assembly (SVA1/SVA2). #4 DT3x6 #1 Remove the hoses. #2 Disconnect the connectors. #3 Disconnect the connector from the bracket. #4 DT3x6 RBMC05076.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the IP air leak valve assembly (SVA1/SVA2). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the IP air leak valve assembly. l Machine supporting a 15x30 cassette #1 l Machine not supporting a 15x30 cassette #1 #2 PA1 #3 #2 #2 SVA2 SVA1 #2 PA1 #3 #2 SVA1 RBMC05075.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-64 MC-65 5.24 IP Suction Pump (PA1) #5 Remove the IP suction pump. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Rear cover (2) Remove the IP suction pump (PA1). #5 #1 Remove the hoses. #2 Unclamp the clamp. #3 Disconnect the connector. #4 Cut the cable tie. RBMC05078.AI #1 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) #4 Mount the IP suction pump (PA1). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Put the IN hose connection between the hooks to reinstall the IP suction pump. - Put the cable tie to align with the notches. - Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump. Notch #2 #3 PA1 RBMC05077.AI Hook IN 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual RBMC05079.AI MC-65 MC-66 5.25 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) (3) Remove the sensor (SA4). u NOTE u n Removal Procedures (1) Do not damage or soil the light emitting surface of the IP dropping sensor. Failure to observe this precaution may degrade the sensor performance. Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Rear cover (2) #1 Pull out the bracket. #2 Unclamp the clamp. #3 Disconnect the connector. #4 Remove the screw. #5 Remove the sensor. Remove the bracket. #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Disconnect the connector from the bracket. #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the bracket. #4 BR3x12 #5 #1 #3 SA4-1 #2 #2 #4 #1 RBMC05081.AI REFERENCE The IP dropping sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light receiving side in the number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side has three pins. #3 DT3x6 (x2) RBMC05080.AI n Reinstallation Procedures Mount the sensor (SA4). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-66 MC-67 5.26 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side) (3) Remove the sensor (SA4). u NOTE u n Removal Procedures (1) Do not damage or soil the light receiving surface of the IP dropping sensor. Failure to observe this precaution may degrade the sensor performance. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) #1 Remove the screw. #2 Disconnect the connector. #3 Remove the sensor. Rotate the motor, and move the cassette cover opening assembly to its uppermost position. #2 SA4-2 #3 Cassette cover opening assembly #1 BR3x12 RBMC05083.AI Motor (MA1) REFERENCE The IP dropping sensor on the light receiving side differs from the one on the light emitting side in the number of connector pins. The connector for the light receiving side has four pins. RBMC05082.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SA4). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-67 MC-68 5.27 Guide (4) #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the guide (reference side). #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the guide (opposite reference side). n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the guide. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Rotate the motor, and move the debris fall prevention shutter assembly to a position where it closes. #2 Should be closed. #1 DT3x6 Motor (MA1) #4 #3 DT3x6 (x2) RBMC05086.AI Debris fall prevention shutter assembly (3) n Reinstallation Procedures RBMC05084.AI Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to a position where you can access the guide screw with a screwdriver. Guide Reinstall the guide. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Motor (MA3) #2 (1) Reinstall the guide (opposite reference side) while aligning the tip of the guide with the bracket notch. Notch #1 RBMC05087.AI RBMC05085.AI IP suction arm 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-68 MC-69 5.28 Suction Cup #3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the suction cup assembly. Exercise care not to damage the hose. REFERENCE Removal/reinstallation procedures of the suction cup are mentioned for the suction cup on the opposite reference side. As for the reference side suction cup, follow the similar procedures as those for the opposite reference side. n Removal Procedures (1) #3 Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.27_Guide} (2) Remove the suction cup assembly. #1 Remove the hose. #2 Remove the screws. RBMC05089.AI (3) Remove the suction cup. #1 Remove the KL ring. #2 Remove the suction cup. #3 Remove the packing. REFERENCE Remove the suction cup by means of a Phillips screwdriver while pressing down the hose joint with a wrench or the like. #2 DT3x6 (x2) #1 KL8 Hose joint #1 #2 RBMC05088.AI #3 RBMC05090.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-69 MC-70 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the suction cup. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Check that no foreign matter attaches to the sucking surface of the suction cup. - Make sure that the KL ring is mounted in the right orientation as indicated in the figure. Otherwise, the suction cup assembly cannot be correctly mounted on the IP suction arm. Orientation of the attachment of the KL ring. RBMC05091.AI - Check that there is no excess of the hose in an area surrounded by the dotted line in the figure. Otherwise, the hose might be pulled and get damaged when moving the IP suction arm. RBMC05092.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-70 MC-71 5.29 IP Transport Motor (MA4) REFERENCE When the arm of the IP suction link mechanism is located at a position where you cannot access the screws, it is recommended that you rotate the motor (MA3) to move the IP suction arm to its lowermost position. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. Motor (MA3) {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} (2) Remove the motor (MA4). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the motor. #3 Disconnect the connector. Arm RBMC05056.AI IP suction arm #2 #1 TP4x8 (x2) #3 MA4 RBMC05093.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the motor (MA4). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure. Connector RBMC05094.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-71 MC-72 5.30 Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Reinstall the side-positioning transport roller driving gears. u NOTE u Remove the following components. Exercise care in the mounting orientation of the gear (A). {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} (2) Remove the side-positioning transport roller driving gears. Inside #1 Remove the gear (A). #2 Remove the gear (B). Long Outside Short #2 RBMC05096.AI #1 RBMC05095.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-72 MC-73 5.31 Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) (4) #1 Remove the E-rings. #2 Remove the spur gears. #3 Remove the spur gears. #4 Remove the bearings. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the bearing. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.30_Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear} (2) Rotate the motor, and move the debris fall prevention shutter assembly to a position where it closes. Should be closed. Motor (MA1) #1 E4 #2 #1 E6 #4 #4 #3 #2 #1 E4 RBMC05098.AI Debris fall prevention shutter assembly (3) RBMC05084.AI Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to its uppermost position. Motor (MA3) IP suction arm 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 RBMC05056r.AI CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-73 MC-74 (5) Remove the housing. #4 Remove the screws. #5 Rotate the housing, and disengage the hook of the housing from the frame hole. #6 Remove the housing (reference side) while supporting the side-positioning transport roller (B) on your hand. u NOTES u - The housing is fragile at the locations as indicated in the figure. Exercise care not to hold the locations shown in the figure when removing/reinstalling the housing. - The housing has a hook on its back. Exercise care not to damage the hook when removing/reinstalling the housing. Exercise care not to damage. Hook #5 #6 RBMC05099.AI #4 DT3x6 (x2) #1 Remove the screws. #2 Rotate the housing, and disengage the hook of the housing from the frame hole. #3 Remove the housing (opposite reference side). Roller (B) RBMC05101.AI (6) Remove the side-positioning transport roller (B). #1 Move the shaft end on the reference side of the roller along the frame notch. #2 Remove the roller. Notch #2 #3 #1 DT3x6 (x2) #1 RBMC05100.AI #2 RBMC05102.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-74 MC-75 n Reinstallation Procedures #3 Remove the E-rings. (1) #3 E8 Reinstall the side-positioning transport rollers (A) and (B). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Attach the rollers (A) and (B) so that the E-ring is located inside the damper. #3 E8 Damper RBMC05103.AI (7) Remove the side-positioning transport roller (A). #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Move the roller to the opposite reference side. #3 Remove the roller. E-ring RBMC05106.AI REFERENCE The shaft on the reference side of the roller (A) is shorter than that of the roller (B). #1 E8 A #2 B A #3 B RBMC05104.AI #4 Remove the E-ring. #4 E8 RBMC05107.AI RBMC05105.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-75 MC-76 5.32 Actuator Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) u NOTE u Remove the following components. Reinstall the actuator assembly by passing the tip of the actuator through the stopper hole. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} (2) Reinstall the actuator assembly. Remove the actuator assembly. u NOTE u Remove the actuator assembly while holding the shaded part. Stopper hole Actuator tip RBMC05109.AI RBMC05111.AI #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the actuator assembly. #1 DT3x6 #2 RBMC05110.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-76 MC-77 5.33 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) (4) #1 Disconnect the connector. #2 Remove the sensor. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the sensor (SA6). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} (2) Rotate the motor, and move the debris fall prevention shutter assembly to a position where it closes. #2 Should be closed. #1 SA6 Motor (MA1) RBMC05113.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Debris fall prevention shutter assembly (3) Mount the sensor (SA6). RBMC05084.AI Rotate the motor, and move the gear of the IP suction link mechanism to a position where you can access the sensor. Gear Motor (MA3) Sensor (SA6) RBMC05112.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-77 MC-78 5.34 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) (1) Mount the sensor (SA7). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} (2) Remove the sensor assembly. #1 Unclamp the clamp. #2 Disconnect the connector. #3 Remove the screw. #4 Remove the sensor assembly. #1 #2 SA7 #4 #3 DT3x6 RBMC05114.AI (3) Remove the sensor (SA7). RBMC05115.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-78 MC-79 5.35 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SA9). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.16_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)} (2) Remove the sensor assembly. #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Remove the sensor assembly. #4 Disconnect the connector. #3 #2 DT3x6 #1 #4 SA9 #1 RBMC05116.AI (3) Remove the sensor (SA9). RBMC05117.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-79 MC-80 5.36 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) #4 Support the solenoid assembly on your hand. #5 Remove the screws. #6 Support the cassette hold pin on your hand. #7 Remove the solenoid assembly. #8 Disconnect the connector. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Cassette hold pin {MC:5.13_Cassette Hold Release Arm} (2) #6 Remove the solenoid assembly. #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Unclamp the clamps. #3 Disconnect the connector. #7 #8 SA2 #2 #5 DT3x6 (x2) #4 RBMC05119.AI (3) #2 #2 Remove the solenoid (SOLA1). #1 Remove the cassette hold pin. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the solenoid. #1 L=38 mm #3 #3 SOLA1 #1 RBMC05118.AI #2 TP3x6 (x2) RBMC05120.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-80 MC-81 (4) n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the sensor (SA2). #1 Move the actuator to a position where it does not interfere with the sensor. #2 Remove the sensor. (1) Reinstall the solenoid (SOLA1) and the sensor (SA2). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. #2 u NOTES u - Reinstall with the cable facing as indicated in the figure. - Reinstall with the pin facing upward. Pin GOOD NO GOOD #1 Actuator RBMC05121.AI Cable RBMC05122.AI - Reinstall by passing the cassette hold pin through the frame hole. Frame hole RBMC05123.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-81 MC-82 5.37 Movable Guide Assembly (3) #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the bracket from the shaft of the movable guide assembly. #3 Remove the bracket. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the bracket. Remove the following components. Shaft {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} #2 {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} #3 {MC:5.8_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly} {MC:5.9_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft} (1) Remove the tension coil spring. #1 Remove the tension coil spring from the shaft of the movable guide assembly. #2 Remove the screw. #3 Remove the pin bracket. #4 Remove the tension coil spring. #1 DT3x6 (x2) #2 DT3x6 Shaft (4) RBMC05125.AI Remove the movable guide assembly. #3 #1 #4 L=68 mm RBMC05124.AI RBMC05126.AI REFERENCE For the detailed exploded view of the movable guide assembly, see the "Service Parts List" volume. {SP:03M_CASSETTE SET UNIT 13} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-82 MC-83 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the movable guide assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall the tension coil spring by engaging it with the shaft of the movable guide assembly and the pin bracket groove. Groove Groove RBMC05128.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-83 MC-84 5.38 “15x30 Cassette” Movable Guide Assembly REFERENCE For the detailed exploded view of the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly, see the "Service Parts List" volume. n Removal Procedures (1) {SP:03L_CASSETTE SET UNIT 12} Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} n Reinstallation Procedures {MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)} (1) {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} Reinstall the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} u NOTE u {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} Reinstall by inserting the roller into the hole of the guide plate (A). {MC:5.8_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly} Hole of the guide (A) {MC:5.9_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft} {MC:5.16_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)} Roller {MC:5.35_"15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)} (2) Remove the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly. #1 Remove the tension coil springs. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly. #2 DT3x6 (x4) RBMC05130.AI #3 #1 L=50 mm #1 L=40 mm RBMC05129.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-84 MC-85 5.39 IP Suction Arm (3) #1 Move the shaft end on the opposite reference side upward along the groove. #2 Move the shaft end the reference side downward along the groove. #3 Disengage the shaft end on the reference side from the groove. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the IP suction arm. Remove the following components. Groove {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.18_IP Suction Link Mechanism} #2 {MC:5.25_IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Emitting Side)} #3 {MC:5.27_Guide} {MC:5.28_Suction Cup} {MC:5.29_IP Transport Motor (MA4)} #1 REFERENCE The IP dropping sensor (SA4: light emitting side) and the suction cup may be removed integrally with the bracket to remove the IP suction arm. (2) Shaft end Remove the bearings and the slide bearings. RBMC05132.AI #1 Remove the bearings. #2 Remove the slide bearings. #4 Remove the IP sunction arm. #4 #1 #2 #2 #1 RBMC05133.AI RBMC05131.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-85 MC-86 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the IP sunction arm. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall the slide bearings in the orientation as indicated in the figure. RBMC05134.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-86 MC-87 5.40 IP Suction Link Shaft #5 Remove the bearings. n Removal Procedures (1) #5 Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.18_IP Suction Link Mechanism} (2) Remove the IP suction link shaft. #5 #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Move the bearing. #3 Move the IP suction link shaft and the bearing. #4 Remove the IP suction link shaft. RBMC05136.AI n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the IP suction link shaft. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u #3 Reinstall while facing the longer of small-diameter-regions toward the reference side. Small-diameter-region #4 #1 E6 Long #2 RBMC05135.AI RBMC05137.AI Short 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-87 MC-88 5.41 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly (3) #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the pin. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the pin. Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.30_Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear} {MC:5.31_Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A and B)} (2) Remove the arms and the bearings. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the arms. #3 Remove the bearings. #1 TP4x8 #2 RBMC05139.AI (4) Remove the debris fall prevention shutter assembly. #1 Move the shaft end on the reference side along the frame notch. #2 Disengage the shaft end on the opposite reference side from the frame hole. #3 Remove the debris fall prevention shutter assembly. Notch #3 #2 #1 TP3x6 #3 #1 TP3x6 #2 #1 #2 RBMC05138.AI #3 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual RBMC05140.AI MC-88 MC-89 n Reinstallation Procedures #4 Remove the torsion coil springs. #5 Remove the bearings. (1) Reinstall the debris fall prevention shutter assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u #5 #4 Reinstall the debris fall prevention shutter assembly by engaging the torsion coil spring with the notch of the debris fall prevention shutter assembly and the pin groove. #4 #5 Notch Groove RBMC05141.AI RBMC05142.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-89 MC-90 5.42 Guide Plates (A) and (B) (2) #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the guide plate. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the guide plate (A). Remove the following components. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} {MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} #2 {MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} {MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} {MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} {MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear} {MC:5.13_Cassette Hold Release Arm} #1 DT3x6 (x5) {MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm} {MC:5.15_Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly} {MC:5.17_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)} {MC:5.18_IP Suction Link Mechanism} {MC:5.19_Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)} {MC:5.20_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft} {MC:5.21_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly} {MC:5.32_Actuator Assembly} REFERENCE Only the IP suction link mechanism on the opposite reference side may be removed to remove the guide plates (A) and (B). RBMC05143.AI (3) Remove the guide plate (B). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the guide plate. #2 #1 DT3x6 (x3) RBMC05144.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-90 MC-91 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the guide plates (A) and (B). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall by passing the roller of the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly, if equipped, into the hole on the guide plate (A). Hole on the guide (A) Roller RBMC05145.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-91 MC-92 6. 6.1 Erasure Unit n Removal Procedures (1) {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Louver - Right-hand side cover Erasure Unit CAUTION Before turning on the lamp, make sure to install the erasure unit into the machine. Do not turn on the lamp by connecting the erasure unit to the machine and turning on the power while the erasure unit is outside the machine. Remove the following components. (2) Remove the erasure unit. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Pull out the erasure unit by the fingertips by approx. 100 mm. u NOTE u When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-92 MC-93 #4 Pull out the erasure unit while carrying under it on the hand. #2 Slowly push to the innermost while assuring that the spur gear is engaging. If the gear does not engage, slightly rotate the spur gear and then insert. #3 Tighten the screws. #4 Connect the connectors. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the erasure unit. u NOTES u Do not forcibly push the erasure unit into the housing if it cannot be pushed to the innermost. Otherwise, the spur gear of the erasure unit might get damaged. #1 Place the erasure unit, and slowly push it partway to within approx. 50 mm from the innermost. (2) Reinstall the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Louver - Right-hand side cover Push in partway. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-93 MC-94 6.2 Reflection Plate n Reinstallation Procedures (1) #1 Mount the reflection plate with its notches facing downward. #2 Reinstall the screws. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. #2 TP3x6 (x4) {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} (2) Mounting the reflection plate. Remove the reflection plate. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the reflection plate. u NOTES u #1 - Do not strongly grasp the reflection plate and the filter, when removing the reflection plate. Otherwise, the lamp located inside the filter might get damaged. - Do not damage the reflection face of the reflection plate that has been removed. If it gets damaged, IP erasure might not be performed normally. #1 DT3x6 (x4) Reflection plate RBMC06006.AI (2) Check that the width around the center of the reflection plate is 6 ± 1 mm. If it is out of the range, remove the reflection plate, and proceed to the procedure (3). #2 Filter Reflection plate RBMC06005.AI RBMC06007.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-94 MC-95 (3) Adjust the reflection plate. #1 Push around the center of the reflection plate, and adjust a warp of the reflection plate. #2 Repeat the procedures (1) and (2), and make sure that the warp of the reflection plate is within an appropriate range. #1 RBMC06008.AI (4) Reinstall the following components. {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-95 MC-96 6.3 Brush Roller Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. n Removal Procedures (1) u NOTES u Remove the following components. - Reinstall the brush roller assembly by inserting its latches into the bracket holes. {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} (2) Reinstall the brush roller assembly. Remove the brush roller assembly. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the brush roller assembly. #1 BR4x25 Latch #2 RBMC06010.AI - Check that the latch and the protrusions of the brush roller assembly are correctly retained. RBMC06009.AI Protrusion Latch 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual RBMC06027.AI MC-96 MC-97 6.4 Brush Roller (4) #1 Push the claws at both ends of the stopper. #2 Remove the stoppers. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the stoppers. Remove the following components. #1 {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} {MC:6.3_Brush Roller Assembly} (2) Remove the spur gear. #2 #1 Open the claws of the spur gear, and remove the gear. #1 #2 Claw RBMC06012.AI (5) #1 (3) RBMC06028.AI Remove the half clutch spur gears. Remove the brush rollers. #1 Remove the brush rollers. #2 Remove the bearings. #2 #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the half clutch spur gear. #3 Remove the half clutch spur gear. #1 #3 #2 #1 E4 #2 RBMC06013.AI RBMC06011.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-97 MC-98 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the brush roller. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Reinstall the brush roller by facing a shorter shaft end toward the claw of the case and fitting the bearing into the groove. Longer shaft end Shorter shaft end Groove Claw Groove RBMC06014.AI - Check that the stopper latch engages inside the case to prevent the stopper from coming off. - Reinstall the half clutch spur gear on the longer shaft end in the orientation as indicated in the figure. If reversely installed, the brush roller assembly will not work normally. Longer shaft end RBMC06015.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-98 MC-99 6.5 Filter (3) Remove the filter. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Remove the filter from the half punch. u NOTE u Exercise care not to smear the filter surface when removing/reinstalling the filter. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. #3 {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} {MC:6.2_Reflection Plate} {MC:6.3_Brush Roller Assembly} (2) Remove the cover. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the cover. #3 #2 #1 TP3x6 RBMC06017.AI #1 TP3x6 (x4) #4 Remove the filter. u NOTE u Do not bring the filter into contact with the lamp when removing the filter. #2 Lamp RBMC06016.AI Bracket #4 RBMC06018.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-99 MC-100 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the filter. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u Place the filter by aligning the position of the half-punches, and insert the filter into an aperture of the bracket. Half-punch Bracket RBMC06018a.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-100 MC-101 6.6 Lamp Assembly (3) #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Disconnect the connectors. #4 Remove the screws. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the lamp assembly. Remove the following components. {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} {MC:6.2_Reflection Plate} (2) Remove the cover. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the cover. #1 TP3x6 (x4) #2 RBMC06016.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-101 MC-102 #5 Remove the lamp assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the lamp assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-102 MC-103 7. Light-Collecting Unit 7.1 (2) Disconnect the connectors. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Retain the disconnected cables with the clamp. Light-Collecting Unit u INSTRUCTION u Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged. CAUTION Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are wearing gloves. u INSTRUCTION u When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} (3) Remove the screws. u NOTE u Exercise care not to damage the acrylic part of the light-collecting unit with a screwdriver when removing the screws. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-103 MC-104 (4) Remove the light-collecting unit. #1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, raise the light-collecting unit, and disengage from the hooks of the subscanning unit. #2 Draw out the light-collecting unit with its upper part tilted forward, and remove. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is disengaged from the hooks of the subscanning unit before removing the light-collecting unit. Otherwise, the tip of the light-collecting unit might get damaged. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Insert the light-collecting unit along the guide of the subscanning unit. - Check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is correctly engaged with the hooks of the subscanning unit. #3 Place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure. If reversely placed, load is applied to the adhesive part of the photomultiplier, causing the light-collecting unit to be damaged. - Make sure that the connector (CN2) is correctly connected. Otherwise, an image with a transparent portion will result. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-104 MC-105 (2) Check to make sure that the ferrite core is clamped as shown below. n Check/Adjustment Procedures (1) {MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} Ferrite core Clamp Start the RU PC-TOOL. (2) Restore the machine-specific data {MU:4.16_RESTORE} (3) Initialize the LED data. {MU:7.3 [5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize} Do not clamp the board cables of the scanning optics unit. (3) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. (5) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. (6) Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l No abnormal S-value is exhibited and image read normally takes place. RBMC07013.AI Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the lightcollecting unit, and carry out “Initialize the LED data” of the MUTL, when the lightcollecting unit is replaced with a new one. u INSTRUCTION u When the light-collecting unit has been replaced with a new one, restore the attached machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”. {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 (4) {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-105 MC-106 7.2 PMT Board (3) Remove the board assmbly. #1 Loosen the screws. CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} (2) Disconnect the connectors. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Retain the disconnected cables with the clamp. #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, slowly raise the board assembly, and remove it. u INSTRUCTION u Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-106 MC-107 (4) Remove the board. (2) Check to make sure that the ferrite core is clamped as shown below. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the board. Ferrite core Clamp Do not clamp the board cables of the scanning optics unit. (3) When the board is replaced with a new one, recover the machine, and then confirm the S-value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} n Reinstallation Procedures (1) RBMC07013.AI (4) Reinstall the board. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. If the PMT board is replaced with a new one, perform the "SCN ALL DATA" backup procedures. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} u NOTE u Put the connector and the bracket in the orientation as indicated in the figure for reinstallation. Bracket (5) Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence. Connector 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-107 MC-108 8. 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit u NOTE u Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the label indicating how to place the scanning optics unit. Scanning Optics Unit CAUTION When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. CAUTION Never touch the window of the scanning optics unit. If fingerprints or the like are left on the window, the scanning optics unit must be replaced. u INSTRUCTION u Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit. u NOTE u If you are going to use the scanning optics unit that was used in another machine, install it and then make a shading speed correction. After shading correction, back up the "SCN OPTICAL DATA". {MU:7.3 [5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))} {MU:7.3 [5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR)} Window of scanning optic unit 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-108 MC-109 n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} (3) Remove the scanning optics unit. #1 Loosen the screws. #2 Hold the green label and pull up the scanning optics unit. #3 Draw out the scanning optics unit forward in parallel, and remove it. u NOTE u Raise the scanning optics unit to a position where the four holes on the unit do not interfere with the screw head, and pull out the unit. {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} {MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)} (2) Disconnect the connectors. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Retain the disconnected cables with the clamp. Green label Green label 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-109 MC-110 (4) Place the scanning optics unit. u INSTRUCTION u Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the label indicating how to place the scanning optics unit. n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the scanning optics unit. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTIONS u - When the scanning optics unit is to be replaced, install the unit after peeling a dust tight tape applied to the window of the scanning optics unit. - Check that the scanning optics unit is correctly put on the retaining screw. - Tighten the retaining screw while pressing the scanning optics unit against the positioning pin. Positioning pin 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-110 MC-111 (2) Make sure that the cable is routed as shown in the figure below, after the lightcollecting unit is installed. n Check/Adjustment Procedures (1) Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} (2) Ferrite core Clamp Restore the machine-specific data. {MU:4.16_RESTORE} (3) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. (4) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. (5) Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} Do not clamp the board cables of the scanning optics unit. l There is no error occurrence. Clamp RBMC08009.AI (3) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the scanning optics unit, after the machine is restored exactly as it was. u INSTRUCTION u When the scanning optics unit has been replaced with a new one, always restore the attached machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”. {MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-111 MC-112 9. Subscanning Unit 9.1 (3) Disconnect the connectors. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Unclamp the clamps. Subscanning Unit n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Rear cover - Left-hand side cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate - Rear plate - Left-hand side plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} {MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)} {MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit} (2) Disconnect the connectors. #1 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Unclamp the clamps. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-112 MC-113 (4) Set aside the cable out of the housing. (6) Remove the subscanning unit. #1 Draw out the subscanning unit halfway. #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the subscanning unit. (5) Remove the screws. n Reinstallation Procedures #1 Remove the screws from the front. #2 Remove the screws from the rear. (1) Never remove. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Reinstall the subscanning unit. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-113 MC-114 9.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate (2) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the post-reading conveyor guide assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Put the post-reading conveyor guide assembly on the guide of the subscanning unit, and then reinstall. Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-114 MC-115 9.3 Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Rotate the flywheel, and check to make sure that the Kapton® belt does not come off. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} (2) Remove the Kapton® belt and the flywheel. #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the Kapton® belt. #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the flywheel. u NOTE u When removing/reinstalling the Kapton® belt, exercise care not to turn the belt inside out. The machine might not work normally. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-115 MC-116 9.4 Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. (2) {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} Remove the rubber belt and the flywheel. CAUTION When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. #1 Remove the rubber belt. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the flywheel. 9.5 Subscanning Motor (MZ1) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} (2) {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} Remove the motor (MZ1). #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the motor assembly. #4 Unclamp the clamps. #5 Remove the screws. #6 Remove the motor. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTE u Reinstall the rubber belt with its glossy face facing outward. If the rubber belt is placed inside out, the machine might not work normally. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-116 MC-117 9.6 IP Transport Motor (MC1) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. 9.7 Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2) n Removal Procedures (1) {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} (2) Remove the motor (MZ1). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the motor. n Reinstallation Procedures Remove the following components. (2) Remove the motor (MC2). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the motor. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-117 MC-118 9.8 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Front plate {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} (2) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SZ1). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Place the sensor in the orientation as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the sensor. {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} Remove the sensor (SZ1). #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Disconnect the connector. #3 Retain the disconnected cable with the clamp. #4 Remove the screw. #5 Remove the bracket. #6 Remove the screws. #7 Remove the sensor. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-118 MC-119 9.9 Light-Collecting Shaft (Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic Member) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} (2) (3) Remove the tension coil spring and the bearing on the opposite reference side. u NOTE u When installing the bearing, make sure that the direction of the guide protrusion is shown in below. #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the KL ring. #3 Remove the hook. #4 Remove the bearing. Remove the spur gear and the bearing on the opposite reference side. #1 Remove the E-rings. #2 Remove the spur gear. #3 Remove the KL ring. #4 Remove the spur gear. #5 Remove the bearing. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-119 MC-120 (4) Remove the light-collecting shaft. CAUTION Do not be hurt the reflective surface of the collector mirror with contacting the surrounding. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u INSTRUCTION u Reinstall the light-collecting shaft by putting its protrusion under the pin on the frame. #1 Move to the opposite reference side. #2 Remove the light-collecting shaft. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-120 MC-121 9.10 Rubber Roller (A, B) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} Rubber roller (B) {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly} (2) Rubber roller (A) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Remove the bracket and the spur gear. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Remove the E-ring. #4 Remove the spur gear. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-121 MC-122 (3) Remove the upper screws and loosen the lower screw that secures the guide. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Loosen the screws. (4) Remove the rubber roller (A, B). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the rubber roller (A, B) assembly. REFERENCE For the detailed exploded view of the rubber roller (A, B) assembly, see the "Service Parts List" volume. {SP:07F_SUB SCANNING UNIT 6} n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE The shaft of the roller (A) on the opposite reference side is longer than that of the roller (B). 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-122 MC-123 9.11 Rubber Roller (C, D) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly} Rubber roller (C) Rubber roller (D) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 {MC:9.10_Rubber Roller (A, B)} (2) Remove the spur gear and the bracket. #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the spur gear. #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the bracket. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-123 MC-124 (3) Remove the conveyor guide (A) and the conveyor guide (B). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the conveyor guide (A). #3 Remove the screws. #4 Remove the conveyor guide (B). (4) Remove the rubber roller (C, D). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the rubber roller (C, D) assembly. REFERENCE For the detailed exploded view of the rubber roller (C, D) assembly, see the "Service Parts List" volume. {SP:07G_SUB SCANNING UNIT 7} n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE The shaft of the roller (C) on the opposite reference side is longer than that of the roller (D). 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-124 MC-125 9.12 Rubber Roller (E) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} (2) Remove the spur gear on the reference side. #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the spur gear. Rubber roller (E) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-125 MC-126 (3) Remove the spur gear on the opposite reference side. #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the spur gear. (4) Remove the housing. [Reference side] #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the E-ring. #3 Remove the bearing. #4 Remove the housing. [Opposite reference side] #5 Remove the tension coil spring. #6 Remove the E-ring. #7 Remove the bearing. #8 Remove the housing. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-126 MC-127 (5) Remove the rubber roller (E). #1 Remove the KL-ring. #2 Remove the rubber roller (E). 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-127 MC-128 9.13 Conveyor Guide Assembly n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. (3) Remove the conveyor guide assembly. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the conveyor guide assembly. #3 Disconnect the connector. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} (2) Remove the connector. #1 Unclamp the clamps. #2 Disconnect the connector. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-128 MC-129 9.14 Rubber Roller (F) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly} (2) Remove the rubber roller (F). [Reference side] #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the bearing. #3 Remove the housing. Rubber roller (F) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 [Opposite reference side] #4 Remove the E-ring. #5 Remove the bearing. #6 Remove the housing. #7 Remove the rubber roller (F). CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-129 MC-130 9.15 Grip Release Arm n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. (3) Remove the grip release arm. #1 Move the arm. #2 Draw out the straight pin. #3 Remove the grip release arm. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly} (2) Remove the bearing. #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the spur gear. #3 Remove the bearing. n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-130 MC-131 9.16 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) (3) #1 Rotate the shaft, and bring the actuator away from the sensor. #2 Remove the screws. #3 Remove the motor assembly. n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the motor assembly. Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} (2) Remove the cover. #1 Place the subscanning unit with its front facing upward. #2 Unclamp the clamps. #3 Disconnect the connector. #4 Remove the screws. #5 Remove the cover. (4) Remove the motor (MZ2) and the sensor (SZ2). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the motor. #3 Remove the sensor. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-131 MC-132 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the motor (MZ2) and the sensor (SZ2). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Reinstall with the connector facing in the orientation as indicated in the figure. - When reinstalling the motor assembly, tighten the screw while pressing the bracket against the shaft. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-132 MC-133 9.17 Subscanning Grip Assembly n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. (3) Remove the subscanning grip assembly. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the E-ring. #3 Move the bearing. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)} (2) Remove the cover. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the cover. #4 Move the bracket, and remove the pin of the subscanning grip assembly from the guide hole. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-133 MC-134 #5 Remove the subscanning grip assembly. - Put the spring between the cams. If the spring is disengaged, rotate the shaft and put the spring between the cams. - Make sure that the flange of the subscanning grip assembly is correctly fitted into the cam groove. Otherwise, abnormalities in images will result. Flange Flange n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. u NOTES u - Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly by inserting its pin into the guide hole. Groove Groove GOOD NO GOOD RBMC09111.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-134 MC-135 9.18 IP Sensor (SC3) n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SC3). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)} {MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)} {MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)} {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly} (2) Remove the sensor (SC3). #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the sensor. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-135 MC-136 9.19 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) n Removal Procedures (1) n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Mount the sensor (SC9). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Remove the following components. {MC:3.1_Cover} - Front cover - Louver - Right-hand side cover - Rear cover {MC:3.2_Plate} - Rear plate (2) Remove the sensor (SC9). #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Unclamp the clamp. #4 Disconnect the connector. #5 Remove the screw. #6 Remove the sensor. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-136 MC-137 9.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} (2) Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper). #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the hook. #3 Remove the screw. #4 Remove the bracket. #5 Remove the bearing. #6 Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper). #7 Remove the bearing. REFERENCE You need not remove the bracket on the reference side. Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-137 MC-138 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the driven shaft grip roller (upper). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE Place the driven shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a hole facing the opposite reference side. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-138 MC-139 9.21 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)} {MC:9.17_Subscanning Grip Assembly} (2) Remove the hook. #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the hook. Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-139 MC-140 (3) Remove the driven shaft grip roller (lower). #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the bearing. #3 Remove the guide (white). #4 Remove the driven shaft grip roller (lower). 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the driven shaft grip roller (lower). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE Place the driven shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a small rubber roller facing the opposite reference side. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-140 MC-141 9.22 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)} {MC:9.17_Subscanning Grip Assembly} (2) Remove the hook. #1 Remove the tension coil spring. #2 Remove the hook. Driving Shaft Grip Roller (lower) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-141 MC-142 (3) Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower). #1 Remove the E-ring. #2 Remove the bearing. #3 Remove the guide (white). #4 Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower). 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the driving shaft grip roller (lower). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE Place the driving shaft grip roller (lower) with the shaft end having a small rubber roller facing the opposite reference side. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-142 MC-143 9.23 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} n Roller Location {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)} {MC:9.17_Subscanning Grip Assembly} {MC:9.22_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)} (2) Remove the guide. #1 Remove the screws. #2 Remove the guide. Driving Shaft Grip Roller (upper) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-143 MC-144 (3) Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper). #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Remove the bearing. #4 Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper). #5 Remove the bearing. REFERENCE You need not remove the bracket on the reference side. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the driving shaft grip roller (upper). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE Place the driving shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a hole facing the opposite reference side. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-144 MC-145 9.24 Center Roller n Removal Procedures (1) Remove the following components. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} n Roller Location {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} {MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)} {MC:9.17_Subscanning Grip Assembly} (2) Remove the center roller. #1 Remove the screw. #2 Remove the bracket. #3 Remove the bearing. #4 Remove the center roller. #5 Remove the bearing. REFERENCE You need not remove the bracket on the reference side. Center Roller 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-145 MC-146 n Reinstallation Procedures (1) Reinstall the center roller. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE Place the center roller with the shaft end having the free roller (x3) facing the opposite reference side. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-146 MC-147 10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations 10.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures n Fuse Classification l How to understand fuse notations An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. Rated amperage of 1.6A n Fuse Replacement Procedures CAUTIONS - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well. - To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off. - When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse. (1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one. Fuse classification symbol [Remove] Fuse RBMC10005.AI Pin RBMC10004.AI 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-147 MC-148 10.2 10.3 CPU Board Fuses SND Board Fuses n Fuse Location n Fuse Location n Fuse Information Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A) F8 LM 48 V 1A F9 LM 48 V 2A F10 LM 48 V 2A n Fuse Information Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A) F7 LM 48 V 1A F13 LM 48 V 1.6 A F19 LM 48 V 1A F20 LM 48 V 1.6 A 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-148 MC-149 10.4 PIF63A Board Fuses n Fuse Location n Fuse Information Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A) F1 LM 48 V 1A F2 LM 48 V 5A F3 LM 48 V 3.2 A F4 LM 48 V 1.6 A F6 LM 48 V 5A F7 LM 48 V 3.2 A F8 ST 250 V 8A 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-149 MC-150 11. 11.1 List of Jigs and Tools Jigs and Tools No applicable component 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-150 MC-151 BLANK PAGE 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-151 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 39-41, 59, 165-170 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Maintenance Utility (MU) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected MU-1 1. Overview of RU Service Utility The RU Service Utility consists of six kinds of utilities including the User Utility, Machine Maintenance Utility, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL, and MUTL. The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by end users as well, while the Machine Maintenance Utility, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL and MUTL offer maintenance tools used exclusively by service engineers. The User Utility and Machine Maintenance Utility are operated from the operation panel of the RU machine, the RU PC-TOOL and MUTL are operated from the DX Console, and the Client PC and CLIENT PC-TOOL are operated on the client PC. 1.1 1.2 RU Operation Panel Change the RU settings or check its operation from the RU operation panel. The menu items displayed on the operation panel screen can be selected/executed by the four control buttons. Tree of RU Service Utility The architecture of the RU Service Utility is shown in the tree diagram below. n Tree Diagram RU Service Utility {MU:2._User Utility} {MU:3._Machine Maintenance Utility} {MU:4._RU PC-TOOL} {MU:5._Client PC} n To Execute the Menu Item “Mode change” To change the mode, press the control button below “Mode change”. {MU:6._CLIENT PC-TOOL} {MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions} u INSTRUCTION u The menus of the MUTL for "For Design" should never be used for routine servicing procedures. In the Maintenance Utility volume, their functions and procedures are not described. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-1 MU-2 1.3 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes Described in this section is the procedure for selecting the menu items displayed on the operation panel. The following is the menu selection window for the Machine Maintenance Utility. 1.3.1 Description of Buttons The buttons to be used in the menu selection in the respective modes are mentioned below. Button Return button Function Returns to the User Utility window. button Moves the cursor one item up from the current selection. button Moves the cursor one item down from the current selection. Select button Displays the setting window of the item selected by the / 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 buttons. Confirm button Sets the item selected by the Check button Used when executing the “Network Check” and “Loop Back Test” in the Machine Maintenance Utility. CR-IR 359 Service Manual / buttons in the RU. MU-2 MU-3 1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection 3. Press the Select button. The procedures for selecting “Loop Back Test” in the Machine Maintenance Utility are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. Press the 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 button seven times and select “Loop Back Test”. → The window of the selected menu appears. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-3 MU-4 1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses The procedures for setting addresses such as the Reader Unit IP Address and Subnet Mask from the operation panel are described. The following is the window for setting the Reader Unit Address. 1.4.1 Description of Buttons The buttons to be used to set the addresses are mentioned below. Button Return button Function Returns to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility. The address being changed is canceled. button Moves the cursor one digit left from the current digit. button Increments the value of the current digit by one. button Decrements the value of the current digit by one. button Moves the cursor one digit right from the current digit. Confirm button Sets the changed address in the RU and returns to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility. u NOTE u The following address items are set from the operation panel. - Reader Unit IP Address - Subnet Mask - FTP Server IP Address - Default Gateway - Secure Host - Secure Net When the addresses for the Subnet Mask, Secure Host and Secure Net are to be effective, be sure to turn OFF the RU power after the addresses are set, and then turn it ON again. The changed address is not set in the RU only by pressing the [Confirm] button. REFERENCES - The [Return] button appears only when the cursor is at the leftmost digit. To return to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility, move the cursor to the leftmost digit by pressing the [←] button. Then press the [Return] button. - The [Confirm] button appears only when “OK” is selected. To return to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility, after the set address is made effective, move the cursor to “OK” by pressing the [→] button. Then press the [Confirm] button. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-4 MU-5 1.4.2 3. Procedures for Changing the Address Press the button once, select “OK”, and press the Confirm button. The procedures of changing the address from “172.016.001.010” to “172.013.001.018” are described as an example. 1. Press the button five times and then press the 2. Press the button six times and then press the button three times. button eight times. → An alarm sound beeps 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, and the display returns to the menu selection window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-5 MU-6 2. User Utility The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service engineer. u NOTE u The menu items appearing in the “User Utility” depend on the settings of the EDIT CONFIGURATION specified at the time of installation. Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for details of the EDIT CONFIGURATION settings. {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} n Tree Diagram The architecture of the User Utility is shown in the tree diagram below. User Utility Equipment info* Scanner Cleaning* Set alarm volume* Set alarm silencing option* 2.1 Overview of User Utility n User Utility Window Set button volume* See the Instruction Manual. Panel brightness* Panel OFF timer* Set Hibernation timer* {MU:2.3_Select master IIP console} For more detail on those marked by *, see the Instruction Manual. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-6 MU-7 n Overview of Functions The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below. l Equipment info "Equipment description", "Number of IP read", "Number of IP conveyance", "Total time of laser ON", and "Total time of erasure lamp ON", and "Date of installation" are displayed. The respective values are those specified by the EDIT HISTORY of the RU PC-TOOL. Refer to “4.12 EDIT HISTORY” for details of the EDIT HISTORY. {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY} l Scanner Cleaning The light-collecting mirror is rotated to clean the light-collecting face of the light-collecting guide and perform its home-positioning. l Set alarm volume Used to set the volume of the alarm sound. l Set alarm silencing option Used to set how to stop the alarm sound. l Set button volume Used to set whether to enable or disable the sound when a button is touched. This is also used to set the volume of the button touch sound. l Panel brightness Used to set the contrast of the LCD panel. l Panel OFF timer Used to set the time until the backlight is automatically turned OFF when no button operation takes place. l Set Hibernation timer Used to set the time until the RU automatically enters the sleep mode when the RU is idle. l Select master IIP console Refer to “2.3 Select master IIP console” for details of the master IIP console. {MU:2.3_Select master IIP console} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-7 MU-8 2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. 2.2.1 Starting the User Utility CAUTION When starting the User Utility, make sure that all the processing, such as reading, has been completed and the machine is in READY state. 1. 2.3 Select master IIP console Set the DX Console to be used as a master CL among those registered during the installation or those registered by the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. The setting can be done only when “HOSPITAL” is selected in the “SCREEN TYPE” setup during the installation or version-update of the RU software. 2.3.1 Function The master CL can be changed. Up to four DX Console can be registered. One of them can be set as the RU’s default master CL. Press the [Utility] button. CAUTION Even when the master CL is changed, the IP address of the FTP server that is set in the RU remains unchanged. Information to be stored in the FTP server, such as error logs, is written into the FTP server of the IP address that is set in the RU. 2.3.2 2.2.2 1. Exiting the User Utility Press the [Back] button. Procedures u NOTE u Do not change the master CL unless an emergency arises or the machine is faulty. Changing the master CL erases the "ERROR LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and other data necessary for the user. For the master CL change procedure, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" in the Installation volume. {IN: Appendix 4._Setting the Master CL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-8 MU-9 3. Machine Maintenance Utility u NOTE u If the Machine Maintenance Utility is started up during bootup, the [Return] button in the lower right corner of the Machine Maintenance Utility window is hidden. This provision is made to prevent an initialization process from being inadvertently started during maintenance, as “Under maintenance” does not appear on the RU operation panel if the Machine Maintenance Utility is started up during bootup. The Machine Maintenance Utility offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service engineer. Setup of the RU’s IP address, the check of network connection from the RU side or the like is operated from the operation panel of the RU. Setup items include the followings: - Reader Unit Address - Subnet Mask - FTP Server IP Address - Default Gateway - Secure Host - Secure Net - Network Check - Loop Back Test - HV On/Off Note that the setup items of the Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set from the DX Console or the client PC. n Machine Maintenance Utility Window 3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance Utility n Tree Diagram of Machine Maintenance Utility Machine Maintenance {MU:3.2_Reader Unit IP Address} {MU:3.3_Subnet Mask} {MU:3.4_FTP Server IP Address} {MU:3.5_Default Gateway} {MU:3.6_Secure Host} {MU:3.7_Secure Net} {MU:3.8_Network Check} {MU:3.9_HV On/Off} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-9 MU-10 3.2 Reader Unit IP Address 3.2.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the IP address of the RU to "172.016.001.011" are described as an example. 1. 2. 3.2.1 {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Select “Reader Unit IP Address”. Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Function Used to set the IP address of the RU in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the RU specified here in the CL attains the network connection from the CL to the RU. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. 3. Set the IP address. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address is set to "172.016.001.010". - Do not change the IP address setting of "172.016.001.010" when the machine is to be used under the conditions as shipped from the factory. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-10 MU-11 3.3 Subnet Mask 3.3.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the subnet mask to "255.255.255.000" are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.3.1 Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Function Used to set the subnet mask in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. With the subnet mask set, networking devices capable of exchanging data can be limited. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the subnet mask is set to "255.255.000.000". - Do not change the subnet mask setting of "255.255.000.000" when the machine is to be used under the conditions as shipped from the factory. Select “Subnet Mask”. 3. Set the subnet mask. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm] button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup contents effective. 4. 5. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-11 MU-12 3.4 FTP Server IP Address 3.4.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the IP address of the FTP server to "172.016.001.021" are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.4.1 Function Used to set the IP address of the FTP server which contains the HISTORY LOG, ERROR LOG, configuration information or the like in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the FTP server attains the network connection from the RU to the FTP server. Select “FTP Server IP Address”. Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} 3. Set the IP address of the FTP server. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the FTP server is set to "172.016.001.020". - Do not change the FTP IP address setting of "172.016.001.020" when the machine is to be used under the conditions as shipped from the factory. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-12 MU-13 3.5 Default Gateway 3.5.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the IP address of the gateway to "172.016.001.001" are described as an example. 1. 2. 3.5.1 Function Used to set the IP address of the gateway, if the machine is networked via the gateway, in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the gateway attains the network connection with a machine with different network settings connected with the gateway. 3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Select "Default Gateway". Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Set the IP address of the Gateway. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the gateway is set to "000.000.000.000". - Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the gateway is not to be used. The following diagram shows an example of network connection between networks with different subnet mask settings. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-13 MU-14 3.6 Secure Host 3.6.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the IP address of the Secure Host to "172.016.001.021" are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.6.1 Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Function Used to set the IP address of a machine connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the Secure Host disables the connection with a networking device with an IP address except the setup IP address via the telnet. This assures certain security. Select "Secure Host". 3. Set the IP address of the Secure Host. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the Secure Host is set to "000.000.000.000". - Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Host is not to be used. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm] button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup contents effective. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 5. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-14 MU-15 3.7 Secure Net 3.7.2 Procedures The procedures for setting the network address of the Secure Net to "172.016.000.000" are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.7.1 Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Function Used to set the network address connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash ROM of the RU. Setting the network address of the Secure Net disables the connection with a networking device out of the setup range of the network addresses via the telnet. This assures certain security. Select "Secure Net". 3. Set the IP address of the Secure Net. REFERENCES - By factory default for the CPU63A board, the network address of the Secure Net is set to "000.000.000.000". - Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Net is not to be used. Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting method. {MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses} u NOTE u The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm] button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup contents effective. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 5. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-15 MU-16 3.8 Network Check 3.8.2 Procedures The procedures of a setup example where the FTP server is connected with the network and the gateway is not used are described. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.8.1 Function Used to check whether the network connection with the PC specified as the FTP server and the gateway is made by executing the PING command from the RU. The result of the network check appears on the operation panel. Select "Network Check". Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} 3. Press the [Check] button. u INSTRUCTION u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the error with reference to the Troubleshooting Volume. {Troubleshooting} 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-16 MU-17 3.9 HV On/Off 3.9.2 Procedures The procedures for turning OFF the HV switch (software switch) are described as an example. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 2. 3.9.1 Function Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu selection method. {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). REFERENCE If the high-voltage switch of the SCN23A is set to OFF, the HV switch (software switch) cannot be turned ON (although ON or OFF is selectable, the setting is not effective). Select "HV On/Off". 3. Select “OFF” and press the [Confirm] button. 4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} u NOTE u The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed. REFERENCE After you exit from the Machine Maintenance Utility and return to the main window, the HV-OFF error window (error code: 11200) appears. Press the [Confirm] button on the error window. The display returns to the main window, and “HV-OF” blinks on the top of the window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-17 MU-18 3.10 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility How to start and exit the Machine Maintenance Utility is described. 3.10.1 1. Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization Turn ON the RU circuit breaker. REFERENCE The RU does not become READY unless it is connected to the DX Console (the operation panel reads the error message “DX Console communication error”). However, even when the RU is not connected to the DX Console, the Machine Maintenance Utility can be started, for instance, to set the RU’s IP address. The Machine Maintenance Utility is started up by one of the following three methods depending on the RU state. - To start the Machine Maintenance Utility during bootup of the RU. {MU:3.10.1_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization} - To start the Machine Maintenance Utility while the RU is in the READY state. {MU:3.10.2_Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY State} - To start the Machine Maintenance Utility when an error occurs in the RU. {MU:3.10.4_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred} Refer to the following procedures for exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility. {MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-18 MU-19 2. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. 3.10.2 1. Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY State Press the [Utility] button. u NOTE u Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the RU power and repeat from the procedure 1. → The “Utility” window appears. 2. Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. u INSTRUCTION u If the Machine Maintenance Utility does not start up, exit the user utility by pressing the [Back] button. Then, repeat the above procedures. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-19 MU-20 3.10.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility n When the [Return] Button Is Not Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the Operation Panel 1. 2. 3.10.4 1. Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred If “System down” appears, press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l There is no error occurrence. n When the [Return] Button Is Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the Operation Panel 1. Press the [Return] button. 2. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l There is no error occurrence. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-20 MU-21 4. RU PC-TOOL 4.1.2 Tree Diagram RU PC-TOOL 4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST 4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:4.3_LIST OF EXISTING RU} {MU:4.10_INSTALL} RU PC-TOOL Ver.2.5 Configuration(C) Operation(O) {MU:4.11_VERSION UP} EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST ru1 RU NAME RU IP ADDR 172 MUTL PING 16 MON INSTALL 1 10 LIST OF EXISTING RU RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION ru1 172.16.1.10 XXXXXX V1.0 BACKUP NEW {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} DELETE FTP VERSION UP {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY} EDIT HISTORY RESTORE {MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME} {MU:4.15_BACKUP} EDIT CONFIGURATION EDIT CL NAME {MU:4.4_NEW} {MU:4.5_DELETE} {MU:4.6_MUTL} {MU:4.7_PING} {MU:4.8_MON} {MU:4.9_FTP} {MU:4.16_RESTORE} ERROR LOG {MU:4.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT} EXECUTE I/O TRACE EXPERT EXECUTE {MU:4.18_ERROR DB} ERROR DB ALL RUs SETTEING ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL VERSION UP {MU:4.19_UNINSTALL:ALL RUs} FRCH4404.EPS {MU:4.20_VERSION UP:ALL RUs} REFERENCE The version of the RU PC-TOOL is displayed on the upper left of the RU PC-TOOL window. Configuration {MU:4.21_CDPath} Operation {MU:4.22_Initialize APL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-21 MU-22 4.2 Outline of RU PC-TOOL RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer. Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the DX Console to RU, are performed on the DX Console connected to the RU via the network. 4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation panel. IP conveyance takes place. Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the center of the operation panel. “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under maintenance. n “Under Maintenance” Message When a command to change the contents on the flash ROM is executed from the RU PCTOOL, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, and the message of “Can't process the cassette” appears at the center. While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette. REFERENCE The blinking “Under Maintenance” message on the top of the operation panel indicates that a command to change the contents of the flash ROM has been executed from the RU PCTOOL. n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM: - MUTL - INSTALL - VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY - EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME - RESTORE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-22 MU-23 4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is running, the Error window as shown below appears on the DX Console. The command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is not executed. The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include: The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM: - MUTL - INSTALL - VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY - EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME - RESTORE CAUTION Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot start. REFERENCE The RU is running in the following states: - The RU is being initialized. - The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process. - The User Utility is started by the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-23 MU-24 4.3 LIST OF EXISTING RU 4.3.1 Function Upon installing the RU software, a data file corresponding to each machine is created in the FTP server. The list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server are listed up in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”. 4.4 NEW 4.4.1 Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew. Used to execute the following commands in the RU input in the “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR” fields if not displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” field. - MUTL - PING - MON - INSTALL 4.4.2 Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU has not been installed normally. Function Procedures 1. Click on [NEW]. 2. Input the RU name and the IP address of the RU. 3. Execute the respective commands. REFERENCES - For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE" field, uninstall it and then install the RF software again. - If "VERSION" is displayed in red, it indicates that the version of the RU software has not been updated. Update the version as needed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-24 MU-25 4.5 DELETE 4.5.1 Function Used to delete a folder of the RU stored in the FTP server and also to delete it from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". When reinstallation is required in such a case where the machine is to be used with the IP address of the RU changed, use the “DELETE” command. 4.5.2 Procedures Refer to “Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU” for the details of deleting procedures in the Installation volume. {IN: Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU} 4.6 MUTL 4.6.1 Function Used to start the maintenance utility (MUTL) of the RU service utility. MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of the reading start position and reading width, as well as board and mechanical checks. 4.6.2 Procedures 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [MUTL]. Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL commands and the detailed procedures. {MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-25 MU-26 4.7 PING 4.7.1 3. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. Function Used to execute the "PING" command for the RU. When you click on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears where you can check whether or not the network connection from the DX Console to the RU is normal. If the network connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on the “command prompt” window. 4.7.2 1. Procedures Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". REFERENCE "Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem. l [GOOD indication] If the following message appears, the result is normal. |Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10:| | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), | 2. Click on [PING]. l [NO GOOD indication] Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected). u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} → The “command prompt” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-26 MU-27 4.8 MON 4.8.1 Function Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes its status. The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE. The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed, although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors. l Status Displays one of statuses, OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ depending on the change of the I/O conditions. l I/O name The I/O name is displayed. Symbol Name SA1 Cassette IN sensor SA2 Cassette hold sensor SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor SA4 IP dropping sensor SA6 Suction arm HP sensor SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor SA11 Cassette ejection sensor SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor SA16 Inch/metric sensor SC1 Turn roller grip/dust removal HP sensor SC3 IP sensor 1 SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor SG1 IP sensor 2 SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor SZ2 Grip release HP sensor BCRC1 Barcode reader * The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed. l Other information Displays the barcode information when the barcode is read. l Status changed time Displays the time when the I/O status changes. REFERENCE The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse. The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted. If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-27 MU-28 4.8.2 Procedures 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [MON]. 3. Click on [START]. → When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O has changed. l Checking the sensor operation by reading an image I. → The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears. Exit from the “Under maintenance” window of the RU. II. {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} Register the exposure menu or the like on the DX Console, and insert the cassette. → The sensor status (open/close) is displayed on the “REAL TIME MONITOR” window. l Checking the sensor operation by means of the MUTL mechanical check command I. Start the MUTL. II. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Click the item to be checked by the mechanical check. → The sensor status (open/close) is displayed on the “REAL TIME MONITOR” window. REFERENCES - When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged. - When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed. - To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window, and then open the monitor window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-28 MU-29 4.9 FTP 4.9.1 3. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK]. Function Used to check the network for the RU selected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and to check the operation of the FTP server for the DX Console. Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the FTP server of the DX Console are normal. If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows. 4.9.2 1. Procedures Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". u NOTE u 2. In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} Click on [FTP]. 4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on . → Two windows appear. u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-29 MU-30 4.10 INSTALL CAUTION Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power, the RU fails to start up because the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted. 4.10.1 Function Used to install the RU software into the RU entered in the "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" fields. Upon installation, an RU folder is created in the FTP server. l Recognizing the device type to be installed The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board of the RU to identify the type. u NOTE u If the CPU63A board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct. If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software will be installed, and the RU will not start up. Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU63A board. {MC:4.3.3_Replacing the CPU Board} l Selection of “SCREEN TYPE” Select whether the display on the operation panel of the RU is for use in a hospital or use in a clinic. l Selection as to whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used. Select whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used in the RU to be installed. l Setting of configuration information Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for the details of setting the configuration information. {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} l Registration of the master CL Refer to “4.14 EDIT CL NAME” for the details of registration of the master CL. {MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME} 4.10.2 Procedures Refer to the Installation volume for the details of the installing procedures. {IN: Appendix 7._Installing the RU Software} 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window If the RU software is re-installed in the RU where the software has been already installed, the following error message appears. l Selection of software version A list of installable versions of the software stored in the RU-APL CD-ROM is displayed. l Selection of software display language A list of languages to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU is displayed. l Selection of "BRAND TYPE" Select "BRAND TYPE" to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU when the machine starts up. Since “BRAND TYPE” differs depending upon its destination, "BRAND TYPE" suitable for the destination need be selected when installing the software. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-30 MU-31 4.11 VERSION UP CAUTION Never turn OFF the RU power during version update. The contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. 4.11.1 4.11.2 Procedures Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version” for details of the procedures for version updates. {MC:4.3.5_Updating the RU Software Version} Function Used to execute RU software version updates. l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize the device type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board of the RU to identify the device type. u NOTE u If the CPU63A board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct. If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in the RU unable to boot up. Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU63A board. {MC:4.3.3_Replacing the CPU Board} l Selection of software version A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the CD-ROM is displayed. REFERENCE The "VERSION" indication of the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” may appear in red. This indicates that the RU software has not been updated in version. Update the software version as needed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-31 MU-32 4.12 EDIT HISTORY 4.12.1 Function Used to view the HISTORY information (including the number of IP’s processed by the RU, lighting time of the erasure lamp, etc.,) of the RU, and clear the information when a unit has been replaced or other occasions. The following five kinds of information can be displayed and edited. l USE 4.12.2 Procedures 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. Displays the date when the RU software is installed or updated in version. Also displays the total time count when the RU power has been ON. {MU:4.12.3_Details of USE} l IP Displays the number of IP7s processed by the RU for each IP size and the count of each part driven. Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure are all subject to counting. {MU:4.12.4_Details of IP} l BARCODE Displays the count that each IP with different barcode is processed. {MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE} l LASER Displays lighting time and lighting count for the laser of the scanner unit. Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to counting. {MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER} l LAMP Displays the lighting time and the lighting count of the erasure lamp. Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to counting. Lighting time and lighting count for preheating are also subject to counting. {MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 REFERENCE Clicking on [EDIT HISTORY], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-32 MU-33 3. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. 4.12.3 Details of USE Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on the screen. {MU:4.12.3_Details of USE} {MU:4.12.4_Details of IP} {MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE} {MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER} {MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP} 4. Click on [SET]. u NOTE u The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device information you can check by the user utility of the RU. To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON. Item name 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Function I INSTALLATION DATE Displays the date when the RU software is installed or updated in version. A specific date can be entered manually. II TOTAL POWER ON TIME A total count of a period of time when the RU power is turned ON is displayed. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-33 MU-34 4.12.4 Details of IP Item name Function RESET Resets each item in “IP”. II SINCE Displays the date when the RU software is installed. By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically entered. A specific date can be entered manually. III TOTAL READING COUNTER Counts the total count that normal reading takes place per IP size, and displays the total in “ALL IP SIZES”. IV TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER ALL IP SIZES Displays the total count that normal reading, secondary erasure and erasure take place. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. PARTS PROCESSING COUNTER Displays the respective total numbers that the air filter, the erasure lamp, the brush roller, the IP suction pump, and the damper are used. Specific numerical values can be entered manually. I V u NOTE u The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device information you can check by the user utility of the RU. To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-34 MU-35 4.12.5 Details of BARCODE Item name Function I BARCODE NUMBER Displays the barcode number of the IP read by the RU. II READING COUNTE Displays the total count of IP conveyance for each barcode. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-35 MU-36 4.12.6 Details of LASER Item name Function RESET Resets each item of “LASER”. II SINCE Displays the date when the RU software is installed. By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically entered. A specific date can be entered manually. III TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER ON Displays the total laser lighting time. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. IV TOTAL COUNT FOR THE LASER ON Displays the total laser lighting count. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. I u NOTE u The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device information you can check by the user utility of the RU. To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-36 MU-37 4.12.7 Details of LAMP ・ THE ERASURE LIGHTING Item name Function I RESET Resets each item of “LAMP”. II SINCE Displays the date when the RU software is installed. By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically entered. A specific date can be entered manually. III TOTAL TIME FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING Displays the total erasure lamp lighting time. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. IV TOTAL COUNT FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING Displays the total erasure lamp lighting count. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. ・ THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING Item name Function RESET Resets each item. II SINCE Displays the date when the RU software is installed. By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically entered. A specific date can be entered manually. III TOTAL COUNT FOR THE IP ERASING Displays the total erasure IP count. A specific numerical value can be entered manually. I u NOTE u The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device information you can check by the user utility of the RU. To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-37 MU-38 4.13 4.13.1 EDIT CONFIGURATION Function Used to edit the configuration information for the RU. However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION. The set information is written into the flash ROM of the RU. CAUTION 4.13.2 Procedures 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION]. The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated. Never turn OFF the RU power for the while. If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. REFERENCE Clicking on [EDIT CONFIGURATION], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-38 MU-39 3. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items. Item name 1 EQUIPMENT CODE (A-Z) 2 RANGE OF ERASE MODE 3 ERASE MODE TIME OUT (0-999[s]) 4 Confirmation Alarm when cassette is set 5 IMAGE READING MODE Function Sets the identification code (1-digit alphanumeric character) with which the user identifies the RU which has read the image when a plurality of RU’s are used. The identification code is printed on the output film. Sets the erasure mode which can be selected by the “Mode change” button of the RU. The setting is effective only when “HOSPITAL” was selected in setting “SCREEN TYPE” at the time of installation. - ERASE 1, ERASE 2 (default): Can select secondary erasure or primary erasure. - ERASE 1: Can select only primary erasure. Sets the period of time since “primary erasure” or “secondary erasure” is selected by the “Mode change” button of the RU until “Image reading” is automatically restored in the unit of second. When “0” is set, the mode is kept changed to “primary erasure” or “secondary erasure”. Determines whether the alarm sounds when a cassette is set. - ON (default) : Alarm sounds. - OFF : Alarm does not sound. Select the IP reading speed mode. - FR :Read the large size IP image in the high-speed mode. - SR (Default) :Read all the IP images in the standard-speed mode. * Only valid for 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size and 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) size * Only valid for FCRView (CR-VW 674) * If connect to the console other than FCRView (CR-VW 674), settings on the console is necessary. ●Setup items of the console l Setup items of the console If connect to the console other than FCRView (CR-VW 674), set the IP image reading mode of each Exposure Menu under the User Utility at the console. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 1. 2. Start the User Utility and click "Menu Setting". 3. 4. 5. 6. Select "Exposure Parameter 3", and then select "Image reading mode". Select the Exposure Menu which you want to change the IP image reading mode, and click "Edit". Click "OK". Repeat step 2 to 4 if needed. Click "OK" and close the User Utility. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-39 MU-40 Item name 6 IP Size Code Setting 7 DISPLAY PATIENT&MENU NAME 8 9 10 DISPLAY CL NAME UTILITY MENU WARNING OF LD LIFE 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Function Selects the kind of IP (inch or metric) to be used in the machine. - INCH (default): Select when inch IP’s are to be used. - METRIC: Select when metric IP’s are to be used. * Need not be set for this machine. Determines whether or not the patient’s name registered in the DX Console is to be displayed on the operation panel. This is effective only when “CLINIC” is selected in “SCREEN TYPE” setting for installation. - ON : The patient’s name is displayed. - OFF (default) : The patient’s name is not displayed. Determines whether or not the name of the DX Console is displayed, which is the destination of transfer of the read image during image reading. This is effective only when “HOSTPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN TYPE” setting for installation. - OFF (default): The DX Console name of the image destination is not displayed. - ON: The DX Console name of the image destination is displayed. Determines the menu (user utility) items to be displayed when the “Utility” button on the operation panel is pressed. - FULL: Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “HOSPITAL”. Displays the entire menu of the user utility. - SCANER CLEANING: Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC”. Displays scanner cleaning only. : Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC” at the time of installation. Displays scanner cleaning only. Do not set this when only the configuration setting is to be changed. Item name Function Determines whether the warning on the erasure lamp life is to be only written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed in the error message. - LOG ONLY (default): Only write into the error log - LOG & MESSAGE: Write into the error log and display of the error message. 11 WARNING OF LAMP LIFE 12 Determines whether the warning on the part life is to be only written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed in the error message. WARNING OF PARTS - LOG ONLY (default): LIFE Only write into the error log - LOG & MESSAGE: Write into the error log and display of the error message. 13 WARNING OF S VALUE 14 Regular error display 15 THE TIMING FOR ACTIVATION "QUIT STUDY" BUTTON(1:1) Determines whether the warning on the S value is to be only written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed in the error message. - LOG ONLY (default): Only write into the error log - LOG & MESSAGE: Write into the error log and display of the error message. Determines whether or not the error is to be regularly displayed on the display. - ON (default) : The error is regularly displayed. - OFF : The error is not regularly displayed. Set the timing when you can press the QUIT STUDY button on the console after reading the image. - IMAGE TRANSFER END: You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the read image data is transferred to the console. - UNLOCK CASSETTE: You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the cassette hold is released. Determines whether the warning on the laser life is to be only written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed in the error message. - LOG ONLY (default): Only write into the error log - LOG & MESSAGE: Write into the error log and display of the error message. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-40 MU-41 Item name 16 17 18 CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP CLEANING CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP CLEANING[COUNT] (OPTIONAL) CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP CLEANING[DAYS] (OPTIONAL) Function Sets the timing when the erasure lamp cleaning message is displayed. - OFF (default): The message is not displayed. - 6000 or 365 days: The message is displayed when the total count of IP conveyance of 6000 is reached or 365 days elapses. - 3000 or 182 days: The message is displayed when the total count of IP conveyance of 3000 is reached or 182 days elapses. - 12000 or 730 days: The message is displayed when the total count of IP conveyance of 12000 is reached or 730 days elapses. - OPTIONAL: The message is displayed when an optional total count of IP conveyance or an optional number of days is reached. The count and the number of days are set by the commands of Nos. 11 and 12. Sets the total count of IP conveyance when “OPTIONAL” is selected in the command No.15. The default is 6000. Sets the number of days when “OPTIONAL” is selected in the command No.15. The default is 365 days. Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when the [Eraser button] and the [Stand-by switch] are pressed. - ON (default) : An alarm sounds. - OFF : No alarm sounds. Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when an error occurs. - ON (default) : An alarm sounds. - OFF : No alarm sounds. Determines whether or not the sleep mode is to be used. - ON : The sleep mode is used. - OFF (default) : The sleep mode is not used. Sets the time for transiting to the sleep mode. The default is 60 minutes. 19 Key Touch Sound 20 Alarm Sound 21 Sleep Mode Change 22 Sleep Mode Change Time([min]) 23 WAKE ON LAN PORT Sets the port No. to be used for Wake On LAN. The default is 6001. NO 24 SENS ADJ OF HR CONVERTED AUTOMATICALLY 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 4. Click on [SET]. CAUTION Do not take the procedures 8 and 9 during the installation of the RU software. If the RU power is turned OFF and then ON before the installation of the RU software is completed, the software cannot be installed normally. 5. Turn OFF the power of the RU. REFERENCE Although “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, the RU functions are not affected even if the RU power is turned OFF. 6. Turn ON the power of the RU. Determines whether or not to perform IP type HR Sensitivity Correction automatically. - AUTO CONV OFF :Not to perform Sensitivity Correction automatically. - AUTO CONV ON : Perform Sensitivity Correction automatically. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-41 MU-42 4.14 4.14.1 EDIT CL NAME l Procedures for editing/adding the DX Console as image transfer destination 1. Function Select from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" an RU where the DX Console as the image transfer destinations is to be edited or added, and click on [EDIT CL NAME]. Used to edit/add the DX Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master CL's. 4.14.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination l Overview Edit and/or add the DX Console as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's may be registered as image transfer destinations. → “CL NAME” window appears. 2. To edit, select the DX Console to be edited, and then click on [MODIFY]; to add, click on [NEW]. l To edit: l To add: → The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-42 MU-43 3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. u NOTE u Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's l Overview Edit the list of master CL's. Of the DX Console registered as image transfer destinations, the DX Console registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four DX Console may be registered in the "MASTER CL" field. When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the DX Console registered is displayed on the LCD screen of RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-43 MU-44 l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's 1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master CL's is to be edited, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button. → “CL NAME” window appears. 2. 4.14.4 Select a DX Console to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's. Switching the Master CL Switch the master CL. u NOTE u Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY LOG", will be lost. For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" of the Installation volume. {IN: Appendix 4._Setting the Master CL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-44 MU-45 4.15 4.15.1 BACKUP Function 4.15.2 Procedures You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the DX Console are selectable. Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of the RU to a recording medium such as an FD. You can back up the following data. l "ERROR LOG" Log data is backed up. l "CONFIGURATION" Configuration data is backed up. l "TRACE LOGS" Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up. l "HISTORY LOG" History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up. l "LOG ALL" All of “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” are backed up at a time. l "SCN ALL DATA" All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are backed up at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-45 MU-46 4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable Causes If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with the RU, the following error message appears. In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-46 MU-47 4.16 4.16.1 RESTORE Function 4.16.2 Procedures You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the DX Console are selectable. Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a recording medium such as an FD to the flash ROM of the RU. The items to be restored include: l "CONFIGURATION" Configuration data is restored. l "HISTORY LOG" History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored. l "SCN ALL DATA" All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are restored at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Light collecting system data among the scanner data is restored. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Of the scanner data, optical data is restored. REFERENCE The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-47 MU-48 4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable Causes If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with the RU, the following error message appears. In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-48 MU-49 4.17 4.17.1 I/O TRACE EXPERT Function The I/O trace data is displayed in a timing chart. You can check operations including the reading of cassettes, erasure, conveyance check in the RU PC-TOOL MUTL and mechanical checks. Note that only the I/O trace data can be displayed. Item name Function 1 "FILE OPEN" button The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is displayed on the Timing Chart screen. 2 "Pass" text box The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing chart is entered. 3 "Scale" button The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed. 4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed. Chart display area The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar available, the display range may be moved by manipulating the scroll bar. 5 By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B fields. 6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area - A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the left mouse button. : - B Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the right mouse button. - A-B: Time difference between positions A and B. When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-49 MU-50 4.17.2 1. Procedures Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". {MU:4.15_BACKUP} REFERENCE Backing up “LOG ALL” creates the IOT folder in the specified destination and the following folder in the DX Console, and the IOT.LOG file is stored in the folder. C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP address\LOG\IOT The IOT.LOG file stored in “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP address\LOG\IOT” is specified by the default. 2. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-50 MU-51 4.18 4.18.1 ERROR DB Function Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information or analysis flows may be viewed. Item name 1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected. 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed. 3 “WARNING” button Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are displayed. 4 “BOTH” button Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are displayed. 5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared. 6 “UPDATE” button The latest error log data is copied from the CPU63A board of the RU to the FTP server of the DX Console. 7 Error message list box The contents of the error log file selected are displayed. 8 “Error Code” text box The error code selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 9 “Error Name” text box The error name selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 10 “Meaning” text box The occurrence condition of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 11 “Details Info.” Button The detail information selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. “Analysis Flow” button The analysis flow for the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 13 “Memo.” text box A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted) in the error message list box. Up to seven memos may be entered. 14 “Author” text box The name of the person (author) who entered text in the “Memo.” text box is entered. “SAVE” button The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved. To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key and press the [SAVE] button again. 12 REFERENCE Clicking on [UPDATE], the error message list box is updated to the latest one. 15 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Function CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-51 MU-52 4.18.2 Procedures The procedures of displaying the latest error log are described as an example. 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [ERROR DB]. → The “ERROR DB” window appears. 3. Click on [UPDATE]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-52 MU-53 4.19 4.19.1 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [PING]. Function The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into the DX Console are collectively uninstalled. Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP server and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". In addition, the contents of “C:/ProgramFiles/FujiFIlm/FCR” directory on the DX Console are deleted. u NOTE u If a plurality of RU’s of the same device type exist, the software and configuration data for the RU of the same type are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL. Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed. 4.19.2 → Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the “command prompt” window. Procedures CAUTIONS - Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings) of the RU, DX Console, and FTP server. Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost. - For the RU connected to the DX Console, back up the following files. Those files must be restored after installation. - CONFIGURATION - HISTORY LOG - SCN ALL DATA If a plurality of the RU’s of the same device type exit, it is necessary to identify which file belongs to which RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 {MU:4.7_PING} 3. 4. 5. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU’s to be uninstalled. Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled. - CONFIGURATION - HISTORY LOG - SCN ALL DATA {MU:4.15_BACKUP} Click on [UNINSTALL]. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-53 MU-54 6. Select the device type to be uninstalled, and Click on [OK]. → Uninstall is performed. 7. Click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-54 MU-55 4.20 4.20.1 VERSION UP: ALL RUs Function The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into the DX Console are collectively updated in version. CAUTION 4.20.2 Procedures REFERENCE When a plurality of RU's are to be updated inversion, update the connected RU’s one by one in the sequence they are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". If two RU’s are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in the sequence of ru2 and ru1, they are updated in this order. 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 2. Click on [PING]. Never turn OFF the DX Console/RU power during the version updating. The contents of the flash ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. u NOTE u When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, sequentially update the RU software in the connected RU’s. It takes about eight minutes to update one RU. Do not turn OFF the DX Console and RU power until the installation is completed for all the RU's. After the installation, be sure to check the software version of all of the RU's, and check to make sure that they have been updated in version. → Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the displayed command prompt window. {MU:4.7_PING} 3. 4. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU's connected to the DX Console. Click on [VERSION UP]. → A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the CD-ROM. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-55 MU-56 5. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console, and click on [OK]. 6. Select "RU VERSION". 7. 9. When a linac cassette is to be used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT USE” if the linac cassette is not to be used. Then click on [SET]. 10. Click on [OK]. Select “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK]. → The RU PC-TOOL window appears again. 11. Check to make sure that the version update has been normally completed. → The window to verify the execution of a version update appears. 8. Click on [OK]. → Version-update of the RU software starts. The LED of one RU lights up. In approx. eight minutes, the update of the first RU is completed, and the update of a second RU is started. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-56 MU-57 4.21 4.21.1 CDPath Function 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied. l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the procedure 5. The RU software should normally be installed from the RU-APL CD-ROM. If a folder that completely copies the RU-APL CD-ROM data resides in the hard disk of the DX Console, you may install the RU software from that hard disk without using the RU-APL CD-ROM by specifying the path of that folder. u NOTES u - To copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data, its whole data should be completely copied to a single folder. If it is partially copied, the installation cannot be executed. - "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, installation from the RU-APL CD-ROM cannot be executed. 4.21.2 l To enter the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and proceed to the next procedure. Procedures for Setting "CDPath" The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the Copy CD-R of the C drive are described as an example. 1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The window for selecting the folder appears. 3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied. → The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-57 MU-58 4. Click on [OK]. 4.21.3 1. → The path is displayed in the text box. 5. Click on [SET]. Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears. 2. Click on [CLEAR]. → “CDPath” is set. → The path in the text box is cleared. 3. Click on [SET]. → The "CDPath" setting is canceled. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-58 MU-59 4.22 Initialize APL 4.22.1 7. Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu. Function Effects RU application initialization. u NOTE u Effect RU application initialization only when no error code appears and the machine does not boot up during troubleshooting. XL2A4401.ai 8. 9. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console and click on [OK]. Verify that the RU's IP address, which was selected in the procedure (6), is displayed, and then click on [OK]. → Initialization starts. 4.22.2 1. 2. Procedures 10. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key. Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable. Change the DIP switch (S7) settings on the CPU board. l When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are not known: #1 Change the IP address of the Console to 172.16.1.20. Write down the IP address if a site-specific value is used. #2 Set the DIP switch-No.7 to ON. REFERENCE When the machine is started with the DIP switch (S7)-No.7 set to ON, the IP address of the RU is set to the default (172.16.1.10) only when initialized. The IP address of the Console need be changed to 172.16.x.x accordingly. l When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are known: #1 Set the DIP switch-No. 8 to ON. 3. 4. Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. The RU starts under the following conditions: Start the RU PC-TOOL. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". Turn OFF the power of the RU. Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable. Restore the original setting for DIP switch on the CPU board. Restore the machine. Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU. Turn ON the power of the RU. The RU starts under the following conditions: - All LEDs light up. - Initialization does not take place. Turn ON the power of the RU. - All LEDs light up. - Initialization does not take place. 5. 6. FRRB401020.ai 17. 18. Start the RU PC-TOOL. Delete the initialized RU. {MU:4.5_DELETE} 19. Install the RU software. {MU:4.10_INSTALL} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-59 MU-60 4.23 4.23.1 1. 2. 3. Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL Starting RU PC-TOOL 4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL 1. Click on 2. Turn OFF the power of the RU. in the upper right corner of the main window of RU PC-TOOL. Power ON the RU and DX Console. Press the [Window] key on the keyboard, and open the Start menu of Windows. Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\ RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-60 MU-61 5. Client PC 5.1 l Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU Even when the DX Console is not running, it is possible to execute command by specifying the RU's IP address. Executable commands are MUTL, PING, and MON. Features and Operations of the Client PC The client PC is a notebook PC on which CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. When CLIENT PCTOOL is installed on a notebook PC from the RU-APL CD-ROM, the notebook PC can be used as the client PC. 5.1.1 Features of the Client PC The use of CLIENT PC-TOOL, which is installed on the client PC, makes it possible to execute commands as needed for RU maintenance even while the DX Console is used. Note, however, the commands executable from RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console differ from those executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC. Commands executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL can be classified into the following three categories: - Commands for editing data stored in the client PC - Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU - Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the DX Console CAUTION l Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the DX Console Commands can be executed for an RU that is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PCTOOL, which is installed on the client PC. This command execution is performed via the DX Console (FTP server). When executing a command for allowing CLIENT PC-TOOL to access the RU's flash ROM, it is necessary to observe precautions as is the case with the use of RU PCTOOL. For details on the precautions, see "5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC." {MU:5.1.3_Precautions for Using the Client PC} l Commands for editing data stored in the client PC Data stored in the client PC can be edited and saved even when the client PC is not connected to the network in the user's site. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-61 MU-62 5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC l Client PC operation immediately after installation When you install and start CLIENT PC-TOOL, the following window opens. The following commands can be executed immediately after installation: - Commands selectable from the Configuration (C) menu - Commands executable for a machine having an address that is entered in the IP address field (MUTL, PING, and MON) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 l Client PC operation after hospital list creation When an RU is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-TOOL, all commands of CLIENT PC-TOOL can be executed. However, executable commands vary depending on whether the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode or OFF-LINE mode. For the difference between the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes and the details on commands executable in the respective modes, see 5.6 "ON-LINE and OFF-LINE." {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-62 MU-63 5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC As is the case with RU PC-TOOL, CLIENT PC-TOOL has commands for accessing the RU's flash ROM. When executing the commands for accessing the flash ROM, observe the following precautions: - When executing a command for accessing the RU's flash ROM, never turn OFF the RU or client PC power. If you turn OFF the power, the contents of the flash ROM become damaged so that the RU does not start up. - While the DX Console and RU are used, do not execute a command that allows the client PC to access the flash ROM. 5.1.4 5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the DX Console When the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be used in the ON-LINE mode, always check to make sure that the “Windows Firewall” of the DX Console is set as follows. If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available. l “Exceptions” tab setting Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL, creating the hospital list, and executing the version update command. Before using a PC without a CD-ROM as the client PC, it is necessary to copy the contents of the RU-APL CD-ROM to a certain place within the client PC. When the CD path is set up after CLIENT PC-TOOL installation, it is possible to create the hospital list and execute the version update command even when the RU-APL CD-ROM is not on hand. l Network connection setting in “Detail setting” tab Refer to “5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC” for the detailed procedures of checking the respective settings. {MU:5.10_Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-63 MU-64 5.2 Setting Up the Client PC This section describes the procedure for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on the notebook PC with the RU-APL CD-ROM so that the notebook PC can be used as the client PC. n Items required for preparing the client PC - Notebook PC for use as the client PC n Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL Use either of the following two CLIENT PC-TOOL installation procedures: l Installing from the RU-APL CD-ROM - RU-APL CD-ROM Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically opens. Start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL by clicking "INSTALL" in the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RUAPL CD-ROM." {MU:5.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM} l Installing on a PC without a CD-ROM drive Install CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a flash memory or other recording medium. For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive." {MU:5.2.2_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-64 MU-65 5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM 4. Click on [NEXT]. 5. Click on [INSTALL]. 6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. When the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens, install CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the notebook PC. → The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. 2. 3. Click on [INSTALL]. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET]. u NOTE u Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], reinstall according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation”. {MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation} → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-65 MU-66 5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive 3. u NOTE u With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash memory or other recording medium. Copy the entire copied data to a folder on the client PC. Start "Set Up PC-TOOL" by double-clicking the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data. When the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens, start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD-ROM data to the folder created in step 2. Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL. With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash memory or other recording medium. u NOTE u Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM. 2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R" on drive C). 4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-66 MU-67 5. Click on [INSTALL]. 6. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET]. 8. Click on [INSTALL]. 9. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation. u NOTE u Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], reinstall according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation”. {MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation} → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. 7. Click on [NEXT]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-67 MU-68 5.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL This section describes the procedures for starting CLIENT PC-TOOL. Two different procedures are used to Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. l Starting from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically opens. Start CLIENT PC-TOOL from the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. For details on the procedure, see "6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)." {MU:6.28.1_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)} l Starting from a client PC window From a client PC window, start CLIENT PC-TOOL by specifying its file name. For details on the procedure, see "6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window." {MU:6.28.2_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-68 MU-69 5.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification 5. Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site and make the network settings of the client PC 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site. Make sure that the proxy server setting in “Internet Options” of the client PC is “OFF”. → The “Network Connection” window appears. 6. Double-click "Local area connection," display the “Local Area Connection Status” window, and click on [Property]. {MU:5.11_Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC} Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. → The “Local area connection property” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-69 MU-70 7. Choose "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click [Properties]. 8. Set the client PC IP address and then click [OK]. 10. Enter the address of the RU or DX Console connected to the network in the user's site, and then execute the "PING" command to verify that the client PC is connected to the network in the user's site. u NOTES u - Ask the network manager of the user’s site to check the available IP address before changing the IP address. If the IP address of another device is specified, the client PC cannot be connected with the network. - Set the subnet mask and the default gateway as the need arises, after the network setups of the site are confirmed. 9. Close the "Local Area Connection Properties" window, "Local Area Connection Status" window, and "Network Connection" window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-70 MU-71 5.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List Create the hospital list in “CLIENT PC-TOOL”. The hospital list includes names of sites, FTP servers used at the site, and the RU’s registered in a tree format. Upon registering a site, FTP server and RU in the hospital list, their folders are created in the C drive of the client PC. With “CLIENT PC-TOOL”, the maintenance can be performed only for the RU registered in the hospital list. 5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List Register an RU by executing the "NEW RU" command from "HOSPITAL" in the hospital list. For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU." {MU:6.4_NEW RU} u NOTE u The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for preparing/editing the hospital list. Therefore, have the RU-APL CD-ROM on hand before you start performing the procedure. If you create or edit the hospital list with a PC without a CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a certain location within the client PC and set the CD path. Therefore, perform the procedure set forth under "6.23 CDPath" to set the CD path before creating or editing the hospital list. {MU:6.23_CDPath} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-71 MU-72 5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List This section describes the procedures for adding an RU to a prepared hospital list. To add an RU, use either of the following two procedures: - Using the "NEW RU" command - Using the "COPY" command l Using the "NEW RU" command Add an RU by performing the same procedure as for registering an RU in the hospital list. When an RU is to be added, a previously registered site name and FTP server IP address can be chosen from the pull-down menu. For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU." {MU:6.4_NEW RU} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 l Using the "COPY" command When the RU to be added has the same model number as an existing one, it can be added with the "COPY" command. This procedure does not entail the use of the RU-APL CD-ROM. u NOTE u Use the "COPY" command only when the RU to be added has the same model number as an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, it cannot be added with the "COPY" command. For details on the use of the "COPY" command, see "6.6 COPY." {MU:6.6_COPY} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-72 MU-73 5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry If an RU, FTP server, site, or tree is erroneously registered in the hospital list, it can be deleted with the "DELETE" command. The tree information to be deleted varies with the hospital list selection position. l Deleting an FTP server Select the FTP server to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the "DELETE" command. → The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted. l Deleting an RU only Select the name of the RU to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the "DELETE" command. → Only the RU is then deleted. l Deleting a site Select the name of the site to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the "DELETE" command. → The name of the site and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site are then deleted. For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE." {MU:6.5_DELETE} For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE." {MU:6.5_DELETE} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-73 MU-74 l Deleting all hospital list entries Choose "HOSPITAL" and then execute the "DELETE" command. → The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted. 5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications If it is found during hospital list creation/editing that the RU name or RU IP address to be entered is already registered, the following error windows open. l If the RU name to be entered is already registered l If the IP address to be entered is already registered For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE." {MU:6.5_DELETE} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-74 MU-75 5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE 5.6.1 l OFF-LINE mode Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations By setting the IP address of the client PC, the PC can be connected with the network in the user’s site. The client PC has commands to be executed while connected with the network of the site (ON-LINE mode) and commands to be executed while separated from the network of the site (OFF-LINE mode). The available commands differ depending on the mode of the client PC, so that it is necessary to change over the mode of the client PC depending on the type of the maintenance. The client PC can be changed over between the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes through the use of the “Online” command of CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:6.26_OnLine} The following commands are available when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode. - Commands to register the RU where the maintenance will take place - Commands to edit the machine information of the RU acquired during the ON-LINE mode l ON-LINE mode When the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode, the following commands are available. - Commands to acquire/write machine information of the RU - Commands to access the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server - Command to directly operate the RU (MUTL) Refer to “5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6.3_Operation in OFF-LINE Mode} When a command to access the flash ROM of the RU is executed, “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU as in the case of the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console. Refer to “5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-75 MU-76 5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode REFERENCE The “ON-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when only the commands to access the RU or the FTP server from CLIENT PC-TOOL are available. To change over the client PC to the ON-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC-TOOL. Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.26_OnLine} During the ON-LINE mode, the commands to directly access the flash ROM of the RU or the FTP server, such as VERSION UP, UPLOAD of RU’s configuration information are executed. The following commands can be executed in the ON-LINE mode. Command Function Reference GET VERSION Acquires the software version of the RU stored in the FTP server, and displays it in the hospital list. {MU:6.8_GET VERSION} MUTL Starts up the MUTL of the RU service utility. {MU:6.9_MUTL} PING Executes PING for the RU or the FTP server. {MU:6.10_PING} MON Displays the change of I/O statues of the RU. {MU:6.11_MON} FTP Checks the network connection with the RU and the operation of the FTP server. {MU:6.12_FTP} VERSION UP Updates the version of the RU software. {MU:6.13_VERSION UP} UPLOAD Copies the maintenance information edited in the OFF-LINE mode to the RU and the FTP server. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} DOWNLOAD Copies the maintenance information of the RU stored in the flash ROM of the RU and in the FTP to the client PC. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} REFERENCES - The commands available during the ON-LINE mode include those for accessing only the flash ROM of the RU and those for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server. The commands for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server include: - GET VERSION - FTP - VERSION UP - UPLOAD - DOWNLOAD - When the following commands to change the contents of the flash ROM of the RU are executed, “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU. - MUTL - VERSION UP - UPLOAD Refer to “6.2.1 “Under Maintenance” indication on the operation panel” for the details of the “Under Maintenance” indication. {MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-76 MU-77 5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode REFERENCE The “OFF-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when the commands to access the RU or the FTP server from the CLIENT PC-TOOL are not available. To change over the client PC to the OFF-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PCTOOL. Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:6.26_OnLine} The following commands can be executed in the OFF-LINE mode. Command Function Reference NEW RU Registers an RU in the hospital list. {MU:6.4_NEW RU} DELETE Deletes an RU registered in the hospital list. {MU:6.5_DELETE} COPY Duplicates an RU registered in the hospital list. {MU:6.6_COPY} During the OFF-LINE mode, you can edit the configuration information, history information or the like registered the hospital list. RENAME Changes the name of an RU registered in the hospital list. {MU:6.7_RENAME} u NOTE u EDIT HISTORY The data you can edit in the OFF-LINE mode is limited to the information stored in the client PC. To effect the contents edited in the client PC in the RU machine, the data need be uploaded after the client PC is changed over to the ON-LINE mode. Refer to “5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE mode” for the details of the operation in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode} Edits the history information of the RU stored in the client PC. {MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY} Edits the configuration EDIT COFIGURATION information of the RU stored in the client PC. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 {MU:6.15_EDIT COFIGURATION} EDIT CL NAME Edits the list of the master CL’s of the image transfer destination stored in the client PC. {MU:6.16_EDIT CL NAME} I/O TRACE EXPERT Displays trace data of RU I/O in the form of a timing chart. {MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT} ERROR DB Displays error log data of an RU. {MU:6.18_ERROR DB} READ Reads the machine information from a recording medium such as an FD to the client PC. {MU:6.19_READ} WRITE Writes the machine information from the client PC into a recording medium such as an FD. {MU:6.20_WRITE} Export Copies the information in the hospital list from the client PC to a recording medium. {MU:6.24_Export} Import Copies the information in the hospital list from a recording medium to the client PC. {MU:6.25_Import} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-77 MU-78 5.7 Data Flow of Each Command Features of the commands of UPLOAD & DOWNLOAD, READ & WRITE, and Import & Export and the data flow are described below. 5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD 5.7.2 READ and WRITE Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode. READ: Writes the machine information resident in the client PC into an external recording medium. WRITE: Writes the machine information stored in an external recording medium into the client PC. Available only when the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode. DOWNLOAD: Acquires the machine information from the flash ROM of the RU. UPLOAD: Writes the machine information edited by the client PC into the flash ROM of the RU. “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU during the write. Refer to “6.19 READ” and “6.20 WRITE” for the details of the commands “READ” and “WRITE”. {MU:6.19_READ} {MU:6.20_WRITE} 5.7.3 Refer to “6.21 UPLOAD” and “6.22 DOWNLOAD” for the details of the commands [UPLOAD] and [DOWNLOAD]. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} Import and Export Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode. Import: Reads hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored in an external recording medium into the CLIENT PC-TOOL. Export: Writes hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored in the CLIENT PC-TOOL into an external recording medium. Refer to “6.25 Import” and “6.24 Export” for the details of the commands “Import” and “Export”. {MU:6.25_Import} {MU:6.24_Export} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-78 MU-79 5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation If “For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed, follow the procedures below to reinstall the CLIENT PC-TOOL. 5.8.1 Solution-1 The procedures for discontinuing the installation and re-installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL are described. 1. If you select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], click on [Cancel] in the subsequently displayed window. 2. Click on [Yes] to confirm the cancellation of the installation. 3. Click on [Finish]. 4. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”. Two ways are available as countermeasures to be taken when a mistake is made during the installation of the CLIENT PC-TOOL. l Discontinue the installation, and re-install “For FTP-Server” has been inadvertently selected when CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed. If the mistake in selection is noticed during the operation, you can discontinue the installation. Stop the installation, and then start to re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL. Refer to “5.8.1 Solution -1” for details. {MU:5.8.1_Solution -1} l Delete the RU PC-TOOL, and re-install “For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed. The RU PC-TOOL is installed if the installation is continued. Delete the RU PC-TOOL by the RU-APL CD-ROM, and re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL. Refer to “5.8.2 Solution-2” for details. {MU:5.8.2_Solution-2} {MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-79 MU-80 5.8.2 Solution-2 5. Click on [Remove]. 6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. 7. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”. The procedures for deleting the RU PC-TOOL by the RU-APL CD-ROM and then re-installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL are described. 1. 2. Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console. → The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. 3. 4. Click on [UNINSTALL]. Click on [NEXT]. {MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-80 MU-81 5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL This section describes the version update procedures for CLIENT PC-TOOL. To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, use either of the following procedures: l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically opens. From this window, uninstall CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform an install again to update CLIENT PC-TOOL. For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM." {MU:5.9.1_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM} 5.9.1 1. 2. Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console. → The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. 3. Click on [UNINSTALL]. 4. Click on [NEXT]. 5. Click on [Remove]. l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM drive Update CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a flash memory or other recording medium. For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive." {MU:5.9.2_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-81 MU-82 6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens. 7. Click on [INSTALL]. 8. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET]. 9. Click on [NEXT]. 10. Click on [INSTALL]. 11. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation. u NOTE u Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], reinstall according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation”. {MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation} → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-82 MU-83 5.9.2 1. Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive 3. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD-ROM data to the folder created in step 2. u NOTE u Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL. With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash memory or other recording medium. u NOTE u Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM. 2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R" on drive C). 4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-83 MU-84 5. Click on [UNINSTALL]. 8. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens. 6. 7. 9. Click on [INSTALL]. 10. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET]. Click on [NEXT]. Click on [Remove]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 u NOTE u Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], reinstall according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation”. {MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-84 MU-85 11. Click on [NEXT]. 12. Click on [INSTALL]. 13. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation. → You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-85 MU-86 5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC 5. Click on the [Advanced] tab. 6. Click on [Settings]. Be sure to check the settings in the “Windows Firewall” on the DX Console before using the CLIENT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode. If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available. 1. Click on in the Windows [Start] menu. → The "Control Panel "window appears. 2. Double-click on . → The "Windows Firewall" window appears. 3. Click on the [Exceptions] tab. → The “Advanced Settings” window appears. 4. 7. Check to make sure that check box of “FTP server” is marked with a check. 8. Close all of the windows. Check to make sure that check boxes of “ftp.exe” and “FTP_port” are marked with checks. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-86 MU-87 5.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC 4. Make sure that a check mark is not put in the check box for the “Proxy server” setting. If checked, cancel it. 5. Close the respective windows. If the proxy server setting is “ON” in the “Internet Options” of the notebook PC used as the client PC, commands cannot be correctly executed for the RU, resulting in errors. Be sure to set the “Proxy server” to “OFF” in the notebook PC used, before servicing. 1. Click from the Windows’ [Start] menu. → The “Control Panel” window opens. 2. Double-click . → The “Internet Properties” window opens. 3. Click the “Connections” tab, and click “LAN Settings” button. → The “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window opens. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-87 MU-88 6. CLIENT PC-TOOL 6.1.2 Tree Diagram CLIENT PC-TOOL 6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree HOSPITAL {MU:6.4_NEW RU} 6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:6.9_MUTL} {MU:6.10_PING} {MU:6.11_MON} {MU:6.12_FTP} {MU:6.5_DELETE} {MU:6.6_COPY} {MU:6.7_RENAME} {MU:6.8_GET VERSION} {MU:6.13_VERSION UP} {MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY} {MU:6.15_EDIT CONFIGURATION} {MU:6.16_EDIT CL NAME} {MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT} {MU:6.18_ERROR DB} {MU:6.19_READ} {MU:6.20_WRITE} {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} Configuration {MU:6.23_CDPath} {MU:6.24_Export} {MU:6.25_Import} {MU:6.26_OnLine} {MU:6.27_Network} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-88 MU-89 6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL The CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed into a notebook PC of a service engineer to serve as a maintenance tool for use of service engineers. It is used to update the RU software in version and check the connection between the DX Console and the RU on the client PC networked with the RU. 6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel n “Under Maintenance” Message When a command to change the contents of a flash ROM is executed from the CLIENT PCTOOL while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, and the message of “Can't process the cassette” appears at the center. While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette. “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under maintenance. The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM: - MUTL - VERSION UP - UPLOAD 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-89 MU-90 n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation panel. IP conveyance takes place. Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the center of the operation panel. 6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is running, the Error window as shown below appears on the client PC. The command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is not executed. The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include: The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM: - MUTL - VERSION UP - UPLOAD CAUTION Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot start. REFERENCE Blinking “Under Maintenance” indication on the top of the operation panel indicates that a command to change the flash ROM through the use of the CLIENT PC-TOOL has been executed. REFERENCE The RU is running in the following states: - The RU is being initialized. - The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process. - The User Utility is started by the RU. n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-90 MU-91 6.3 Hospital List 6.3.1 Function The hospital list contains the name of each site, the FTP server used there, and the RU’s registered in a tree form. When the site, FTP server and RU are registered in the hospital list, their respective folders are created in the C drive of the client PC. Refer to “6.4 NEW RU” for the details of procedures of registering in the hospital list. {MU:6.4_NEW RU} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-91 MU-92 6.4 NEW RU 6.4.1 4. Right-click "HOSPITAL". From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU]. 5. Enter a new site name in the "HOSPITAL NAME" field and then click [SET]. Function Used to register the name of a site, the FTP server used there and the RU in the hospital list in the tree form. Folders for storing the respective data are created in the C drive of the client PC according to the tree constructed in the hospital list. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List This section describes the procedure for registering an RU in the hospital list. The procedure set forth below can also be used for registering a new site name, FTP server, or RU. 1. 2. 3. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive, insert the RU-APL CDROM into the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive, verify that the CD path is set up. {MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CD Path" Setting} Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-92 MU-93 6. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at the site, and then click [SET]. u NOTE u 8. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”. 9. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK]. Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical characters are used, the input characters will be garbled. REFERENCE If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 7. In this instance, skip to step 8. 7. Click on [OK]. 10. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET]. u NOTE u If an error window opens, proceed as directed below: - When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the client PC. - When the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-93 MU-94 11. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. 6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site Name This section describes the procedure for registering a new FTP server and RU with a previously registered site name. 1. → The added contents are displayed in the hospital list. 2. 3. 4. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive, insert the RU-APL CDROM into the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive, verify that the CD path is set up. {MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CD Path" Setting} Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Right-click a site name. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU]. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-94 MU-95 5. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at the site, and then click [SET]. u NOTE u 7. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”. 8. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK]. 9. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET]. Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical characters are used, the input characters will be garbled. REFERENCE If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 6. In this instance, skip to step 7. 6. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u If an error window opens, proceed as directed below: - When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the client PC. - When the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-95 MU-96 10. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. 6.4.4 This section describes the procedure for registering a new RU with a previously registered FTP server. 1. 2. → The added contents are displayed in the hospital list. Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server 3. 4. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive, insert the RU-APL CDROM into the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive, verify that the CD path is set up. {MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CD Path" Setting} Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Right-click a FTP Server. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU]. REFERENCE If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 5. In this instance, skip to step 6. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-96 MU-97 5. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u If an error window opens, proceed as directed below: - When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the client PC. - When the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond. 6. 8. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET]. 9. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”. → The added contents are displayed in the hospital list. 7. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-97 MU-98 6.5 DELETE 6.5.1 Function Used to delete the site, FTP server or RU registered in the hospital list. The folders of the site, FTP server or the RU deleted from the tree are deleted from the C drive of the client PC. u NOTE u 6.5.2 1. 2. Deleting an RU Only Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 3. Right-click the RU to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE]. 4. Click on [OK]. This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} → The RU is then deleted. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-98 MU-99 6.5.3 1. 2. 3. 4. Deleting an FTP Server Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Right-click the FTP server to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE]. Click on [OK]. → The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6.5.4 1. 2. Deleting a Site Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 3. Right-click the site name to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE]. 4. Click on [OK]. → The site name and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site name are then deleted. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-99 MU-100 6.5.5 1. 2. 3. Deleting the Entire Tree Information 4. Click on [OK]. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Right-click "HOSPITAL." From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 → The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-100 MU-101 6.6 COPY 6.6.1 Function 3. Enter a new site name in the “HOSPITAL NAME” field, and click on [SET]. Or select an existing site name from the pull-down menu, and click on [SET]. l To input a new site name: Used to copy the RU registered in the hospital list. The folder of the selected RU is copied in the C drive of the client PC. u NOTES u - The "COPY" command works only when the RU to be added has the same model number as an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, use the "NEW RU" command. - This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 6.6.2 1. 2. l To select an existing site name: Procedures Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Select [COPY] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be copied in the hospital list. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-101 MU-102 4. Enter the IP address of the FTP server being used at the site in the “FTP-SERV. IP ADDR” field, and click on [SET]. Or select an existing site name from the pulldown menu, and click on [SET]. 5. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET]. 6. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. l To input the IP address of a new FTP server: l To select the IP address of an existing site name: → The copied RU is added to the hospital list. u NOTES u - If the existing site name is not selected in the procedure 2, the IP address of that FTP server is not displayed in the pull-down menu. If the existing site name has not been selected, make a new entry of the IP address of the FTP server. - Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte characters are used, the input characters will be garbled. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-102 MU-103 6.7 RENAME 6.7.1 3. Input the name of the RU to be changed, and click on [SET]. Function Used to change the name of the RU registered in the hospital list. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 6.7.2 1. → The RU name is changed. Procedures Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select [RENAME] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be renamed in the hospital list. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-103 MU-104 6.8 GET VERSION 6.8.1 Function Used to identify the version of the RU software of the RU registered in the hospital list by accessing the FTP server from the client PC while connected with the network in the site. The identified version of the RU software is displayed in the hospital list. 6.8.2 1. 2. Procedures Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Select [GET VERSION] from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the RU whose software version is to be identified in the hospital list. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} → The RU software version number then appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-104 MU-105 6.9 MUTL 6.9.1 3. Click on [MUTL]. Function Used to start up the MUTL of the RU service utility. The MUTL serves to diagnose and adjust the RU, such as board checks and mechanical checks. Although the same commands as those of the DX Console appear when the MUTL is started up from the client PC, some of them cannot be executed. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 6.9.2 1. 2. Procedures Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL commands and the detailed procedures. {MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions} Select the RU in the hospital list. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-105 MU-106 6.10 6.10.1 PING 4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. Function Executes the PING command for the RU or the FTP server selected in the hospital list. Clicking on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears, where you can check whether the network connection from the client PC to the RU or the FTP server is normal. When the network connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING command, the message of the result OK appears on the “command prompt” window. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 6.10.2 1. 2. Procedures Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Select the RU or FTP server in the hospital list. REFERENCE "Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem. l [GOOD indication] If the following message appears, the result is normal. | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10:| | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), | l [NO GOOD indication] Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected). u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} 3. Click on [PING]. → The “command prompt” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-106 MU-107 6.11 6.11.1 MON Function Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes its status. The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE. The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed, although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors. l Status Used to display either the OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ status. l Other information isplays the barcode information when the barcode is read. l Status changed time Displays the time when the I/O status changes. REFERENCE The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse. The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted. If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-107 MU-108 6.11.2 l I/O name The I/O name is displayed. Symbol Name SA1 Cassette IN sensor SA2 Cassette hold sensor SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor SA4 IP dropping sensor SA6 Suction arm HP sensor SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor SA11 Cassette ejection sensor SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor SA16 Inch/metric sensor SC1 Turn roller grip/dust removal HP sensor SC3 IP sensor 1 SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor SG1 IP sensor 2 SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor SZ2 Grip release HP sensor BCRC1 Barcode reader 1. 2. Procedures Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Select the RU in the hospital list. * The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-108 MU-109 3. Click on [MON]. → The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears. 4. Click on [START]. → When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O has changed. REFERENCES - When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged. - When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed. - To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window, and then open the monitor window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-109 MU-110 6.12 6.12.1 FTP Function Used to check the network with the RU selected in the hospital list, and verify that the FTP server in the DX Console is operating. Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the FTP server of the DX Console are normal. If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} u NOTE u 6.12.2 1. In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} Procedures Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list. 3. Click on [FTP]. 4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on . u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} → Two windows appear. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-110 MU-111 6.13 VERSION UP CAUTION Never turn OFF the RU or the client PC during version-update. Otherwise, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, resulting in the RU unable to boot up. 6.13.1 6.13.2 Procedures Refer to Checks, replacement and adjustment of parts, “13.2 Updating the Software from the Client PC”, for details of the version update from the client PC. {MC:13.2_Updating the Software from the Client PC} Function Used to execute RU software version updates. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. CLIENT PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board of the RU to identify the type. u NOTE u If the CPU63A board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct. If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in the RU unable to boot up. Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU63A board. {MC:4.3.3_Replacing the CPU Board} l Selection of software version A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the CD-ROM is displayed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-111 MU-112 6.14 EDIT HISTORY 6.14.1 Function Used to view the history information (such as the number of IP’s processed by the RU and lighting time of the erasure lamp) of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC. The information can be reset when units are replaced. The following five kinds of information are displayed and may be edited. - USE - IP - BARCODE - LASER - LAMP 6.14.2 Procedures u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list. u NOTES u - This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} - The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PCTOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-112 MU-113 3. 5. Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. Click on [SET]. u NOTE u 4. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on the screen. To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} {MU:4.12.3_Details of USE} {MU:4.12.4_Details of IP} {MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE} {MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER} {MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-113 MU-114 6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION 6.15.1 Function Used to set the configuration information for the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC. However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in the Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set. u NOTES u - This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 6.15.2 Procedures u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list. - The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-114 MU-115 3. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION]. 5. Click on [SET]. u NOTE u To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} 4. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items. REFERENCE Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURAIOTN” for the details of the CONFIGURATION items. {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-115 MU-116 6.16 EDIT CL NAME 6.16.1 Function Used to edit/add the DX Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master CL's. This command can be set only when “HOSPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN TYPE” setting at the time of installation or the update in version. 6.16.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination l Overview Edit and/or add the DX Console as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's may be registered as image transfer destinations. u NOTES u - This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} - The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PCTOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-116 MU-117 l Procedures for editing/adding the DX Console as image transfer destination u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. 2. 4. Click on [MODIFY] to edit, or [NEW] to add. l To edit: Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Select the RU in the hospital list. l To add: → The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” appears. 3. Click on [CL NAME]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 u NOTE u To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-117 MU-118 5. Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. u NOTE u Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's l Overview Edit the list of master CL's. Of the DX Console registered as image transfer destinations, the DX Console registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four DX Console may be registered in the "MASTER CL" field. When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the DX Console registered is displayed on the LCD screen of RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-118 MU-119 l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's 4. Select a DX Console to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's. u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. 2. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} Select the RU in the hospital list. u NOTE u 3. To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD} Click on [EDIT CL NAME]. 6.16.4 Switching the Master CL Switch the master CL. u NOTE u Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY LOG", will be lost. For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" of the Installation volume. {IN: Appendix 4._Setting the Master CL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-119 MU-120 6.17 6.17.1 I/O TRACE EXPERT Function Used to view the I/O trace data of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC in the form of a timing chart. Note that, however, only the I/O trace data can be displayed. Item name Function 1 "FILE OPEN" button The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is displayed on the Timing Chart screen. 2 "Pass" text box The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing chart is entered. 3 "Scale" button The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed. 4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed. Chart display area The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar available, the display range may be moved by manipulating the scroll bar. 5 By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B fields. 6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area - A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the left mouse button. : -B Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the right mouse button. - A-B: Time difference between positions A and B. When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared. u NOTES u - This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the procedures. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} - The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-120 MU-121 6.17.2 Procedures 3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT]. u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-121 MU-122 6.18 6.18.1 ERROR DB Function Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of the RU, stored in the C drive of the client PC. You can append notes to error messages, or view the detailed information or analysis flows. Item name 1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected. 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed. 3 “WARNING” button Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are displayed. 4 “BOTH” button Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are displayed. 5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared. 6 “UPDATE” button The latest error log data is copied from the CPU63A board of the RU to the FTP server of the DX Console. 7 Error message list box The contents of the error log file selected are displayed. 8 “Error Code” text box The error code selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 9 “Error Name” text box The error name selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 10 “Meaning” text box The occurrence condition of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 11 “Details Info.” Button The detail information selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. “Analysis Flow” button The analysis flow for the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed. 13 “Memo.” text box A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted) in the error message list box. Up to seven memos may be entered. 14 “Author” text box The name of the person (author) who entered text in the “Memo.” text box is entered. “SAVE” button The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved. To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key and press the [SAVE] button again. 12 u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 15 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Function CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-122 MU-123 6.18.2 Procedures 3. Click on [ERROR DB]. u NOTE u The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information. {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD} 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-123 MU-124 6.19 6.19.1 READ Function 6.19.2 Procedures 1. Select the RU in the hospital list. 2. Select the items to be read from the pull-down menu of “READ”. 3. Click on [EXECUTE]. Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a recording medium such as an FD to the C drive of the client PC. The items which can be copied by means of the READ command include: l "CONFIGURATION" Copies the configuration data. l "HISTORY LOG" Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). l "SCN ALL DATA" Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Copies optical data of the scanner data. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-124 MU-125 4. Select a location of the data to be read. 6. Again verify the location to be read, and click on [OK]. 7. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u When data is to be read from a recording medium such as an FD, be sure to set the recording medium such as the FD which contains the data to be read in the client PC, before selecting the location. u NOTE u When the data is read from the recording medium such as an FD, be sure to remove the recording medium after clicking on [OK]. ０ 5. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-125 MU-126 6.20 6.20.1 WRITE Function 6.20.2 Procedures 1. Select the RU in the hospital list. 2. Select the items to be written from the pull-down menu of “WRITE”. 3. Click on [EXECUTE]. Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the client PC to a recording medium such as an FD. The items which can be copied by means of the WRITE command include: l "ERROR LOG" Copies the error log data. l "CONFIGURATION" Copies the configuration data. l "TRACE LOGS" Copies the trace log data (design analysis information). l "HISTORY LOG" Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). l "LOG ALL" Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time. l "SCN ALL DATA" Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Copies optical data of the scanner data. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-126 MU-127 4. Select a location where the data is to be written. 6. Again verify the location to write, and click on [OK]. 7. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u When data is to be written into a recording medium such as an FD, be sure to set the recording medium such as the FD in the client PC, before selecting the location. u NOTE u When the data is written from the recording medium such as an FD, be sure to remove the recording medium after clicking on [OK]. ０ 5. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-127 MU-128 6.21 6.21.1 UPLOAD Function Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the client PC to the flash ROM of the RU. The items which can be uploaded include: l "CONFIGURATION" Copies the configuration data. l "HISTORY LOG" 6.21.2 Procedures CAUTION The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated. Never turn OFF the RU power for the while. If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up. 1. Select the RU in the hospital list. 2. Select the item to be uploaded from the pull-down menu of “UPLOAD”. Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). l "SCN ALL DATA" Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Copies optical data of the scanner data. REFERENCE The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-128 MU-129 3. Click on [EXECUTE]. → Uploading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the client PC. 4. 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and their Probable Causes If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with the RU, the following error message appears. In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. Click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-129 MU-130 6.22 6.22.1 DOWNLOAD Function 6.22.2 Procedures 1. Select the RU in the hospital list. 2. Select the item to be downloaded from the pull-down menu of “DOWNLOAD”. Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of the RU to the client PC. The items which can be downloaded include: l "ERROR LOG" Copies the error log data. l "CONFIGURATION" Copies the configuration data. l "TRACE LOGS" Copies the trace log data (design analysis information). l "HISTORY LOG" Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). l "LOG ALL" Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time. l "SCN ALL DATA" Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time. l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA" Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. l "SCN OPTICAL DATA" Copies optical data of the scanner data. u NOTE u This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network settings before taking the procedures. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-130 MU-131 3. Click on [EXECUTE]. 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and their Probable Causes If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with the RU, the following error message appears. In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then turning it ON. → Downloading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the client PC. 4. Click on [OK]. REFERENCE Change over the CLEINT PC-TOOL to the OFF-LINE mode to execute respective commands, when the downloaded information is to be edited or viewed. Refer to “5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the detailed procedures of changing over to the OFF-LINE mode. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-131 MU-132 6.23 6.23.1 CDPath Function 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied. l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the procedure 5. When an RU is to be registered in the hospital list or the RU software is to be updated in version, the necessary data is usually acquired from the RU-APL CD-ROM. If a folder in which the complete RU-APL CD-ROM data is copied is present on the hard disk of the client PC, you can acquire the necessary data from the hard disk without the RU-APL CD-ROM by specifying the folder path. u NOTES u - Completely copy all of the data into a single folder when the RU-APL CD-ROM data is to be copied. You cannot register an RU in the hospital list or update the RU software in version with a folder containing a partial copy of the data. - Set the “CDPath” only when necessary. If the “CDPath” is set, you cannot register an RU in the hospital list or version-update the RU software from the RU-APL CD-ROM even if the CD-ROM is inserted into the client PC. Cancel the setting when not necessary. 6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath" The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the “Copy CD-R” folder of the C drive are described as an example. 1. l To select the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and proceed to the next procedure. → The window for selecting the folder appears. 3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-132 MU-133 4. Click on [OK]. 6.23.3 1. Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu. → The path is displayed in the text box. 5. Click on [SET]. → The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears. 2. Click on [CLEAR]. → The path in the text box is cleared, and the “CDPath” setting is canceled. 3. Click on [SET]. → The "CDPath" setting is canceled. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-133 MU-134 6.23.4 1. Verifying the "CDPath" Setting Choose "CDPath" from the "Configuration(C)" menu. → The "CD PATH SETTING" window opens. 2. Verify that the CD path is set. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-134 MU-135 6.24 6.24.1 Export 2. Select the location to which the data is exported. 3. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK]. 4. Again verify the location for export, and click on [OK]. Function Used to copy the tree information registered in the hospital list, and folders of the site, FTP server and RU stored in the C drive of the client PC to the hard disk of the client PC or to an external recording medium. u NOTES u - The data to be copied by means of [Export] is too large to be stored in a recording medium with a small recording capacity such as an FD. Specify the hard disk with a sufficient empty space or a recording medium with a large capacity as the destination of the data to be copied. - Upon execution of [Export], a “SERV” folder is created in the specified storage region. Do not change the folder name and the stored contents of the created “SERV” folder. 6.24.2 1. Procedures Select “Export” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. → The “EXPORT” window appears. → The data is stored in the location specified in the procedure 2. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-135 MU-136 6.25 6.25.1 Import 2. Select the location to which the data is to be imported. 3. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK]. 4. Again verify the location for import, and click on [OK]. Function Used to read the data stored by means of [Export], display the data in the tree of the hospital list, and store it in the C drive of the client PC. u NOTE u If data with the site name same as that registered in the hospital list is to be read, the following error message appears and [Import] is interrupted. To read the data having the site name same as that registered in the hospital list, delete the site having the same name registered in the hospital list, before re-trying [Export]. 6.25.2 1. Procedures Select “Import” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. → The imported contents are reflected in the hospital list. → The “IMPORT” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-136 MU-137 6.26 6.26.1 OnLine Function 6.26.2 1. Procedures Select “OnLine” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. Used to change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes. The available commands differ between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes. l ON-LINE mode A check mark appears at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu. → A check mark disappears from the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu, setting the CLIENT-PC TOOL in the OFF-LINE mode. l OFF-LINE mode A check mark does not appear at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu. Refer to “5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the details of the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-137 MU-138 6.27 6.27.1 Network Function Upon executing the “Network” command, the “Network Connection” window of Windows appears. This command is used to connect the client PC with the network at the user’s site and make the network settings. 6.27.2 1. Procedures Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. → The “Network Connection” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-138 MU-139 6.28 6.28.1 1. Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PCTOOL) If your click of [START] opens the following window without starting CLIENT PC-TOOL, the version of CLIENT PC-TOOL stored on the RU-APL CD-ROM is later than the version of CLIENT PC-TOOL installed on the client PC. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens. 2. u NOTE u Click [START]. → CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up. - To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, click [BACK] and then perform the version update procedure set forth under "5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL." {MU:5.9_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL} - If you do not intend to update CLIENT PC-TOOL on the spot, click [CONTINUE]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-139 MU-140 6.28.2 1. Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\ RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL 1. Click on 2. Turn OFF the power of the RU. in the upper right corner of the main window of CLIENT PC-TOOL. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-140 MU-141 7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions A1 The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated by starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL on the DX Console or from the CLIENT PC-TOOL on the client PC. {MU:7.3[5]_Scanner Check} {MU:7.3[5-1]_Polygon Mortor} {MU:7.3[5-2]_Laser} CAUTION {MU:7.3[5-3]_HV Diagnostic} After the MUTL is used, the RU cannot read normally. Be sure to turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU at the end. 7.1 {MU:7.3[5-3-1]_HV Setting/Diagnostic} {MU:7.3[5-4]_Format Adjustment} Tree of MUTL {MU:7.3[5-4-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)} MUTL {MU:7.3[5-4-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)} {MU:7.3[1]_Conveyance Check} {MU:7.3[5-4-3]_Manual Adjustment (Line)} {MU:7.3[1-1]_Conveyance Setting} {MU:7.3[5-4-4]_Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel)} {MU:7.3[1-2]_Processing Mode Setting} {MU:7.3[5-4-5]_Default Setting (FREQ)} {MU:7.3[1-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting} {MU:7.3[5-4-6]_Default Setting (Pixel)} {MU:7.3[2]_Board Check} {MU:7.3[5-4-7]_Optic Setting (FREQ)} {MU:7.3[2-1]_CPU Board Setting Display} {MU:7.3[5-4-8]_Optic Setting (Pixel)} {MU:7.3[2-2]_Panel Check} {MU:7.3[5-5]_Correction} {MU:7.3[2-2-1]_PANEL LED On/Off} {MU:7.3[5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)} {MU:7.3[2-2-2]_BUZZER On/Off} {MU:7.3[5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} {MU:7.3[3]_Software Check} {MU:7.3[5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed)} {MU:7.3[3-1]_Ver. Display} {MU:7.3[5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))} {MU:7.3[3-2]_MAC Address Display} {MU:7.3[5-5-5]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)} {MU:7.3[4]_Virtual Image Check} {MU:7.3[5-5-6]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)} {MU:7.3[4-1]_LED Virtual Read} {MU:7.3[5-5-7]_Special Sensitivity Correction} {MU:7.3[4-2]_PMT Virtual Read} A1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 {MU:7.3[5-5-8]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction} A2 B1 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-141 MU-142 A2 B1 {MU:7.3[5-6]_Trouble Shooting} {MU:7.3[5-6-1]_Shading Correction} {MU:7.3[5-7]_HV ON/OFF} {MU:7.3[5-8]_S Value} {MU:7.3[5-8-1]_S value now} {MU:7.3[5-8-2]_S value calculate} {MU:7.3[5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize} {MU:7.3[6]_For Design} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-142 MU-143 7.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL The MUTL is started by the following two ways: - To start from the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console {MU:7.2.1_Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL} - To start from the CLEINT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode {MU:7.2.2_Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL} Start up the MUTL by either method depending on the conditions of a user’s site for operation. u NOTE u 7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL CAUTION Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU. If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control. 1. Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} 2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where "MUTL" is to be started. 3. Click on [MUTL], and the “MUTL” window appears. Some commands for virtual image check and scanner check require images to be read and output on the DX Console. Since images cannot be read or output on the client PC, always start up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console to check the virtual images and the scanner. REFERENCE The MUTL has the same menu items to appear either started from the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console or from the CLEINT PC-TOOL of the client PC. To exit, refer to “7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL”. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} REFERENCE Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of the RU. Refer to “4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the details of the “Under Maintenance” indication. {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-143 MU-144 7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL 3. Click on [MUTL], and the “MUTL” window appears. CAUTION Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU. If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control. 1. 2. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Select the RU in the hospital list. REFERENCE Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of the RU. Refer to “6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the details of the “Under Maintenance” indication. {MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-144 MU-145 7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL u NOTE u Check to make sure that the operation that was performed in the MUTL has been completed before exiting the MUTL. If the operation that was performed in the MUTL is under way, the operation running on the RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited by clicking on . 1. Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window. u NOTE u Turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON again to convey the IP for reading an image on the RU or other operations after the MUTL is exited. Otherwise, the conveyance may fail. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-145 MU-146 7.3 Details of MUTL [1] 4. Perform Conveyance Setting. 5. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU. Conveyance Check n Function Automatic conveyance (unattended conveyance) of IP The following three items are to be specified for conveyance check: - Setting of automatic conveyance - Setting of processing mode - Setting of number of conveyance n Procedures {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} → “Number of conveyance performed” and “number of conveyance setting” appear on the operation panel of the RU. The procedures for the conveyance check with the following settings are described as an example. - Setting of automatic conveyance: AUTO MODE - Setting of processing mode: 1-ERASE - Setting of number of conveyance: Three times 1. 2. 3. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU. - When using the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console: {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} - When using the CLIENT PC-TOOL of the DX Console: {MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} Click the [Conveyance Check]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-146 MU-147 5. Insert the cassette. → Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL. n Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance 1. Set to halt the conveyance. 2. Exit the MUTL. l GOOD indication l NO GOOD indication "RESULT: XXXX (XXXX: error code)" is displayed. u NOTE u A four-digit number is displayed as an error code. Perform the troubleshooting procedure with “1” added to the head of the displayed error code. ---Example--When the displayed error code is “0293”: → Perform the troubleshooting procedures for the error of “10293”. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} n Procedures for Exiting Conveyance Check 1. Select [ROUTINE] for Conveyance Setting. CAUTION Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to "ROUTINE" again. 2. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} 3. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CAUTION Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to "ROUTINE" again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-147 MU-148 [1-1] Conveyance Setting l AUTO MODE The conveyance is repeated with the processing mode and number of IP conveyance that have been set. It is used for checking the conveyance. l ROUTINE The conveyance is performed with the processing mode that has been set. When the number of IP conveyance is set to greater than 1, the conveyance is performed again as the cassette is set again once the IP returns to the cassette. It should be noted that when the mode is changed to "ROUTINE" while the conveyance is repeated in "AUTO MODE", "AUTO MODE" may be canceled. [1-2] Processing Mode Setting l READ: Read Performs a normal read operation. This menu should not be used for servicing purposes. l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed according to the detected dose. Because IP reading is intended to detect the dose, image output is not generated. l 2-ERASE: Secondary Erasure Conveyance is performed on the same conveyance path as for IP reading, but image reading is not done. This menu should be used when you only want to make mechanical checks on the IP conveyance. [1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999. To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to greater than 1, set "0 (zero)" to the number of conveyance. When the number of conveyance is set, "number set" and "number conveyed" are displayed on the operation panel of the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-148 MU-149 [2] Board Check [2-1] CPU Board Setting Display  Function/Purpose The settings of the DIP switches on the CPU board are displayed. The settings of the DIP switches are shown in two-digit hexadecimal numbers. You can know the settings of the DIP switches by converting the number into an eight-digit binary number. REFERENCE Although a four-digit number appears, the two lower digits show the setting.  How to Read the Indication Example: Indication of “0x30” 1. 2.  Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 View the indication on the screen. Convert the hexadecimal number into a binary number. → Hexadecimal “3” means binary “0011”, hexadecimal “0” means binary “0000”, and the setting is “0011 0000”.  Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches The first digit of the binary number corresponds to the first DIP switch. {n Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table} 3. See the DIP switch settings from the binary number obtained in the procedure 2. → As the fifth and sixth digits of the binary number are 1 and the others are 0, the fifth and sixth DIP switches are ON and the others are OFF. {n Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches}  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.  Details of the DIP Switch Settings {MC:4.3_CPU Board} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-149 MU-150 [2-2] Panel Check [2-2-2] [2-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off  Function/Purpose  Function/Purpose All LEDs on the operation panel are lit or unlit.  Procedures 1. Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function. - ON: - OFF: All LEDs on the operation panel are lit. All LEDs on the operation panel are unlit.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. BUZZER On/Off The buzzer is caused to sound.  Procedures 1. Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function. - ON: - OFF: The buzzer sounds. The buzzer stops sounding.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-150 MU-151 [3] Software Check [3-2] [3-1] Ver. Display n Function n Function n Procedures 2. 4. 1. 2. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Select [MAC Address Display]. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Select [Ver. Display (FLASH)]. REFERENCE If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the versions, troubleshoot the machine. {Troubleshooting} 3. Displays the RU’s MAC address. n Procedures Used to display the versions of the CPU63A board IPL and the firmware of the PNL board existing on the flash ROM. 1. MAC Address Display REFERENCE If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the MAC address, troubleshoot the machine. {Troubleshooting} 3. 4. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-151 MU-152 [4] Virtual Image Check [4-1] LED Virtual Read n Function Cause the blue LED of the PMT board and the LED of the PMT board to illuminate, and input the resulting light from the light-collecting guide to generate image output. If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.  Procedures u NOTE u Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu. 1. Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/ TEST”. 2. 3. Start the MUTL. Select the read conditions in “LED Virtual Read”. - OFF: Normal read - ON (0.1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 0.1 mR - ON (1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 1 mR REFERENCE Normally, use “ON (0.1 mR)”. 4. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 5. Insert the cassette. → Read starts, and the image appears.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-152 MU-153 [4-2] PMT Virtual Read n Function Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board. If there is no problem with "LED Virtual Read", the result of "PMT Virtual Read" permits a decision to be made whether the failure of the scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.  Procedures u NOTE u Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu. 1. Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/ TEST”. 2. 3. Start the MUTL. 4. Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function. - OFF: - ON: Normal read Image data is created by LOG AMP. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 5. Insert the cassette. → Read starts, and the image appears.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-153 MU-154 [5] Scanner Check [5-2] [5-1] Polygon Mortor n Function n Function Turn ON or OFF the polygon. When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a predetermined time after the polygon is activated. n Procedures 1. 2. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Laser Turn ON or OFF the laser. When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are diagnosed. Either of the following values is displayed on the MUTL. - LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value - LDIFNOW: Current value at present - LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the factory default until at present. n Procedures Turn ON the polygon. CAUTION While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon. If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly result in a machine failure or fire. REFERENCE If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE POLYGON IS TURNED ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table. {Troubleshooting} 3. 1. 2. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} Turn ON the laser. Turn OFF the polygon. → The following message appears in the MUTL. 4. 5. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS.. LDIFINT : 300 LDIFNOW : 0 LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0 THE LASER IS TURNED ON. REFERENCE If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE LASER IS TURNED ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table. {Troubleshooting} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-154 MU-155 3. 4. 5. Turn OFF the laser. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. [5-3] HV Diagnostic [5-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic n Function When the HV voltage is inputted over a range from 250 to 999, the command value outputted from the SCN23A board is detected to check that the difference from the input value is held within +/- 10%. Checks can be performed on the front side and back side, respectively. n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 2. Select [HV Diagnostic]. 3. Input the HV value. REFERENCE If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table. {Troubleshooting} 4. 5. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-155 MU-156 [5-4] Format Adjustment When the image is outputted under condition where the machine shipment control data is installed, a while blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some non-outputted portion (image loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine adjustment. u NOTES u - Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV switch in the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done. - When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately reflected. REFERENCE When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be made, Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment (Pixel) is done first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once again, as a result of Manual Adjustment (FREQ). [5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)  Function/Purpose Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal direction (main scan direction). Its adjustable range is from -4% to +4%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.  Procedures u INSTRUCTIONS u - Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. - To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other thin article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted. 1. Place a 175 mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. u INSTRUCTION u At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. 2. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-156 MU-157 3. Measure a misalignment of the reading width. Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown below. Steel rule actual size - IP conveyance direction a 4. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 5. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} a Reduction factor ÷ Steel rule actual size x 100 = 6. Adjustment value (%) Measure "a" on the output film. Start the MUTL. Input the adjustment value (example: “2.8”) of the main scan length calculated in procedure 3 in the Input column of “[5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)”. u NOTE u Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained. FRRB404010.ai --- Example --If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35 cm x 43 cm) film: #1 (175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%) Since the adjustment will be made so as to enlarge the white blank portion, enter the value "2.8" in the Input range field. #2 REFERENCES - The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film. #3 Direction of IP conveyance 2.8 Reduction ratio: 100% RT-01 #4 FRRB404011.ai - The white blank portion within the output image reduces when you enter a minus (-) value and enlarges when you enter a plus (+) value. Minus FRRB404013.ai 7. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Plus White blank portion FRRB404012.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-157 MU-158 8. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”. [5-4-2] u INSTRUCTION u  Function/Purpose Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 9. Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment. 10. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP}  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Manual Adjustment (Pixel) Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main scan direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears on the side edge of the image, or a portion of the image is not outputted). Its adjustable range is from -500 to 500 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.  Adjustment Method (Concept of Adjustment) Described below are the procedures for centering the image reading position with respect to the image frame. The image frame can be centered by setting a margin opposite to the reference to 1.75 mm when the IP in the cassette is brought closer to the reference and read.  Procedures 1. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. Expose IPs of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. u INSTRUCTION u At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. 2. Output the image of one of the IPs prepared in the procedure 1 by loading the cassette with the IP in the cassette brought closer to the reference. Use “Sensitivity” of “QC/TEST” in the menu. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} Cassette IP Bring closer to the reference. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual FRRB404019.ai MU-158 MU-159 3. Measure the margin at the center in the image conveyance direction. Calculate the adjustment value by the following formula to obtain the margin of 1.75 mm on the opposite reference. Measure the center in the image conveyance direction (1.75–b/Reduction factor) x 10 = Adjustment value (pixel)  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. b mm FRRB404020.ai --- Example --If the margin on the opposite reference side is 3 mm when outputting to the film with the reduction factor of 80%, input “−20” as the adjustment value. (1.75−3/0.8) x 10 = −20 (pixel) 4. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 5. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 6. Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “−20”) calculated in procedure 3 in the Input column of “[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)”. u NOTE u Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained. 7. 8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 9. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off. 10. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-159 MU-160 [5-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line) Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the IP carrying direction (sub-scanning direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears or a portion of the image is not output). Its adjustable range is from 1 to 50 digits. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a positivequantity (+) value is entered. The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows. n Procedures REFERENCES - IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type. - IP leading-edge adjustment may be made for each of the IP sizes. 1. Expose IPs of a size (18” x 24” HR/HR-BD or 24” x 30” HR/HR-BD) to be adjusted, with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 mR. 3. Measure the leading edge of the IP. Measure the length of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown below. REFERENCE If the entered adjustment value (C) is greater than the current value (A), the white blank portion (b) expands. The white blank portion (b) narrows if the entered adjustment value (C) is smaller than the current value (A). --- Example --If you want to narrow the IP leading-edge position by 1 mm when an IP of 18" x 24" HR size is outputted to a film: 30 (displayed value) - (10x1) = 20 Thus, "Input range" is 20. u NOTE u At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. 2. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-160 MU-161 4. Enter the IP leading-edge position (e.g., “20”) calculated at step 3. 5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 6. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output. u NOTES u - After entering the IP leading edge position, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the IP leading edge position data will not be retained. - “Input range” only accepts values ranging from 1 to 50. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “9. Image/Conveyance Checks” when outputting the image. 「 {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 7. 8. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Verify that the white blank portion reaches the value so adjusted. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-161 MU-162 [5-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel) 2.  Function/Purpose u INSTRUCTION u Used to adjust the main scan position per IP size. The following sizes can be set. Layer 1 [5-4-4] Layer 2 [5-4-4-1] [5-4-4-2] [5-4-4-3] [5-4-4-4] [5-4-4-5] [5-4-4-6] Output the image of one of the IPs prepared in the procedure 1 by loading the cassette with the IP in the cassette brought closer to the reference. Use “Sensitivity” of “QC/TEST” in the menu. Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} Command name 10 x 12 inch 08 x 10 inch 24 x 30 cm 18 x 24 cm 15 x 30 cm 30 x 24 cm Cassette  Procedures u NOTE u IP Carry out “[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)” before taking the procedures below. REFERENCE The procedures are mentioned for setting “[5-4-4-1]10x12 inch” as an example. The similar procedures are to be taken for other settings except the command name. 1. Expose an IP of an arbitrary size with a tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. u INSTRUCTION u At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. Bring closer to the reference. 3. FRRB404019.ai Measure the margin at the center in the image conveyance direction. Calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the following formula so that the margin on the opposite reference side is a white blank amount on the opposite reference side per IP size shown in the table below. Measure the center in the image conveyance direction (a–b/Reduction factor) x 10 = Adjustment value (pixel) b mm Theoretical value (mm) of the white blank amount on the opposite reference side per IP size IP size a Half-scale 1.75 Full-scale 1.75 Quarter-scale 2.00 24x30 1.95 Sixth-scale 2.25 18x24 2.25 15x30 1.70 FRRB404021.ai --- Example --If the margin on the opposite reference side is 3 mm when outputting to the film using the half-scale IP with the reduction factor of 80%, input “−20” as the adjustment value. (1.75−3/0.8) x 10 = −20 (pixel) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-162 MU-163 4. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 5. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 6. Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “−20”) calculated in procedure 3 in the Input column of "10 x 12 inch".  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. u NOTES u - Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained. - “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -25 to 25. 7. 8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of “Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting the image. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 9. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off. 10. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-163 MU-164 [5-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ) Set the value of the main scan length (FREQ) to its default value. [5-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel) Set the value of the main scan position (Pixel) to its default value. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 [5-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ) Unavailable menu for this machine. Input no numerical values. [5-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel) Unavailable menu for this machine. Input no numerical values. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-164 MU-165 8. [5-5] Correction [5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST) Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.  Function/Purpose Shading/sensitivity correction takes place. Using this command, you can carry out “Shading Speed Correction” and “Sensitivity Correction” at the same time. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes. FRRB404018.ai  Procedures REFERENCE “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. 1. 2. Measure and record the dose. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Tungsten 1 80 200 Start the MUTL. 5. 6. 7. [SET] Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)”. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} REFERENCE “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 13. 11. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Tungsten 1 80 200 Read the IP prepared in the procedure 10 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity. 13. Confirm the S value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP}  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL. 10. Expose the IP under the following conditions. Expose the IP under the following conditions. 3. 4. 9. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-165 MU-166 [5-5-2] 8. Shading Correction (HR)  Function/Purpose Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error. Shading correction takes place. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 24cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes.  Procedures REFERENCE “Shading Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. FRRB404018.ai 9. Measure and record the dose. Expose the IP under the following conditions. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Molybdenum 20 25 120 REFERENCE “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 13. 10. Expose the IP under the following conditions. Start the MUTL. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Shading Correction (HR)”. [SET] The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL. 11. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Molybdenum 20 25 120 Read the IP prepared in the procedure 10 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity. 13. Confirm the S value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”. {MU:4.15_BACKUP}  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-166 MU-167 [5-5-3] 7. Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed)  Function/Purpose Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error. The polygon correction data of HR is generated. Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out. Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Sensitivity Correction” is also to be carried out together. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes. FRRB404018.ai  Procedures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8. Measure and record the dose. Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures Expose the IP under the following conditions. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Molybdenum 20 25 120 Start the MUTL. Click on “HR Speed”. 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-167 MU-168 [5-5-4] 7. Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))  Function/Purpose Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error. The polygon correction data of ST(GR) is generated. Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out. Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Sensitivity Correction” is also to be carried out together. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes. FRRB404018.ai  Procedures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8. Measure and record the dose. Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures Expose the IP under the following conditions. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Tungsten 1 80 200 Start the MUTL. Click on “ST (GR)”. 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-168 MU-169 [5-5-5] 8. Sensitivity Correction (ST)  Function/Purpose Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error. Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out. Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out. Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Shading Speed Correction” is also to be carried out together. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes. FRRB404018.ai  Procedures 9. REFERENCE “Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. REFERENCE “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 13. Measure and record the dose. 10. Expose the IP under the following conditions. Expose the IP under the following conditions. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Tungsten 1 80 200 Start the MUTL. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Sensitivity Correction (ST)”. [SET] The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 11. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Tungsten 1 80 200 Read the IP prepared in the procedure 10 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity. 13. Confirm the S value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-169 MU-170 [5-5-6] 8. Sensitivity Correction (HR)  Function/Purpose Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. u NOTE u If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error. Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out. Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out. Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Shading Speed Correction” is also to be carried out together. u INSTRUCTIONS u - Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank portion, an error might result. - Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot take place normally with other timings. - Use an IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with other sizes. FRRB404018.ai  Procedures 9. REFERENCE “Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. REFERENCE “Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 13. Measure and record the dose. 10. Expose the IP under the following conditions. Expose the IP under the following conditions. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Molybdenum 20 25 120 Start the MUTL. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Sensitivity Correction (HR)”. [SET] The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} 11. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value Molybdenum 20 25 120 Read the IP prepared in the procedure 10 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity. 13. Confirm the S value. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-170 MU-171 [5-5-7] Special Sensitivity Correction n Procedures:Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When Tungsten X-Ray Tube Is Used n Function Sensitivity correction is performed for the IP type HR depending on the type of the X-ray tube to be used at the user’s site. u INSTRUCTION u X-ray dose required for exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube. Make exposure according to the following conditions. Tungsten X-ray tube: About 3.6 mR Molybdenum X-ray tube: About 20 mR REFERENCES - The X-ray tube selection menu is recognized as follows: AUTO SELECT: The IP type HR is automatically recognized as one irradiated by the molybdenum X-ray tube for correction. TUNGSTEN FIX: Correction is performed by the X-ray tube (tungsten) with the IP type HR specified. - The S value is indicated as follows depending on the irradiation output. <When a molybdenum X-ray tube is used> For 2 mR: The S value is 1200. For 20 mR: The S value is 120. For 200 mR: The S value is 12. <When a tungsten X-ray tube is used> For 0.36 mR: The S value is 1200. For 3.6 mR: The S value is 120. For 36 mR: The S value is 12. CAUTIONS When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done. Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction. {MC:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions: - The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the CPU63A board; - The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures of the RU application. u INSTRUCTION u Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose. u NOTE u Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot be properly made. REFERENCE Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction. 1. 2. 3. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to about 3.6 mR of radiation. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-171 MU-172 4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 3.4 mR), and then prepare for correction. 6. REFERENCE When the measured X-ray dose is 3.4 mR, enter the value 3.4. When the measured X-ray dose is 3.0 mR, enter the value 3. 7. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image. u INSTRUCTION u When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under "9. Image/Conveyance Checks." {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. REFERENCE Steps 9 to 13 are performed for sensitivity correction verification. 9. 10. 11. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to about 3.6 mR of radiation. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image. u INSTRUCTION u When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under "9. Image/Conveyance Checks." {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 5. Click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-172 MU-173 12. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value. REFERENCE The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below: 0.36 mR: The S value is 1200. 3.6 mR: The S value is 120. 36 mR: The S value is 12. For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "10. Confirming the S Value." {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 13. Back up the corrected data. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} 14. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUT} 15. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. n Procedures:Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When Molybdenum X-Ray Tube Is Used CAUTIONS When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done. Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction. {MC:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions: - The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the CPU63A board; - The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures of the RU application. u INSTRUCTION u Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose. u NOTE u Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot be properly made. REFERENCE Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction. 1. 2. 3. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to about 20 mR of radiation. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-173 MU-174 4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 18.1 mR), and then prepare for correction. 6. REFERENCE When the measured X-ray dose is 18.1 mR, enter the value 18.1. When the measured X-ray dose is 20.0 mR, enter the value 20. 7. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility} Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image. u INSTRUCTION u When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under "9. Image/Conveyance Checks." {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. REFERENCE Steps 9 to 13 are performed for sensitivity correction verification. 9. 10. 11. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to about 20 mR of radiation. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image. u INSTRUCTION u When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under "9. Image/Conveyance Checks." {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 5. Click on [OK]. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-174 MU-175 12. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value. REFERENCE The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below: 2 mR: The S value is 1200. 20 mR: The S value is 120. 200 mR: The S value is 12. For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "10. Confirming the S Value." {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} 13. Back up the corrected data. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} 14. Exit the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUT} 15. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-175 MU-176 [5-5-8] Sensitivity S-Value Correction n Procedures Procedures for correcting the indication of 195 to 200 are described as an example. n Function Correct the S value indicated on the film. For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 mR is read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200. 1. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 2. Select [Correction]. 3. Select [Sensitivity S-Value Correction]. 4. Enter the existing S-value and expected S-value. 5. Back up the adjusted data. CAUTION S value correction is applied to the IP type (ST or HR) read by the RU immediately before the command is executed. - When the S value correction is to be performed for the IP type ST, do not read the IP type HR from the time when the S value indicated on the film is checked to the time when the command for “S value correction” is performed. - When the S value correction is to be performed for the IP type HR, do not read the IP type ST from the time when the S value indicated on the film is checked to the time when the command for “S value correction” is performed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6. 7. {MU:4.15_BACKUP} Exit the MUTL. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-176 MU-177 [5-6] Trouble Shooting [5-7] [5-6-1] Shading Correction n Function n Function For troubleshooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. - ON: Generate image output by using the shading correction data. - OFF: Generate image output without using the shading correction data. CAUTION Normally, be sure to set it to "ON". If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity. REFERENCE The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, or when IP reading operation is performed once or more. HV ON/OFF Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). The setting changed becomes effective immediately; however, the result updated does not appear immediately on the operation panel of the RU. CAUTION Check to make sure that the cover plate has been put on to shield the inside of the housing against light, before turning ON the HV switch. If the HV switch is turned ON without the inside of the housing shielded against light, the photomultiplier may get damaged. REFERENCES - This can be set only when the HV switch on the CPU board of the RU is ON. - The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON. n Procedures n Procedures Procedures for setting the shading correction to OFF are described as an example. 1. 2. Start the MUTL. The procedures of setting the HV switch to OFF are described as an example. 1. 2. Start the MUTL. 3. 4. Exit the MUTL after the maintenance is completed. Click on [HV ON/OFF], and select [OFF]. Click on [Trouble Shooting]. 3. Click on [Shading correction], and select [OFF]. 4. 5. Exit the MUTL. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-177 MU-178 [5-8] S Value [5-8-2] [5-8-1] S value now n Function n Function Displays the initial S value and current S value. Allows you to confirm S value changes. After the S value changes are confirmed, perform the S value verification procedure as needed. S value calculate Performs calculations on the X-ray dose to determine the S value that corresponds to the X-ray dose. n Procedures 1. 2. Start the MUTL. 3. Enter the X-ray dose value and then click [Set]. Select [S Value]. n Procedures 1. 2. Start the MUTL. Select [S Value]. REFERENCE If the X-ray dose value is set to 1, the following message appears in the MUTL window. 3. Select [S value now]. 4. Verify the result displayed in the MUTL window. 5. Verify the current S value. Perform the S value verification procedure as needed. 6. 7. 4. 5. Exit the MUTL. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value} Exit the MUTL. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-178 MU-179 [5-8-3] PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize  Function/Purpose Initializes the LED data after light-collecting unit replacement to set the initial value for S value error detection.  Procedures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. [PMT/LightGuide change] > [LED initialize] → The confirmation window appears. [OK] Verify that the MUTL message field reads "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED." Exit the MUTL. Back up "SCN ALL DATA".  Exiting Procedures 1. 2. 3. Exit the MUTL. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-179 MU-180 [6] For Design Commands for design Not used for servicing. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-180 MU-181 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-181 MU-182 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-182 MU-183 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-183 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release（FM6150） All pages Corrections (FM8222) 3, 11, 18, 20-22, 27, 28, 34, 36, 40, 41 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Service Parts List (SP) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 Pages affected CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-1 How to Use Service Parts List ■ RANK Character Under Warranty R Must be returned. Must be returned. (We use for analysis.) Must Not be returned. (Consumable part. Not applicable to free-of-charge warranty.) Must Not be returned. T without R, Q, T ＋ Repairable Not repairable Not repairable Not repairable Significance Parts applicable to export regulations. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6149 A B Out of Warranty ● Export regulation-applicable character(Parts with the following character are controlled by Export regulation.) Character All parts are assigned with one of characters A through E. Character ● Handling RANK characters (parts that are handled in a special manner during parts operation, such as management) Q ● Fault RANK characters (which provide reference for determining the recom-mended stock quantity) C D E Significance Consumable parts or parts that will be replaced at short intervals. Parts that may become faulty accidentally and have a relatively high failure rate. Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to have a relatively high failure rate. Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to become faulty. Parts that are necessary for fault analysis, or parts that may be needed in case of unexpected accidents such as man-induced damage. <The RANK guide> The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK characters, and Export regulationapplicable character are assigned in that order. Thus, at least one character or up to three characters are assigned in the RANK column. ■ REF.NO. REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts having different functions, they are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL NUMBER columns. ■ PART NUMBER PART NUMBER is a code number that is unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at the rightmost position of the code number has the following meaning. ○ For hardware The alphabet denotes the version number of a part. If parts have different version numbers, they are upward-compatible. ○ For software The alphabet denotes a difference in the specifications. Parts differing in the suffix are not compatible with each other. Version number is omitted in the list. ■ PART NAME PART NAME represents a general name of a part. ■ QTY. ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in each unit. ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S represents a small part that is shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces of that part is supplied.) ■ REMARKS The REMARKS column indicates a unique name of a part or relevant information of each part. ■ SERIAL NUMBER The units may contain different parts depending on their shipment control number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control number to which the relevant parts are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the parts are applicable to all the relevant units. The shipment control number is represented by lower five digits of eight-digit number indicated on the rating indication label. ■ REFER TO The "REFER TO" column shows reference sections concerning the part.Clicking the reference section in the "REFER TO" column jumps to the top page of the reference section where the related information is in. ■ Quantities of recommended spare parts It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in stock a certain quantity of parts according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the parts, as follows. For periodically replaced parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust the stock quantity of service parts depending on the number of working units (N). Quantity used in a single system : Q ○N=1 Rank A ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.3 Rank C ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.05 Rank D ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.02 ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10 Rank A ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.3 Rank C ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.05 Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02 ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300 Rank A ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.3 Rank C ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.05 Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02 ■ Precautions to be Observed When Returning Parts for Repair When returning a component for repair, pack it in the same manner as for the supplied substitute, using the substitute packing materials. The use of different packing materials or packing methods may incur damage to packed component during transit. CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-1 SP-2 INDEX 01 INDEX ● カバー COVER 11 INDEX ● 回路図 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 02 INDEX ● フレーム FLAME 12 INDEX ● 部品番号検索表 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE 03 INDEX ● カセッテセット部 CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 INDEX ● 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 04 INDEX ● 消去部 ERASURE UNIT 05 INDEX ● 光学部 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 06 INDEX ● 集光部 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 07 INDEX ● 副走査部 SUB SCANNING UNIT 08 INDEX ● 制御部 CONTROLLER 09 INDEX ● オプション OPTION 10 INDEX ● ケーブル CABLE 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-2 SP-3 01A カバー 1 COVER 1 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1.1 350Y102657 E 1.2 350Y102693 カバー Cover E E E E E 1.3 1.4 2 3 4.1 350Y102694 350Y102695 405N102614 345N100604B 350Y102600A カバーカバー銘板遮板カバー Cover Cover Label Light Protect Plate Cover E 4.2 350Y102600A カバー Cover E E A D 4.3 4.4 5 6.1 350Y102600A 350Y102697A 376N0240B 345N1742G カバーカバーメカニカルフィルタルーバー Cover Cover Mechanical Filter Louver D 6.2 345N1742G ルーバー Louver D D D D 6.3 6.4 7 8.1 345N1742G 345N1884C 376N0241B 345N1743D ルーバールーバーメカニカルフィルタルーバー Louver Louver Mechanical Filter Louver D 8.2 345N1743D ルーバー Louver D D 8.3 8.4 9 10 11 12 13 345N1743D 345N1885A *** 350N2974H 386N1375 386N1374 138S0218 ルーバールーバー Louver Louver E D D A 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 カバー PART NAME Cover カバー Cover 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) REFER TO 1 1 2 1 SP-3 SP-4 01B カバー 2 COVER 2 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1.1 350Y102658A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 カバー PART NAME Cover E 1.2 350Y102658A カバー Cover E E E E E 1.3 1.4 2 3 4.1 350Y102658A 350Y102699 405N102614 345N101356D 350Y2082 カバーカバー銘板遮板カバー Cover Cover Label Light Protect Plate Cover E 4.2 350Y2082 カバー Cover E E E 4.3 4.4 5.1 350Y2082 350Y2083A 350N3235C カバーカバーカバー Cover Cover Cover E 5.2 350N3235C カバー Cover E E E E 5.3 5.4 6 7.1 350N3235C 350N3310B 405N101258 350Y102723 カバーカバー銘板カバー Cover Cover Label Cover E 7.2 350Y102723 カバー Cover E E E E 7.3 7.4 8 9 350Y102723 350Y102717 345N100602E 405N102614 カバーカバー遮板銘板 Cover Cover Light Protect Plate Label CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 REFER TO SP-4 SP-5 02 フレーム FRAME RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 305S1110008 D 2 367S2084 D 3 367S1109A D 4 387N100022A D 5 146N0016B 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME 六角ナット Hexagon nut 脚 Adjuster Assembly キャスタ Caster 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 4 4 4 2 1 SG1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-5 SP-6 03A カセッテセット部 1 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 327N6101401E ラック D 2 327N1101607B 平歯車 D 3 322N1036B すべり軸受 E 4 356Y0407A ブラケット D 5 322SY097 すべり軸受 E 6 319N102763 軸 E 7 356Y0406B ブラケット E 8 319N102762 軸 E 9.1 350Y1957A カバー E 9.2 350Y1958A カバー Cover E E E D D E 9.3 9.4 10 11 12 13.1 350Y100666 350Y100668 356Y0458A 386N1266 382N100266 350Y1953B カバーカバーブラケット緩衝機材テープカバー Cover Cover Bracket Shock Absorber Tape Cover E 13.2 350Y1954B カバー Cover E E E E D 13.3 13.4 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 カバーカバーブラケットカバー樹脂ローラ Cover Cover Bracket Cover Resin Roller 樹脂ローラ軸補助板シャーシブラケットブラケット帯電防止材 Resin Roller Shaft Plate Support Chassis Bracket Bracket Antistatic Brush D D E E E E D 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME Guide Spur Gear Plain Bearing Bracket Plain Bearing Shaft Bracket Shaft Cover 350Y100665 350Y100667 356Y0457A 350Y1951C 334Y100414 *** 334N100159 319N102764 346N1254E 353Y0073G 356N10790A 356N10111 387N0138C CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. 4 4 8 2 4 1 2 1 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 4 4 1 For Japan Except for USA, 1 Japan 1 For USA 1 For USA(FMSU) 1 1 4 REFER TO 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 SP-6 SP-7 03B カセッテセット部 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 341N100234 E 2 341N100277 E 3 341N100278A E 4 341N100231A D 5 329N100049 D 6 327N100290 D 7 327N100289 D 8 327N100289 D 9 327N100290 D 10 327N100294A E 11 341N0937B D 12 322N100228 D 13 322SB058 D 14 322N100221A E 15 319N101344 D 16 118SX301 D 17 118SX301 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME アーム Arm アーム Arm アーム Arm アーム Arm カム Cam 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear アーム Arm すべり軸受 Plain Bearing すべり軸受 Plain Bearing すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 軸 Shaft ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 MA3 1 MA1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-7 SP-8 03C カセッテセット部 3 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 388N100439 E 2 356N108546A D 3 146S0102 E 4 341N100232A D 5 329N100039 E 6 341N100234 E 7 341N100277 E 8 341N100278A D 9 146S0102 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 D 10 388N100532 E D 11 12 341N100279 146S0102 PART NAME 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ブラケット Bracket ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor アーム Arm カム Cum アーム Arm アーム Arm アーム Arm ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor Compression Coil 圧縮コイルバネ Spring アーム Arm ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 1 1 SA7 1 1 1 1 1 1 SA3 SERIAL NO. REFER TO 1 1 1 SA1 SP-8 SP-9 03D カセッテセット部 4 CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 146S0102 D 2 146S0102 D 3 146S0102 D 4 322SB058 D 5 322N100228 E 6 341N0937B D 7 327N100294A D 8 327N100298 D 9 327N100247 D 10 146S0102 D 11 327N100292 D 12 327N100293 E 13 310S7002016 D 14 118Y100091A D 15 146S0082 D 16 118SX301 D 17 322N100221A D 18 146S0083 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 軸受 Bearing アーム Arm 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 歯車 Gear ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平行ピン Straight Pin モータ Motor ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REMARKS SA10 SA8 SA12 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SA6 MA2 SA4 MA4 SA4 SP-9 SP-10 03E カセッテセット部 5 CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 388N100533 E 2 342N100050A D 3 363N100699 D 4 387N100023 D 5 362N100297 E 6 350N101280 D 7 388N100536 D 8 362N100751 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 ばねレバーガイド帯電防止材受カバーばね受 PART NAME Spring Lever Guide Antistatic Brush Stopper Cover Spring Holder CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 2 2 4 4 2 2 2 2 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-10 SP-11 03F カセッテセット部 6 CASSETTE SET UNIT 6 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 372S0049A E 2 356N103613 D 3 370N100717A D 4 372N100063 D 5 370N100717A D 6 372S0609 D 7 370N100718B D 8 370N100719A A 9 133Y100043 D 10 134N100027A 11 *** 12 *** D 13 392N0009A E 14 315N0011 D 15 370N100063A E 16 356N103608 E 17 356N103609 D 18 370N100063A E 19 341Y0341 D 20 386N100269 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 管継手ブラケットホース管継手ホース管継手ホースホース電動ポンプ電磁バルブ吸着盤止め輪ホースブラケットブラケットホースアーム緩衝機材 PART NAME Joint Bracket Hose Joint Hose Joint Hose Hose Pump Solenoid Valve Suction Cup KL Clip Hose Bracket Bracker Hose Arm Shock Absorber CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 2 1 1 4 2 1 1 8 1 PA1 1 SVA1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP-11 SP-12 03G カセッテセット部 7 CASSETTE SET UNIT 7 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 322SB040 D 2 322N100221A D 3 327N100292 E 4 310S7002016 E 5 319N101169 E 6 310S7002016 E 7 341N100235C D 8 388N100537 D 9 322N100232 D 10 334N100193 D 11 334N100192 D 12 334N100072D D 13 338N100018 D 14 388N100538 E 15 341N100275 D 16 334Y100378A D 17 334N100191 E 18 319N101180A D 19 322SF268 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 ころがり軸受ころがり軸受平歯車平行ピン軸平行ピンアームばねころがり軸受ローラローラ樹脂ローラリングばねアームローラローラ軸ころがり軸受 PART NAME Ball Bearing Ball Bearing Spur Gear Straight Pin Shaft Straight Pin Arm Spring Ball Bearing Roller Roller Resin Roller Ring Spring Arm Roller Roller Shaft Ball Bearing CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-12 SP-13 03H カセッテセット部 8 CASSETTE SET UNIT 8 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 322N100221A D 2 329N100048 E 3 310S7002016 E 4 319N101179 D 5 322N100229 D 6 362N100299 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing カム Cum 平行ピン Straight Pin 軸 Shaft 軸受 Bearing 受 Stopper CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 2 4 4 1 2 2 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-13 SP-14 03I カセッテセット部 9 CASSETTE SET UNIT 9 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 356Y102073 D 2 334N3677 D 3 322N100221A D 4 322SY121 D 5 388N100539 D 6 388N100540 D 7 322SY121 D 8 334N100381A D 9 334N100380A D 10 327N100243 D 11 322SB056 D 12 318N100087 D 13 388N100960 D 14 360N100536A D 15 322SP205 D 16 360N100537A D 17 388N100439 D 18 363N101378A E 19 319N102771 D 20 360N100538A D 21 322SB052 D 22 388N100961 D 23 322N100385 D 24 322N100385 D 25 327N100246 D 26 327N100286A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ブラケット Bracket ゴムローラ Rubber Roller ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing すべり軸受 Plain Bearing ばね Spring ばね Spring すべり軸受 Plain Bearing ローラ Roller ローラ Roller 歯車 Gear ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ブッシュ Bushing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ハウジング Housing ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ハウジング Housing ばね Spring ガイド Guide 軸 Shaft ハウジング Housing ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 軸受 Bearing 軸受 Bearing 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 4 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-14 SP-15 03J カセッテセット部 10 CASSETTE SET UNIT 10 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 341N100323A D 2 334N2392 E 3 341N100324 D 4 388N100546 D 5 322N100230 D 6 328N100017 D 7 362N100337 D 8 322N100200 D 9 388N100630 D 10 322N100199 D 11 388N100629 D 12 146S0102 D 13 363N101284A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME アーム Arm 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller アーム Arm ばね Spring 軸受 Bearing 爪 Ratchet 受 Guide ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ガイド Guide CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SA9 1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-15 SP-16 03K カセッテセット部 11 CASSETTE SET UNIT 11 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 310Y100005B 2 *** D 3 322N1017B E 4 341N100643A D 5 322N100230 6 *** D 7 363N2505B 8 *** D 9 322SY101 D 10 388N100545 D 11 322N100230 D 12 388N100173C E 13 315S0050 E 14 341N100068F E 15 310S7002016 E 16 319N101175B E 17 319N102468 E 18 357N101030 D 19 322N100044A D 20 146S0102 E 21 356N108566 E 22 353N100163A E 23 319N102469 D 24 338N100026B 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 ピン PART NAME Pin QTY. 1 すべり軸受アーム軸受 Plain Bearing Arm Bearing 1 1 4 ガイド Guide 1 すべり軸受ばね軸受ねじりコイルバネ止め輪アーム平行ピン軸軸台すべり軸受ホトインタラプタブラケットシャーシ軸リング Plain Bearing Spring Bearing Torsion Coil Spring Snap Ring Arm Straight Pin Shaft Shaft Base Plain Bearing Photo Sensor Bracket Chassis Shaft Ring Compression Coil Spring Guide Stopper Plain Bearing Base Rail Shaft Ball Bearing Guide E-Ring 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 D 25 388N100154 圧縮コイルばね D D D E D E D D E 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 363N100240D 332N100350A 322SY097 357N100097C 365N100009D 319N101198A 322SP202 363N101408 315S3360040 受ストッパすべり軸受台レール軸ころがり軸受ガイドＥ形止め輪 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SA16 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 SP-16 SP-17 03L カセッテセット部 12 CASSETTE SET UNIT 12 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 146S0102 D 2 107Y0179A E 3 315S0050 E 4 319N101284A D 5 388N100439 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ソレノイド Solenoid 止め輪 Snap Ring 軸 Shaft ばね Spring CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 SA2 1 SOLA1 2 1 1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-17 SP-18 03M カセッテセット部 13 CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 362N100294B D 2 332N100349A D 3 387N100023 D 4 332N100350A D 5 362N100240A 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 受ストッパ帯電防止材ストッパ受 PART NAME Guide Plate Stopper Antistatic Brush Stopper Guide CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 1 1 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-18 SP-19 04A 消去部 1 ERASURE UNIT 1 RANK REF. PART NO. A 1 334Y5010G E 2 350N101279 D 3 327N100286A D 4 322N100203 E 5 362N100293B A 6 334N100195C D 7 332N0620 D 8 327N0208 D 9 322SF267 D 10 840Y100299 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 ブラシローラ蓋平歯車ころがり軸受受ブラシローラストッパ平歯車ころがり軸受消去部 PART NAME Brush Roller Cover Spur Gear Ball Bearing Box Brush Roller Stopper Spur Gear Ball Bearing Eraser Unit CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 2 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-19 SP-20 04B 消去部 2 ERASURE UNIT 2 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 840Y100300 D 2 407Y100009 A 3 603Y100094A D 4 360Y100395 D 5 327N100288 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 PART NAME 消去部 Erasure Unit 反射板 Reflective Plate フィルタ Filter ランプアセンブリ Lamp Assembly 平歯車 Supr Gear CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 1 1 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-20 SP-21 05 05 光学部 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 839Y100052 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 光学部 PART NAME QTY. Scanning Optics Unit 1 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-21 SP-22 06 06 集光部 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT RANK REF. 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 PART NO. D 1 113Y100317G D 2 606Y120002 PART NAME QTY. ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 (PMT27A) (PMT27A) 集光ガイド Light-Collecting Guide 1 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-22 SP-23 07A 副走査部 1 SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 334N100162C D 2 386N1358 D 3 387N100024D 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 ローラブラケット帯電防止材 PART NAME Roller Bracket Antistatic Brush CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 3 1 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-23 SP-24 07B 副走査部 2 SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 327N100301 D 2 327N100576A D 3 327N100245 D 4 327N100240 D 5 327N100239 D 6 327N100612A D 7 327N100324A D 8 323N100076A D 9 337N0071B D 10 356N108212B D 11 118Y100162 D 12 388N101004 D 13 322SP211 D 14 334N100423 D 15 341Y100354B 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear ベルト Belt ホイール Flywheel ブラケット Bracket モータ Motor 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ローラ Roller ブラケット Bracket CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MZ1 1 4 1 1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-24 SP-25 07C 副走査部 3 SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 RANK REF. 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NO. D 1 113Y100409 D D D D D D D D D 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 334N100392 334N100393 388N100527 322SB051 322SB052 360N0494B 309S0166 337N0070A 323N1266 PART NAME ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly （SED27A） (SED27A) ゴムローラ Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 波座金 Special Washer ホイール Flywheel ベルト Belt CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SZ1 L = 47mm SP-25 SP-26 07D 副走査部 4 SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 602Y100002 D 2 387N100002A D 3 322SB051 D 4 327N100285 D 5 322SB057 D 6 322N100219 D 7 363N100689 D 8 388N100526 D 9 334Y100415 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ミラー Mirror 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 平歯車 Spur Gear ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 軸受 Bearing ガイド Guide 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring ローラ Center Roller Assy CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 L = 40mm 1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-26 SP-27 07E 副走査部 5 SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 388N100527 D 2 322SB052 D 3 360N0494B D 4 322SB051 D 5 309S0166 D 6 334N100392 D 7 334N100393 D 8 387N100021B 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 D 9 831Y100050 D D D 10 11 12 327N100248A 118Y100110A 146S0102 PART NAME 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing すべり軸受 Plain Bearing ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 波座金 Special Washer ゴムローラ Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 副走査ニップ Subscanning Grip アセンブリ Assembly 平歯車 Spur Gear ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 2 L = 42mm 2 2 2 1 1 1 4 SERIAL NO. REFER TO 1 1 1 1 MZ2 SZ2 SP-27 SP-28 07F 副走査部 6 SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 327N100286A D 2 388N100964 D 3 322SB056 D 4 360N100536A D 5 318N100087 6 *** D 7 360N100531B D 8 363N101378A E 9 319N102474A 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 D 10 388N101008 D D D D D D D D D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 322SP205 852Y100078B 356N108517B 356N108647A 118SX210 334N100379 334N100378 360N100547B 388N100957 PART NAME 平歯車 Spur Gear 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ハウジング Housing ブッシュ Bush QTY. 2 1 4 4 4 Housing Guide Shaft Compression Coil 圧縮コイルバネ Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 読取り部 Bar Code Reader ブラケット Bracket ブラケット Bracket ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor ゴムローラ Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Rubber Roller ハウジング Housing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 2 3 3 ハウジングガイド軸 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BCRC1 MC1 SP-28 SP-29 07G 副走査部 7 SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 318N100087 D 2 322SB056 D 3 388N100964 D 4 360N100536A D 5 322SP205 6 *** D 7 360N100531B D 8 363N101378A D 9 319N102474A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ブッシュ Bush ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ハウジング Housing ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ハウジングガイド軸 D 10 388N101008 圧縮コイルバネ D D D D D 11 12 13 14 15 146N100002 334N100376 334N100375 360N100547B 388N100957 ホトインタラプタゴムローラゴムローラハウジング引張りコイルばね Housing Guide Shaft Compression Coil Spring Photo Sensor Rubber Roller Rubber Roller Housing Extension Spring CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 2 4 1 4 4 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 SC9 SP-29 SP-30 07H 副走査部 8 SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 146S0102 D 2 356N107900B D 3 327N100626B D 4 327N100240 D 5 327N100601A D 6 118Y100110A D 7 388N101005 D 8 327N100134A D 9 327N100619A D 10 327N100625A D 11 341Y100348A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor ブラケット Bracket 歯車 Gear 平歯車 Spur Gear 歯車 Gear ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 平歯車 Spur Gear 歯車 Gear 歯車 Gear アーム Arm CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. REMARKS 1 SC1 1 1 1 1 1 MC2 1 2 3 1 1 SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-30 SP-31 07I 副走査部 9 SUB SCANNING UNIT 9 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 388N100531A D 2 322SB052 D 3 360N100539A D 4 319N102772 D 5 322SB056 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 D 6 334N100388 D 7 334N100387 D 9 388N100530A PART NAME 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing ハウジング Housing 軸 Collar ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Assembly Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Assembly 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 1 4 4 3 4 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO 1 1 1 SP-31 SP-32 07J 副走査部 10 SUB SCANNING UNIT 10 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 334Y100152 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 D 2 334N3619 D D 3 4 356N103592 146N0016B PART NAME ローラ Rubber Roller Rubber Roller ゴムローラ Assembly 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 3 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO 3 1 1 SC3 SP-32 SP-33 07K 副走査部 11 SUB SCANNING UNIT 11 RANK REF. PART NO. D 1 322N100221A D 2 341N100625 D 3 310S7002016 D 4 319N102616A 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 PART NAME ころがり軸受 Bearing アーム Arm 平行ピン Straight Pin 軸 Shaft CR-IR 359 Service Manual QTY. 2 2 2 1 REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO SP-33 SP-34 08 08 制御部 CONTROLLER RANK REF. 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 PART NO. C 1 113Y100319C C 2 113Y101016B C 3 125Y100119 D D 4 5 128N100091 120N100024 C 6 113Y101017A D 7 350N103065 PART NAME QTY. ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 (SND27A) (SND27A) ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 (PIF63A) (PIF63A) Power Supply (Alpha 電源 (Alpha II) 1 II) ブレーカ Breaker 1 ソケット Socket 1 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 (CPU63A) (CPU63A) カバー Cover 1 A 8 137S1417 ヒューズ FUSE 4 A 9 137S1419 ヒューズ FUSE 3 A 10 137S1420 ヒューズ FUSE 2 A 11 137S1421 ヒューズ FUSE 2 A 12 137S1423 ヒューズ FUSE 2 A 13 137S1459 ヒューズ FUSE 1 A 14.1 845Y100162 操作パネル Panel 1 A 14.2 845Y100162 操作パネル Panel 1 A A 14.3 845Y100168 14.4 845Y100169 操作パネル操作パネル Panel Panel 1 1 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO 48V/1A for CPU63A F7, F19 , for SND27A F8, for PIF63A F1 48V/1.6A for CPU63A F13, F20, for PIF63A F4 48V/2A for SND27A F9, F10 48V/3.2A for PIF63A F3, F7 48V/5A for PIF63A F2, F6 250V/8A for PIF63A F8 For Japan Except for USA, Japan For USA For USA(FMSU) SP-34 SP-35 09 09 オプション OPTION ■ 転倒防止金具キット／ Anti-topple retainer kit 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 356Y0475 E 2 356Y0502 E 3 356Y0499 E 4 356Y0498 E 5 347N2108 E 6 347N2109 E 7 317S1064 E 8 304S1000820 E E 9 10 309S0220008 309S0110008 E 11 304S5000820 E 12 305N100033 PART NAME QTY. ブラケット（前面用） Bracket 1 ブラケット（背面用） Bracket 1 ブラケット（左側面用） Bracket 1 ブラケット（右側面用） Bracket 1 スペーサ（1mm） Spacer 6 スペーサ（2mm） Spacer 4 キャップ Cap 2 Hexagon head socket 六角ボルト（8x20） 2 Bolt バネ座金（SW8） Spring washer 6 平座金（W8） Plain washer 6 六角穴付ボタンボルト Bolt 4 （8x20）アンカーナット（Na8） Anchor nut 4 CR-IR 359 Service Manual REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO －－－－－－－－－－－－ SP-35 SP-36 10 10 RANK REF. PART NO. E 1 136Y101851B E 2 136Y101881B E 3 136Y102103 E 4 136Y104566A 5 *** E 6 136Y104568B E 7 136Y104569B E 8 136Y104570A E 9 136Y104572A E 10 136Y104573B E 11 136Y104574B E 12 136Y104575B E 13 136Y104576B E 14 136Y104577B E 15 136Y104578B E 16 136Y104579B E 17 136Y104581A E 18 136Y104583A E 19 136Y104588 E 20 136Y104589 E 21 136Y8545 E 22 136Y8890 E 23 136Y8891 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 ケーブル CABLE ケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブル PART NAME Cable Cable Cable Cable ケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブルケーブル Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable QTY. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REMARKS 1/3 2/3 2/3 1/3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1/3 1/3 1/3 2/3 2/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 1/3 3/3 3/3 1/3 1/3 2/3 2/3 1/3 2/3 2/3 CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-36 SP-37 11 11 回路図 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 7 ACｲﾝﾚｯﾄ A 136Y104567 L 電源ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ N E ［米国］ 136N0427 ［英国］ 136N0450 ［欧州］ 136N0377 ［中国］ 136N0418 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU LINE_N UL1617-AWG14緑/黄 1 2 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU NFB 1 UL1015-AWG16黒 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU UL1015-AWG16白 LOAD_N 2 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU SLOT1/2 L1 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU N1 UL1015-AWG16緑/黄 PIF2 PIF3 PIF3 POWER ON GND +12V(AUX) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) GND +5V GND PIF1 +24V GND POWER ON +12V(AUX) DF5A-8DP-5DSA(05) GND +5V GND PIF4 +15V +15V GND GND GND -15V -15V GND NC 1 +24V GND DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22A-1416SCF PIF1 1 2 3 4 SLOT4-CH1 UL1007-AWG22赤 1 UL1007-AWG22黒 2 SLOT4-CH1 5 6 7 8 FG_ PS-250-2B SPS-21T-250 FG1 SLOT4-CH2 FV2-4 FV2-4 9 10 SLOT4-CH2 UL1007-AWG22黒 1 UL1007-AWG22青 2 FGa DF5A-10DS-5C DF5-1822SC DF5A-10DP -5DSA(05) PS-250-2B SPS-21T-250 1 FV2-5 FV2-5A UL1015-AWG14黒 AlphaⅡ-450P /TDK G1 PIF2 1 2 AC/DC電源 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU 136Y8545 FG 1 LOAD_L UL1015-AWG14橙 10 136Y104568 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DF5A-8DS-5C DF5-1822SC UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 1 2 3 4 +15ASIN GND_A -15ASIN GND_A 2 3 4 CPU3 113Y101016 136Y104581 1 SLOT5-CH2 UL1007-AWG18黒 1 SND14 2 SND14 PIF5 PS-250-2B SPS-21T-250 136Y104569 PIF5 +5V 2 +24V 1 3 4 2 4 5 5268-06A GND DF5A-4DP-5DSA(05) GND UL1007-AWG22黒 UL1007-AWG22橙 3 C DF1E-2S-2.5C DF1B-2428SCA DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA(01) SND27A VCC GND +24V GND 1 2 3 4 DF5A-4DS-5C DF5-1822SC DF1E-2S-2.5C DF1B-2428SCA SND2 SND2 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 1 AUX D DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA(01) CPU3 PS-250-2B SPS-21T-250 SLOT5-CH2 B DF5A-4DP-5DSA(05) DF5A-4DS-5C DF5-1822SC 2 C 1/2 DF5A-8DP-5DSA(05) 1 DF5A-4S-5C DF5-1822SC 113Y101017 CPU18 CPU18 PIF4 A CPU63A POWER ON GND VH_AUX GND VCC GND VCC_24PS GND_P 1 DF5A-8DS-5C DF5-1822SC DF5A-4P -5DSA(05) CPU1 CPU1 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 UL1007-AWG22橙 2 11 PIF63A SLOT5-CH1 UL1007-AWG18赤 1 SLOT5-CH1 9 1 136N0417 LINE_L UL1015-AWG16黒 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU N UL1015-AWG16白 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU E UL1015-AWG16緑/黄 SPS-61T-250 DS-250PU 1 136N0416 ［国内］（患者環境内） L 1 B ［国内］（患者環境外） SLOT1/2 1 FV2-4 SLOT1/2_ 1 FV2-4 136Y104566 136Y101851 8 CAN TX CAN RX 6 5 2 4 3 UL1007-AWG28赤 UL1007-AWG28黒 2 2 1 DF5A-4DS-5C DF5-1822SC 113Y100319 DF1B-4DP-5DSA(05) 1/2 D UL1007-AWG22灰 6 SND8 5264-06 5263PBTL PIF6 FAN_ON/OFF GND DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01) DF1B-6P-2.5DSA(01) 消去部 E 消去ﾕﾆｯﾄ内ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ E PIF8 136Y104583 UL1007-AWG22灰 UL1007-AWG22灰 UL1007-AWG22灰 2 a CE1 3 UL1007-AWG22灰 UL1007-AWG22灰 UL1007-AWG22灰 CN1 F ERS1-CN1 2 3 4 113N101030 5 6 XHP-6 SXH-001T-P0.6 CN1 〈2〉ERS37A 113N101030 2 DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01) b CE1 PIF9 3 136Y104570 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 UL1007-AWG18橙 5559-06P 5557-06R 5558PBTL 5556PBTL ERS2-CN1 CNB61 UL1007-AWG22灰1 UL1007-AWG22灰2 UL1007-AWG22灰3 UL1007-AWG22灰4 1 G 1 PSU-CN3 PSU-CN3S UL1007-AWG22灰1 1 UL1007-AWG22灰4 4 UL1007-AWG22灰2 2 UL1007-AWG22灰5 5 UL1007-AWG22灰3 3 UL1007-AWG22灰6 6 1 〈1〉ERS37A FAN_+24V FAN_ON/OFF FAN_+24V GND FAN_+24V GND 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 6 PIF7 PIF7 +24V +24V +5V GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 DF5A-6DS-5C DF5-1822SC F DF1B-2P-2.5DSA(01) PIF10 DF5A-6DP-5DSA(05) DF1B-3P-2.5DSA(01) →CNB61-P G SND4/5/6 流用 136Y108921 XHP-6 SXH-001T-P0.6 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-2022SCA 1 FN5.5-4 TBC3.5SQ(0.12) 1 FN5.5-4 H ＜注意事項＞対応コード設計日 2013.04.18 1 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 - 機種 5039 ユニット - 名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α コード設計者製図者検図者萩原新保木村 9 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 承認者五十嵐（主） 10 Z22N5039000 H Rev. 富士フイルム株式会社頁 1 3 11 SP-37 SP-38 11 11 回路図 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2 4 3 光学部 136Y104589 LDD5 LDD5 LDD27A A PD 104Y100007 136Y101881 PD-CN1 2 LD 124Y10022 2 3 113Y100312 4 5 UL1061-AWG26白 1 2 7 3 8 4 LD-CN1 9 UL1061-AWG26黒 UL1061-AWG26白 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 2 1 5 10 6 11 7 12 8 13 DSLD-200P-3-FSH 14 DF13-8S-1.25C DF13-2630SCFA 15 16 B 17 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CPU5 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 3 PMT27A C 5 6 113Y100317 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 D 20 21 22 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TXD DF1B-22DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 25 6 GND RTS CTS BUFF_ON_OFF GND 8 7 VCC GND VCC_AUX GND KEY0 IN KEY1 IN KEY2 IN KEY3 IN KEY4 IN KEY5 IN DMGP10 PLED0 OUT PLED1 OUT PLED2 OUT PLED3 OUT BZR OUT STBY BL_ON_OFF1 BL_ON_OFF2 GND DF1B-20DP-2.5DSA(01) CPU20 VCC EJECT_IN GND LLED_OUT GND DF1B-22DP-2.5DSA(01) 26 27 CPU63A 28 29 113Y101017 30 31 DF1B-5P-2.5DSA(01) 2/2 32 CPU6 33 R2 GND R3 GND R4 GND R5 GND R6 GND R7 GND G2 GND G3 GND G4 GND G5 GND G6 GND G7 GND B2 GND B3 GND B4 GND B5 GND B6 DATA_OE B7 GND VCLK GND HSYNC VSYNC 34 E HIF3BA-34D-2.54C HIF3-2428SCA PMT2 PMT2 CPU13 CPU13 UL1553-1.5D-2V 2 1 2 1 SML001 UM-QP-1.5VCR3A(40) UM-R-PC(40) F SYN27A POL-CN1 Polygon 1 615N100006 3 2 4 5 6 G 2 3 113Y100314 136Y102103 SYN27A-CN2 UL1061-AWG26黒 1 UL1061-AWG26黒 2 UL1061-AWG26黒 3 UL1061-AWG26黒 4 UL1061-AWG26黒 5 UL1061-AWG26黒 6 7 7 8 8 136Y8891 1 4 5 SYN2 6 7 SYN3 8 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG24灰 8P-SCN SCN-001T-P1.0 1 2 ZHR-8 SZH-002T-P0.5 XADRP-08V SXA-001T-P0.6 B08B-XADSS -N(LF)(SN) 3 UL1007-AWG26灰 4 5 SYN1 6 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 CNZ31 UL1007-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26茶 UL1007-AWG26灰 6P-SCN SCN-001T-P1.0 CPU4 1 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB 136Y8890 SYN23A-CN1 CNZ32-P 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 DF1B-6EP-2.5RC DF1-PD2428SCB UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SED27A 113Y100316 1 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 2 3 2 3 4 DF1E-4S-2.5C DF1B-2428SCA 4 3 2 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 3 PIDXL GND PONL POKL GND VCC_24PS B06B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) CPU19 V5_D GND 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 DF1E-4S-2.5C DF1B-2428SCA 5 POL_HR_ON 2 CPU14 1 (SZ1) 4 DF1B-6DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA SED H 6 CPU19 UL1007-AWG28灰 CPU4 7 5 XADRP-08V SXA-001T-P0.6 CNZ31-P 1 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 8 SSL SSH DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01) CPU14 HIF3BA-40PA-2.54DSA(71) SED1L SED2L V5_D GND 9 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 10 8 8 11 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 12 DF1B-12DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA CPU5-S UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 CPU5-P UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 XAP-03V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 XARR-03V SXAM-001T-P0.6 CPU9 PNL1 136Y104573 1 2 1 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 18 19 18 19 20 20 DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 3 BCRC1 ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞ BCR5342H-FFF /NECｲﾝﾌﾛﾝﾃｨｱ PNL1 VCC GND VCC_AUX GND KEY0 KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 LED0 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 BUZ STBY BUFF_ON_OFF BL_ON_OFF1 BL_ON_OFF2 NC C D DF1B-20DP-2.5DSA(01) PNL63A 1 2 CTS SG VCC(+5) TXD RTS RXD INZONE B CPU20 UL1061-AWG26灰 113Y101015 LCD 4 5 DF1B-5S-2.5R DF1B-2428SCA 136Y104572 CPU6 SRV-28-20PS TFT-LCDﾓﾆﾀｰ COM35T3829GLC /ORTUSTECH 付属品 PNL2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 HIF3BA-40D-2.54C HIF3-2226SCC CPU-FG 1 CNZ32 SYN23A-CN3 BCR UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26黒 UL1061-AWG26赤 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 FV1.25-M4 PNL-FG HIF3BA-40D-2.54C HIF3-2226SCC PNL2 FPC 67pin R2 GND R3 GND R4 FH26G-67S-0.3SHBW GND R5 GND R6 GND R7 GND G2 GND G3 GND G4 GND G5 GND G6 GND G7 GND B2 GND B3 GND B4 GND B5 GND B6 DATA_OE B7 GND VCLK GND HSYNC VSYNC E 3mmﾋﾟｯﾁ金ﾒｯｷ F G HIF3BA-40PA-2.54DSA(71) FV1.25-M4 機種 5039 ユニット - 名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α コード DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA(01) Z22N5039000 H Rev. 富士フイルム株式会社 6 A (2/2) A 4 RXD 23 24 136Y104589 2 3 DF1B-12DP -2.5DSA(01) HVMONH HVMONL +15VOKH +15VOKL HVSH HVSL VCC+15AS GND_A VCC+15AS GND_A VCC+15AS GND_A VCC-15AS GND_A ERSH ERSL LEDSIGH LEDSIGL LEDONH LEDONL VION_H VION_L 1 CPU5 1 VCC CPU17 CPU17 4 11 LAN ｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ CPU9 PMT1 2 10 LAN 260mm DF1B-18DP -2.5DSA(01) DF1B-18DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 1 9 136Y104588 V5_D GND V5_D GND LDONH LDONL LDOKH LDOKL LDIFH LDIFL VREF_DA GND V5_D LD_IDLEL LD_TMPH A0 A1 EN 1 DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 集光部 8 CPU15 CPU15 19 20 7 (1/2) A UL1007-AWG28黒 UL1007-AWG28赤 UL1007-AWG28黒 UL1007-AWG28赤 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 1 6 1 DSLD-508P-2-FSH LDD-CN7 LDD7 UL1061-AWG26黒 6 5 1 1 7 8 9 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 10 頁 2 3 11 SP-38 SP-39 11 11 回路図 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2 4 3 ｶｾｯﾃIN検出 136Y104574 SA1 1 146S0102 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 179228-3 179518-1 A SA2 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出 1 SA2 2 3 146S0102 179228-3 179518-1 SA3 異物ｼｬｯﾀｰ検出 SA3 1 2 146S0102 6 5 SA1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 179228-3 179518-1 SA10 B ｶｾｯﾃ新旧判別 SA10 17 18 DF1B-18DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 1 2 146S0102 C ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ判別 SA16 146S0102 DF1B-18DP-2.5DSA(01) 2 CNB61← 3 3 4 179228-3 179518-1 SA16 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 消去ﾕﾆｯﾄ内ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ SND11 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 2 5 6 MT4OUTA +24V_4 MT4OUTB MT4OUTAB +24V_4 MT4OUTBB MT5OUTA +24V_6 MT5OUTB MT5OUTAB +24V_5 MT5OUTBB +24V_8 24VDRV2 DCM1DRV1 DCM1DRV2 DF1B-6EP-2.5RC DF1-PD2428SCB 179228-3 179518-1 SA7 開蓋駆動 HP検出 SA7 SND5 1 2 146S0102 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 2 3 179228-3 179518-1 4 5 SA8 D 閉蓋駆動 HP検出 SA8 6 1 2 146S0102 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 8 9 10 179228-3 179518-1 11 12 SA9 ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓｶｾｯﾃ判別 SA9 1 2 146S0102 3 13 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 14 15 DF1B-16DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA SND4 SA11 ｶｾｯﾃOUT検出 SA11 146S0102 3 E 閉蓋位置検出 SA12 146S0102 SA4-2 IP落下検出 146S0083 (受光) F SA4-1 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 2 3 179228-3 179518-1 SA12 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 179228-3 179518-1 SA4-2 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 11 12 2 3 1 2 146N0016 3 DF1B-14DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA SND3 1 SC3 136Y104576 SC9 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 SC3 IP検出1 1 2 146N0016 ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓ24x30IP検出 SC9 SZ2 136Y104577 SZ2 2 146S0102 H 3 SC1 ﾀｰﾝﾛｰﾗﾆｯﾌﾟ兼ﾎｺﾘ除去HP検出 SC1 148S0102 179228-3 179518-1 1 2 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 179228-3 179518-1 SC-S Vcc Vout 2 GND 3 179228-3 179518-1 SZ2/SC1-P UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 146N0010 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 SZ2/SC1-S1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 2 SC-P 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-12ES-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-12EP-2.5RC DF1-PD2428SCB 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-6EP-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB 3 3 DF1B-12DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA SND7 3 4 5 6 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 M/S-S 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 3 4 5 6 1 3 6 XAP-06V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 MA3 1 12 13 3 14 4 15 15 5 16 16 16 6 17 XAP-06V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 20 XADRP-20V SXA-001T-P0.6 SND11 SND4 SND12 FANONOFFDRV FANHILOWDRV VCC_S12 SENSOR12 GND VCC_S13 SENSOR13 GND VCC_S14 SENSOR14 GND SENSOR15 FANB1_ALM GND XADR-20V SXAM-001T-P0.6 XADRP-20V SXA-001T-P0.6 1 2 4 4 5 B 117mm UL1430-AWG24 3 107Y0179A SOLA1 2 1 172337-1 170363-4 SVA1 UL1007-AWG28青 1 UL1007-AWG28青 2 3 吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ 118SX213 SOLA1 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 XAP-02V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 SVA2 UL1007-AWG28青 1 UL1007-AWG28青 2 6 7 8 9 10 IPﾘｰｸ C 11 12 XAP-02V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 MA4 MA2/4-P MA2/4-S UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 2 UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 4 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5 UL1007-AWG22青 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 XAP-06V-1 UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 SXA-001T-P0.6 MA2 XADR-08V UL1007-AWG22青 1 SXAM-001T-P0.6 UL1007-AWG22青 2 XADRP-08V SXA-001T-P0.6 13 14 15 16 17 18 XADRP-18V SXA-001T-P0.6 SND12 PA1-P UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青 1 2 PA1-S 2 1 1 2 XAP-02V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 PA1 UL1007-AWG28青 1 UL1007-AWG28青 2 3 179228-2 179610-1 4 179228-4 179610-1 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 179228-2 179610-1 292254-2 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞSOL 134S0059 SVA1 5 3 GND MA3 2 14 17 A 5 13 18 開蓋駆動ﾓｰﾀ 118SX213 4 12 19 MA1 2 15 14 11 MA1 136Y104579 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 134S0059 SVA2 吸着切替 MA4 搬送ﾓｰﾀ 118SX213 D 155mm UL1007-AWG22赤 + UL1007-AWG22黒 - 150mm UL1007-AWG22赤 + UL1007-AWG22黒 - 閉蓋駆動ﾓｰﾀ MA2 ｽﾘｰﾋﾟｰｽ 118Y100083 IP吸着 PA1 133Y100031 XARR-03V SXAM-001T-P0.6 E MC2 C A BCOM B A/ ACOM B/ 1 2 118SX200 MC2 3 4 5 6 ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除兼ﾎｺﾘ除去ﾓｰﾀ STP-42D2046 /ｼﾅﾉｹﾝｼ PHR-6 SPH-002T-P0.5S SND10 DF1B-14DP -2.5DSA(01) MT6OUTA +24V_6 MT6OUTB MT6OUTAB +24V_6 MT6OUTBB MT7OUTA +24V_7 MT7OUTB MT7OUTAB +24V_7 MT7OUTBB +24V_9 24VDRV3 +24V_9 24VDRV4 SND3 VCC_S SENSOR16 GND VCC_S SENSOR17 GND B18B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) VCC_S SENSOR18 GND VCC_S SENSOR19 GND DF1B-12DP-2.5DSA(01) MC1 SND10 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 9 10 11 XAP-06V-1 SXA-001T-P0.6 MZ1 UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青 14 15 16 F 幅寄せ搬送ﾓｰﾀ 6 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 8 13 118SX213 4 5 7 12 MC1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 6 XARR-06V SXAM-001T-P0.6 XADRP-16V SXA-001T-P0.6 MZ1 3 4 副走査ﾓｰﾀ C052X-9012K /ｵﾘｴﾝﾀﾙﾓｰﾀ G XAP-06V-1 MZ2 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 SND7 A BCOM B A/ ACOM B/ 1 2 4 5 6 VCC_S20 SEN20 GND VCC_S21 SEN21 GND 118SX200 MZ2 3 ｿﾌﾄﾆｯﾌﾟ駆動ﾓｰﾀ STP-42D2046 /ｼﾅﾉｹﾝｼ PHR-6 SPH-002T-P0.5S 7 DF1B-8DS-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA 179228-3 179518-1 1 2 10 2/2 DF1B-16DP -2.5DSA(01) 136Y104575 B UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 179228-3 179518-1 1 M/S-P UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 1 SND27A UL1061-AWG26灰 G 9 14 SG1 SG1 SND9 13 PHR-3 SPH-002T-P0.5S ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除HP検出 VCC_S7 SENSOR7 GND VCC_S8 SENSOR8 GND VCC_S9 B18B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) SENSOR9 GND VCC_S10 SENSOR10 GND VCC_S11 113Y100319 SENSOR11 GND PHR-4 SPH-002T-P0.5S SA4-1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 IP落下検出 146S0082 (発光) IP検出2 SND5 16 179228-3 179518-1 1 MT1OUTA +24V_1 MT1OUTB MT1OUTAB +24V_1 MT1OUTBB MT2OUTA +24V_2 MT2OUTB MT2OUTAB +24V_2 MT2OUTBB MT3OUTA +24V_3 MT3OUTB MT3OUTAB +24V_3 MT3OUTBB +24V_8 24VDRV2 B20B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) 1 SA6 SND9 VCC_S1 SENSOR1 GND VCC_S2 SENSOR2 GND VCC_S3 SENSOR3 GND VCC_S4 SENSOR4 GND VCC_S5 SENSOR5 GND VCC_S6 SENSOR6 GND 8 136Y104578 CNB61-P SA6 146S0102 7 SND6 3 179228-3 179518-1 吸盤HP検出 SND6 UL1007-AWG22青 1 機種 5039 ユニット - 名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α コード 8 DF1B-8DP-2.5DSA(01) 6 Z22N5039000 H Rev. 富士フイルム株式会社 7 8 9 CR-IR 359 Service Manual 10 頁 3 3 11 SP-39 SP-40 12 12 部品番号検索表 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 107Y0179A 03L-2 06-1 113Y100317G 08-1 113Y100319C 07C-1 113Y100409 08-2 113Y101016B 08-6 113Y101017A 07F-15 118SX210 03B-16 118SX301 03B-17 118SX301 03D-16 118SX301 03D-14 118Y100091A 07E-11 118Y100110A 07H-6 118Y100110A 07B-11 118Y100162 120N100024 08-5 08-3 125Y100119 128N100091 08-4 133Y100043 03F-9 134N100027A 03F-10 136Y101851B 10-1 136Y101881B 10-2 136Y102103 10-3 136Y104566A 10-4 136Y104568B 10-6 136Y104569B 10-7 136Y104570A 10-8 136Y104572A 10-9 136Y104573B 10-10 136Y104574B 10-11 136Y104575B 10-12 136Y104576B 10-13 136Y104577B 10-14 136Y104578B 10-15 136Y104579B 10-16 136Y104581A 10-17 136Y104583A 10-18 136Y104588 10-19 136Y104589 10-20 136Y8545 10-21 136Y8890 10-22 136Y8891 10-23 137S1417 08-8 137S1419 08-9 137S1420 08-10 137S1421 08-11 137S1423 08-12 137S1459 08-13 138S0218 01A-13 146N0016B 02A-5 146N0016B 07J-4 146N100002 07G-11 146S0082 03D-15 146S0083 03D-18 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 146S0102 03C-3 146S0102 03C-9 146S0102 03C-12 146S0102 03D-1 146S0102 03D-2 146S0102 03D-3 146S0102 03D-10 146S0102 03J-12 146S0102 03K-20 146S0102 03L-1 146S0102 07E-12 146S0102 07H-1 304S1000820 09-8 304S5000820 09-11 305N100033 09-12 02A-1 305S1110008 09-10 309S0110008 309S0166 07C-8 309S0166 07E-5 309S0220008 09-9 310S7002016 03D-13 310S7002016 03G-4 310S7002016 03G-6 310S7002016 03H-3 310S7002016 03K-15 310S7002016 07K-3 310Y100005B 03K-1 03F-14 315N0011 315S0050 03K-13 315S0050 03L-3 315S3360040 03K-34 317S1064 09-7 318N100087 03I-12 318N100087 07F-5 318N100087 07G-1 03G-5 319N101169 03K-16 319N101175B 03H-4 319N101179 03G-18 319N101180A 03K-31 319N101198A 319N101284A 03L-4 319N101344 03B-15 319N102468 03K-17 319N102469 03K-23 319N102474A 07F-9 319N102474A 07G-9 319N102616A 07K-4 319N102762 03A-8 319N102763 03A-6 319N102764 03A-19 319N102771 03I-19 319N102772 07I-4 322N100044A 03K-19 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 322N100199 03J-10 322N100200 03J-8 322N100203 04A-4 322N100219 07D-6 322N100221A 03B-14 322N100221A 03D-17 322N100221A 03G-2 322N100221A 03H-1 322N100221A 03I-3 322N100221A 07K-1 322N100228 03B-12 322N100228 03D-5 322N100229 03H-5 322N100230 03J-5 322N100230 03K-5 322N100230 03K-11 322N100232 03G-9 322N100385 03I-23 322N100385 03I-24 322N1017B 03K-3 322N1036B 03A-3 322SB040 03G-1 322SB051 07C-5 322SB051 07D-3 322SB051 07E-4 322SB052 03I-21 322SB052 07C-6 322SB052 07E-2 322SB052 07I-2 322SB056 03I-11 322SB056 07F-3 322SB056 07G-2 322SB056 07I-5 322SB057 07D-5 322SB058 03B-13 322SB058 03D-4 322SF267 04A-9 322SF268 03G-19 322SP202 03K-32 322SP205 03I-15 322SP205 07F-11 322SP205 07G-5 07B-13 322SP211 322SY097 03A-5 322SY097 03K-28 322SY101 03K-9 322SY121 03I-4 322SY121 03I-7 323N100076A 07B-8 323N1266 07C-10 327N0208 04A-8 327N100134A 07H-8 327N100239 07B-5 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 327N100240 07B-4 327N100240 07H-4 327N100243 03I-10 327N100245 07B-3 327N100246 03I-25 327N100247 03D-9 327N100248A 07E-10 327N100285 07D-4 327N100286A 03I-26 327N100286A 04A-3 327N100286A 07F-1 327N100288 04B-5 327N100289 03B-7 327N100289 03B-8 327N100290 03B-6 327N100290 03B-9 327N100292 03D-11 327N100292 03G-3 327N100293 03D-12 327N100294A 03B-10 327N100294A 03D-7 327N100298 03D-8 327N100301 07B-1 327N100324A 07B-7 327N100576A 07B-2 327N100601A 07H-5 327N100612A 07B-6 327N100619A 07H-9 327N100625A 07H-10 327N100626B 07H-3 03A-2 327N1101607B 327N6101401E 03A-1 328N100017 03J-6 329N100039 03C-5 329N100048 03H-2 329N100049 03B-5 332N0620 04A-7 332N100349A 03M-2 332N100350A 03K-27 332N100350A 03M-4 334N100072D 03G-12 334N100159 03A-18 334N100162C 07A-1 334N100191 03G-17 334N100192 03G-11 334N100193 03G-10 334N100195C 04A-6 334N100375 07G-13 334N100376 07G-12 334N100378 07F-17 334N100379 07F-16 334N100380A 03I-9 334N100381A 03I-8 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 334N100387 07I-7 334N100388 07I-6 334N100392 07C-2 334N100392 07E-6 334N100393 07C-3 334N100393 07E-7 334N100423 07B-14 334N2392 03J-2 334N3619 07J-2 334N3677 03I-2 334Y100152 07J-1 334Y100378A 03G-16 334Y100414 03A-16 334Y100415 07D-9 334Y5010G 04A-1 337N0070A 07C-9 337N0071B 07B-9 338N100018 03G-13 338N100026B 03K-24 341N0937B 03B-11 341N0937B 03D-6 341N100068F 03K-14 341N100231A 03B-4 341N100232A 03C-4 341N100234 03B-1 341N100234 03C-6 341N100235C 03G-7 341N100275 03G-15 341N100277 03B-2 341N100277 03C-7 341N100278A 03B-3 341N100278A 03C-8 341N100279 03C-11 341N100323A 03J-1 341N100324 03J-3 341N100625 07K-2 341N100643A 03K-4 341Y0341 03F-19 341Y100348A 07H-11 341Y100354B 07B-15 342N100050A 03E-2 345N100602E 01B-8 345N100604B 01A-3 345N101356D 01B-3 345N1742G 01A-6.1 345N1742G 01A-6.2 345N1742G 01A-6.3 345N1743D 01A-8.1 345N1743D 01A-8.2 345N1743D 01A-8.3 345N1884C 01A-6.4 345N1885A 01A-8.4 346N1254E 03A-20 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 347N2108 09-5 347N2109 09-6 350N101279 04A-2 350N101280 03E-6 350N103065 08-7 350N3235C 01B-5.1 350N3235C 01B-5.2 350N3235C 01B-5.3 350N3310B 01B-5.4 350Y100665 03A-13.3 350Y100666 03A-9.3 350Y100667 03A-13.4 350Y100668 03A-9.4 350Y102600A 01A-4.1 350Y102600A 01A-4.2 350Y102600A 01A-4.3 350Y102657 01A-1.1 350Y102658A 01B-1.1 350Y102658A 01B-1.2 350Y102658A 01B-1.3 350Y102693 01A-1.2 350Y102694 01A-1.3 350Y102695 01A-1.4 350Y102697A 01A-4.4 350Y102699 01B-1.4 350Y102717 01B-7.4 350Y102723 01B-7.1 350Y102723 01B-7.2 350Y102723 01B-7.3 350Y1951C 03A-15 350Y1953B 03A-13.1 350Y1954B 03A-13.2 350Y1957A 03A-9.1 350Y1958A 03A-9.2 350Y2082 01B-4.1 350Y2082 01B-4.2 350Y2082 01B-4.3 350Y2083A 01B-4.4 350N2974H 01A-10 353N100163A 03K-22 353Y0073G 03A-21 03A-23 356N10111 356N103592 07J-3 356N103608 03F-16 356N103609 03F-17 356N103613 03F-2 356N107900B 07H-2 356N10790A 03A-22 356N108212B 07B-10 356N108517B 07F-13 356N108546A 03C-2 356N108566 03K-21 356N108647A 07F-14 SP-40 SP-41 12 12 部品番号検索表 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 356Y0406B 03A-7 356Y0407A 03A-4 356Y0457A 03A-14 356Y0458A 03A-10 356Y0475 09-1 356Y0498 09-4 356Y0499 09-3 356Y0502 09-2 356Y102073 03I-1 357N100097C 03K-29 357N101030 03K-18 360N0494B 07C-7 360N0494B 07E-3 360N100531B 07F-7 360N100531B 07G-7 360N100536A 03I-14 360N100536A 07F-4 360N100536A 07G-4 360N100537A 03I-16 360N100538A 03I-20 360N100539A 07I-3 360N100547B 07F-18 360N100547B 07G-14 360Y100395 04B-4 362N100240A 03M-5 362N100293B 04A-5 362N100294B 03M-1 362N100297 03E-5 362N100299 03H-6 362N100337 03J-7 362N100751 03E-8 363N100240D 03K-26 363N100689 07D-7 363N100699 03E-3 363N101284A 03J-13 363N101378A 03I-18 363N101378A 07F-8 363N101378A 07G-8 363N101408 03K-33 363N2505B 03K-7 365N100009D 03K-30 02A-3 367S1109A 367S2084 02A-2 370N100063A 03F-15 370N100063A 03F-18 370N100717A 03F-3 370N100717A 03F-5 370N100718B 03F-7 370N100719A 03F-8 372N100063 03F-4 372S0049A 03F-1 372S0609 03F-6 376N0240B 01A-5 014-247-02C 01.31.2014 FM8221 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 376N0241B 01A-7 382N100266 03A-12 386N100269 03F-20 386N1266 03A-11 386N1358 07A-2 386N1374 01A-12 386N1375 01A-11 387N0138C 03A-24 387N100002A 07D-2 387N100021B 07E-8 387N100022A 02A-4 387N100023 03E-4 387N100023 03M-3 387N100024D 07A-3 388N100154 03K-25 388N100173C 03K-12 388N100439 03C-1 388N100439 03I-17 388N100439 03L-5 388N100526 07D-8 388N100527 07C-4 388N100527 07E-1 388N100530A 07I-9 388N100531A 07I-1 388N100532 03C-10 388N100533 03E-1 388N100536 03E-7 388N100537 03G-8 388N100538 03G-14 388N100539 03I-5 388N100540 03I-6 388N100545 03K-10 388N100546 03J-4 388N100629 03J-11 388N100630 03J-9 388N100957 07F-19 388N100957 07G-15 388N100960 03I-13 388N100961 03I-22 388N100964 07F-2 388N100964 07G-3 388N101004 07B-12 388N101005 07H-7 388N101008 07F-10 388N101008 07G-10 392N0009A 03F-13 405N101258 01B-6 405N102614 01A-2 405N102614 01B-2 405N102614 01B-9 407Y100009 04B-2 602Y100002 07D-1 603Y100094A 04B-3 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No 606Y120002 06-2 831Y100050 07E-9 839Y100052 05-1 840Y100299 04A-10 840Y100300 04B-1 845Y100162 08-14.1 845Y100162 08-14.2 845Y100168 08-14.3 845Y100169 08-14.4 852Y100078B 07F-12 Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No CR-IR 359 Service Manual Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No SP-41 SP-42 13 13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について ● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 ● サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されている記号に読替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意されている。 {SP:13_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts. Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100. l The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the service manual. {SP:13_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table} 2. ねじ類 ● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービスマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 2. Screws l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described. This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual. CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-42 SP-43 13 13 記号 Symbol 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 部品コード Parts code BR3x6 308S0401 BR3x10 308S0403 BR3x12 308S0404 BR3x32 308S0432 BR4x8 308S0406 BR4x25 308S0411 DT3x6 306S0101 *N4x8 301S2000408 PS3x6 306S0151 PS3x8 306S0152 *R8x20 304S1000820 T2x5 301S3750205 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 参考情報 Reference information 形状 Shape 部品名称 Parts name 材質、処理など Material/treatment, etc. 鋼ばね座金 + みがき丸座金座金組込み亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク十字穴付六角ボルトロメート Cross recessed 色：うすい白色 hexagon head Steel screw with spring Zinc plating/White trivalent and plain washers chromating Color: Light white 鋼亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク六角頭デルタイトネロメート色：うすい白色ジ Hexagon head Steel deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent chromating Color: Light white 記号 Symbol TP3x6 部品コード Parts code 参考情報 Reference information 形状 Shape 部品名称 Parts name 308S0414 TP4x8 308S0424 TP4x12 308S0426 WP3x4 303S0102 WP4x4 303S0107 六角頭 TP ネジ Cross recessed hexagon head TP screw 六角穴付き止めネジ（W ポイント） Hexagon socket head set screw (double -point) 材質、処理など Material/treatment, etc. 鋼亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価クロメート色：うすい白色 Steel Zinc plating/White trivalent chromating Color: Light white 鋼亜鉛メッキ + リン酸塩処理 Steel Zinc plating/Phosphate treatment ステンレス十字穴付なべ小ねじ不動態化処理 Cross recessed pan Stainless steel head screw Passive state treatment 六角頭樹脂用タッピ鋼ングねじ亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価クロ Hexagon head メート tapping screw for Steel Zinc plating/White plastic trivalent chromating ステンレス六角ボルト不動態化処理 Hexagon head Stainless steel screw Passive state treatment 鋼トラスねじ黒色 3 価クロメート Cross recessed Steel truss head screw Black trivalent chromating CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-43 SP-44 13 13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類 3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts 記号 Symbol 部品コード Parts code *E3 315S3360030 *E4 315S3360040 *E6 315S3360060 *E8 315S3360080 KL6 315S0051 *SW4 309S0220004 *SW8 309S0220008 *W4 309S0120004 *W8 309S0110008 *Na8 305S1110008 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 参考情報 Reference information 形状 Shape 部品名称 Parts name E 形止め輪 E ring 材質、処理など Material/treatment, etc. ステンレス不動態化処理 Stainless steel Passive state treatment KL リング K-CL ring ばね座金 Spring washer ステンレス不動態化処理 Stainless steel Passive state treatment 平座金 Plain washer ステンレス不動態化処理 Stainless steel Passive state treatment 六角ナット Hexagon nut ステンレス不動態化処理 Stainless steel Passive state treatment CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-44 SP-45 13 13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 4. 配線用部品 4. Wiring Parts 記号 Symbol CS-12C 部品コード Parts code 347S0913 EDS-0607U 316S2027 EDS-1 316S1121 参考情報 Reference information 形状 Shape 部品名称 Parts name スペーサ Spacer コードクランプ Code clamp 概略外形寸法など（mm） Approx. external dimensions (mm), etc. 10x16x10 (WxHxD) 14x9x4 (WxHxD) 20x10x4 (WxHxD) NK-4N 316S1006 NK-5N 316S1007 NK-6N 316S1008 RLMS 1V0 316S1273 形状 Shape 部品名称 Parts name コードクランプ Code clamp 概略外形寸法など（mm） Approx. external dimensions (mm), etc. 21x7x10 (WxHxD) 22x9x10 (WxHxD) 24x11x10 (WxHxD) 13x10x5 (WxHxD) RLMS 2V0 316S1274 RLWC 3SV0 316S1277 17x13x5 (WxHxD) コードクランプ Code clamp 24x27x6 (WxHxD) 20x10x5 (WxHxD) 316S1122 EDS-17L 318S1037 コードクランプ Code clamp 55x26x5 (WxHxD) KGCP-08-0 316S0476 クランプ clamp 10x19x10 (WxHxD) 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 部品コード Parts code コードクランプ Code clamp コードクランプ Code clamp EDS-2 記号 Symbol 参考情報 Reference information T-18R 316S1001 T-30R 316S1002 束線部品 Cable tie CR-IR 359 Service Manual 100x2.5 (LxW) 152x3.5 (LxW) SP-45 SP-46 13 13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring 5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。 5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in this Service Manual. ■ ねじ類 Screws 部品コード Parts code ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類 Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts 記号 Symbol 部品コード Parts code 301S2000408 *N4x8 305S1110008 301S3750205 T2x5 303S0102 303S0107 記号 Symbol *Na8 ■ 配線用部品 Wiring Parts 部品コード Parts code 記号 Symbol 316S0476 KGCP -08-0 309S0110008 *W8 316S1006 NK-4N WP3x4 309S0120004 *W4 316S1007 NK-5N WP4x4 309S0220004 *SW4 316S1008 NK-6N 304S1000820 *R8x20 309S0220008 *SW8 316S1121 EDS-1 306S0101 DT3x6 315S0051 KL6 316S1122 EDS-2 306S0151 PS3x6 315S3360030 *E3 316S1273 RLMS 1V0 306S0152 PS3x8 315S3360040 *E4 316S1274 RLMS 1V0 308S0401 BR3x6 315S3360060 *E6 316S2027 EDS-0607U 308S0403 BR3x10 315S3360080 *E8 318S1037 EDS-17L 308S0404 BR3x12 318S1164 LAMS-05 308S0406 BR4x8 308S0411 BR4x25 308S0414 TP3x6 308S0424 TP4x8 308S0426 TP4x12 308S0431 BR3x22 308S0432 BR3x32 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-46 SP-47 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01C 05.31.2013 FM6149 CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-47 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 Reason New release (FM6150) CR-IR 359 Service Manual Preventive Maintenance (PM) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected All pages PM-1 1. How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Section The preventive maintenance programs are based on the machine usage interval or the process count. Perform the specified preventive maintenance programs at the predefined intervals or when the predefined process count is reached. Since the maintenance programs differ depending on the respective intervals, they should be performed according to the Program List. The Preventive Maintenance Program List and the specified maintenance programs are listed below: → 1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List → 1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached → 1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached REFERENCE The process counts are based on a daily process count of 20 and annual operating days of 300. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-1 PM-2 1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List u INSTRUCTION u Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. Reference section Maintenance program Time requirements 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Periodic replacement parts Remarks 2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 2.1 Backing Up the Log      2.2 Checking the Error Log      2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time      3. Checking the Image/Conveyance      4. Pulling Out the Machine      5. Removing the Covers/Plates 5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years)  -  -  5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years) -  -  - Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch -  -  - 6. 7. Cassette Set Unit 7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit      7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit -  -  - 7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small) -  -  - 7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups -  -  - 7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers -  -  - 7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter -  -  - 7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of the Housing Unit -  -  - 7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit -  -  - 7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly -  -  - 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-2 PM-3 Reference section Maintenance program Time requirements 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Periodic replacement parts Remarks 8. Erasure Unit 8.1 Cleaning the Filter  -  -  8.2 Replacing the Filter -  (*1) -  (*1) - 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller      8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate -  -  - 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit      Filter 603Y0070 *1: Replace after use for 2 years or with a process count of 36,000. 9. Light-Collecting Guide 9.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly -  -  - 9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit -  -  - 9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide -  -  - 9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit -  -  - 9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly -  -  - Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch -  -  - 10. 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)  -  -  11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years) -  -  - 12. Securing the Machine      13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding      14. Checking the Image/Conveyance      15. Confirming the S Value      16. Checking the Error Log      014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-3 PM-4 1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached u INSTRUCTION u Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. Reference section Maintenance program Periodic Time replacement requirements parts Reference section Periodic Time replacement requirements parts Maintenance program 15. Confirming the S Value 16. Checking the Error Log Remarks l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 1 year, 3 years and 5 years, or when a process counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 is reached Reference section - Parts Name - Parts No. - Qty. - Remarks - Remarks 2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 2.1 Backing Up the Log 2.2 Checking the Error Log 2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 4. Pulling Out the Machine 5. Removing the Covers/Plates 5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years) 7. Cassette Set Unit 7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit 8. Erasure Unit 8.1 Cleaning the Filter 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years) 12. Securing the Machine 13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding 14. Checking the Image/Conveyance 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-4 PM-5 1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached Reference section Periodic Time replacement requirements parts Maintenance program 8. Erasure Unit u INSTRUCTION u Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. Reference section Maintenance program Periodic Time replacement requirements parts Remarks Backing Up the Log 2.2 Checking the Error Log 2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 4. Pulling Out the Machine 5. Removing the Covers/Plates 5.2 6. Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years) Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch 7. Cassette Set Unit 7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit 7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit 7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small) 7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups 7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers 7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter 7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of the Housing Unit 7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit 7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 8.2 Replacing the Filter 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller 8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit Filter 603Y0070 *1: Replace after use for 2 years or with a process count of 36,000. 9. Light-Collecting Guide 2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 2.1 Remarks 9.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly 9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit 9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide 9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit 9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates 11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years) 12. Securing the Machine 13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding 14. Checking the Image/Conveyance 15. Confirming the S Value 16. Checking the Error Log l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 2 years and 4 years, or when a process counts of 12,000 or 24,000 is reached Reference section 8.2 Parts Name Filter Parts No. 603Y0070 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Qty. Remarks 1 PM-5 PM-6 2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 2.1 (3) Click on to select the location where the data is to be backed up. After selection, click on [OK]. Verify the location for backup and click on [OK]. #1 Backing Up the Log (1) Start the RU PC-TOOL. REFERENCE The path for the RU PC-TOOL is as follows: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe (2) Select “LOG ALL” from the BACKUP items, and click on [EXECUTE]. #2 Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP RESTORE ALL RUs SETTING ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION TRACE LOGS HISTORY LOG LOG ALL SCN ALL DATA SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA SCN OPTICAL DATA Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU #2 RU IP ADDR BACKUP #3 #1 "LOG ALL" RESTORE ALL RUs SETTING FRRB602001.ai #4 → The window opens for prompting to select the location for backing up the data. FRRB602002.ai → Upon completion of the backup, the Complete window appears. (4) Click on [OK]. FRRB602003.ai → The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-6 PM-7 2.2 Checking the Error Log (1) Click on [ERROR DB]. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP RESTORE ALL RUs SETTING FRRB602004.ai → The ERROR-DB window opens. (2) Click on [UPDATE]. FRRB602005.ai (3) Select the log, and check to make sure that the error log is not abnormal. #1 #2 FRRB602006.ai (4) Click on . → The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-7 PM-8 2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time (1) (2) Click on the [LAMP] tab, and confirm the total count for the erasure lamp lighting. After the confirmation, click on [CANCEL]. Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. #1 → The EDIT HISTORY window opens. Configuration(C) EACH RU SETTING CONNECTION TEST RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU RU IP ADDR BACKUP RESTORE ALL RUs SETTING #2 FRRB602007.ai #3 FRRB602008.ai → The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-8 PM-9 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance (1) Check the image/conveyance. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-9 PM-10 4. Pulling Out the Machine (1) Power OFF the RU. (2) Loosen the nuts of the adjustable feet to make the machine movable. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 (3) Remove the power cable cover. (4) Disconnect the power cable. CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-10 PM-11 (5) Disconnect the I/F cable. (6) Pull out the machine to the working space. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-11 PM-12 5. Removing the Covers/Plates 5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years) (1) 6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch (1) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (SW11). Remove the front cover, the rear cover and the right-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} 5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years) (1) Remove the front cover, the rear cover, the right-hand side cover and the lefthand side cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} (2) Remove the dust-tight cover assembly. {MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly} (3) Remove the front plate, the rear plate, the right-hand side board box plate and the left-hand side plate. {MC:3.2_Plate} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-12 PM-13 7. Cassette Set Unit 7.1 7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small) (1) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA1), and lay down the roller (small) assembly inward. (2) Clean the roller (small) with a moistened cloth. Removing the Erasure Unit CAUTION Before turning on the lamp, make sure to install the erasure unit into the machine. Do not turn on the lamp by connecting the erasure unit to the machine and turning on the power while the erasure unit is outside the machine. (1) Remove the erasure unit. {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} 7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit (1) Remove the cassette set unit. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-13 PM-14 7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups (1) Clean the suction cups with a moistened cloth. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (1) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA3), and move the suction arm assembly to the uppermost position. (2) Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth while rotating the gear of the motor (MA4). (3) Rotate the gears of the motor (MA4) and the motor (MA3), and return the suction arm assembly and the roller (small) assembly to their initial positions. CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-14 PM-15 7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter (1) 7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of the Housing Unit Clean the antistatic member and the shutter. #1 #2 Clean the antistatic member with a vacuum cleaner. Clean the shutter with a vacuum cleaner. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 (1) Clean inside the machine and the antistatic member of the housing unit. #1 #2 Clean inside the machine with a vacuum cleaner. Clean the antistatic member with a vacuum cleaner. CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-15 PM-16 7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit (1) Reinstall the cassette set unit. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} 7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly (1) Clean the top cover assembly with a moistened cloth. (2) Reinstall the top cover assembly. {MC:5.2_Top Cover Assembly} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-16 PM-17 8. Erasure Unit 8.2 Replacing the Filter (1) 8.1 Cleaning the Filter (1) {MC:6.5_Filter} Remove the reflection plate. {MC:6.2_Reflection Plate} (2) Remove the filter. (2) Replace the filter with a new one. (3) Install the filter. u NOTE u Clean the guide with a vacuum cleaner. Keep the brush roller assembly and the reflection plate removed in this procedure. {MC:6.5_Filter} (2) FRRB608001.ai (3) Clean the filter with a moistened cloth. u NOTE u Do not clean the guide with a moistened cloth. Otherwise, it might peel off. (3) FRRB608002.ai 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-17 PM-18 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller (1) 8.4 Remove the brush roller. Cleaning the Reflection Plate (1) Clean the reflection plate with a moistened cloth. {MC:6.4_Brush Roller} (2) Clean the brush roller with a vacuum cleaner. (2) (5) FRRB608005.ai (2) Reinstall the reflection plate. {MC:6.2_Reflection Plate} FRRB608003.ai (3) Clean inside the bracket with a vacuum cleaner. (3) FRRB608004.ai (4) Reinstall the brush roller. {MC:6.4_Brush Roller} (5) Reinstall the brush roller assembly. {MC:6.3_Brush Roller Assembly} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-18 PM-19 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit (1) Reinstall the erasure unit. {MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-19 PM-20 9. Light-Collecting Guide 9.1 (1) u INSTRUCTIONS u - Use lens cleaning paper to clean the light-collecting surface. - Use four-fold two plies of the lens cleaning paper and moisten with dehydrated ethanol. - Use new sheets of the lens cleaning paper and clean until the paper does not catch smears. - Clean in one direction at a constant rate. Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly (1) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly. {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly} 9.2 Clean the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide. Removing the Light-Collecting Unit (1) Remove the light-collectiong unit. {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} 9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide CAUTIONS - Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide even when you are wearing gloves. - Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry sheet of lens cleaning paper. Otherwise, the guide might get damaged. - Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face. u INSTRUCTION u When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves. 9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit (1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit. {MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit} 9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly (1) Reinstall the post-reading conveyance guide assembly. {MC:9.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-20 PM-21 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch (1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S11). REFERENCE The error 11280 occurs if the machine is started with the high-voltage switch kept OFF. 11. 11.1 Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years) (1) Clean the covers. (2) Reinstall the front cover, the rear cover and the right-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} 11.2 (1) Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years) Reinstall the front plate, the rear plate, the right-hand side board box plate and the left-hand side plate. {MC:3.2_Plate} (2) Reinstall the front cover, the rear cover, the right-hand side cover and the lefthand side cover. {MC:3.1_Cover} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-21 PM-22 12. Securing the Machine (1) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable. (2) Move the machine to its retained position. (3) Lower the adjustable feet and fix the machine. 13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding (1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire connections are established in the same manner as for installation. REFERENCE Check the additional protecting ground wire only when the machine is installed in the patient environment. (2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are connected in the same manner as for installation. (3) Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained. 14. Checking the Image/Conveyance (1) Check the image/conveyance. {IN:12._Image/Conveyance Checks} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-22 PM-23 15. Confirming the S Value (1) Confirm the S value. 16. Checking the Error Log (1) {IN:13._Confirming the S Value} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Check the error log. {PM:2.2_Checking the Error Log} (2) Close the RU PC-TOOL window. (3) Turn OFF the power of Console. (4) Turn OFF the power of RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-23 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 01.31.2014 02 Reason New release (FM6150) All pages Corrections (FM8222) 1, 5, 47, 48, Appx IN-32 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Installation (IN) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected IN-1 1. 1.1 Specifications of Machine Dimensions and Weight n Dimensions W590 × D380 × H810 (mm) 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 1.2 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine n Moving Means Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4 n Fixing Means - Adjustable foot x4 - Anti-topple retainer: 1 set CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-1 IN-2 1.3 Servicing Space The following four kinds of installation patterns are available: - Retaining with the adjustable feet; - Retaining the machine by the anti-topple retainer; - Installing the machine at a user’s site where long cassettes are used; - Using the supporter 1.3.1 Retaining with the Adjustable Feet Shown below is the installation space where the machine is retained with the adjustable feet. When the machine is retained with the adjustable feet, the long cassette cannot be used. l Top view Note that the installation space and the retaining method are limited at a user’s site where a long cassette is used. WARNING Be sure to observe the following cautions at a user’s site where long cassettes are used. - Fix the machine to the floor by the anti-topple retainer. - Install the machine where the ceiling height is 1750 mm or higher. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-2 IN-3 1.3.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer Shown below is the installation space where the machine is fixed to the floor by means of the optional anti-topple retainer as demanded by the user. l Top view 1.3.3 Installing the Machine at a User’s Site where Long Cassettes are Used Shown below is the installation space where the machine is installed at a user’s site where long cassettes are used. l Top view and side view l Hole locations of the anti-topple retainer l Hole locations of the anti-topple retainer 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-3 IN-4 1.3.4 Using the Supporter When the supporter is used for installation, the installation space is as indicated below. l Installation space required when the base is attached to the supporter The base mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical. l Installation space required for the supporter only l Installation space required when the cassette rack is attached to the supporter The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-4 IN-5 2. Installation Work Flowchart n Workflow for First-Time Installation A START 8. Installing RU Software 3. Preparation for Installation 3.2 Unloading 8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility 3.3 Transfer 8.2 Setting the RU IP Address 3.4 Temporary Placement 8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address 3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console 8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL 8.6 Installing RU Software 8.7 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit 4. Installation Procedures 4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member 5. Connecting the Cables 5.1 5.2 9. Image/Conveyance Checks Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value Connecting the Interface Cable 6. Final Placement 6.1 Securing the Machine 6.2 Securing the Cable 9.1 Check Before Procedures 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 10. Confirming the S Value 11. Backing Up the Scanner Data 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU 7. DX Console Installation Procedures {DR-ID 300CL Service Manual} 13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU A 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label END 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-5 IN-6 3. Preparation for Installation 3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in "Getting Started" and "3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements." Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning system installation. 3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements Avoid the following installation sites: - Places where the temperature changes drastically. - Places near heat sources such as heaters. - Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. - Places where corrosive gas may be generated. - Dusty places. - Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock. - Places that are exposed to direct sunlight. - Places that are exposed to X-rays while the machine is processing. Make sure that the machine will never be exposed to direct and scattered X-rays while the machine is processing. The size and position of the X-ray shields should be such that the machine is completely shielded to avoid exposure of direct and scattered X-rays to the machine. - Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch. l When installed in the patient environment In the room where the machine is to be installed, the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet should be provided. The installation place should be within reach of the cable of the patient environment support cable kit from the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet. 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment n Additional Protective Grounding When the RU is to be installed in the patient environment, connect the RU with the medical use grounding terminal through the additional protective grounding wire. Definition of "patient environment" is given below. l Patient environment Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring).It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient's body. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room. 3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the electronic parts. 3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection "Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. Everyone who connects additional equipment configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt consult with the your local technical service representative." l When installed in other than the patient environment Make sure that persons other than routine operators of the machine will not touch the machine inadvertently. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-6 IN-7 3.2 Unloading CAUTIONS 1. Unload the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-carrying platform of the truck. 2. Cut the polypropylene (PP) band, and remove the slope. - When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so. - Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route. - Unload the machine on a flat space as close to the installation space as possible. If there are many steps or bumps in the machine transfer route, load may be applied to casters, causing damage. - Secure a necessary space for unloading, before unloading the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-carrying platform of the truck. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-7 IN-8 3. Remove the corrugated fiberboard box. u NOTE u 4. Cut the tapes, and remove the PP bands with stoppers and the bag containing the accessories. Lift the corrugated fiberboard box straight up not to damage the machine with the edges of the box, for removal. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-8 IN-9 5. Cut the lower part of the plastic cover which protects the machine. Remove the upper part of the plastic cover. u NOTE u When cutting the plastic cover, cut below the bottom of the machine. Do not damage the machine with a sharp instrument. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6. Cut the corners of the plastic cover which cover two right and left machine retainers on the rear of the machine. Then remove the bolts which retain the machine retainers on the rear of the machine. REFERENCE In removing the bolts, use of a 17-mm spanner is recommended to improve workability. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-9 IN-10 7. Cut the plastic cover around the machine retainer in an L-shape by a cutter, for easy removal of the two right and left machine retainers on the rear of the machine. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 8. Once loosen the adjustable feet for removing the two right and left machine retainers on the rear of the machine. REFERENCE In loosening the nut of the adjustable foot, use of a 13-mm spanner is recommended to improve workability. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-10 IN-11 9. Remove the two machine retainers on the right- and left-hand on the rear of the machine together with their sealing plastic covers and rubber plates. 10. Raise the two adjustable feet on the right- and left-hand on the rear of the machine to the uppermost position. CAUTION Be sure to raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position. If the machine is moved with the adjustable feet lowered, they might get caught on the ground, causing the machine to topple down. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-11 IN-12 11. Cut the corners of the plastic covers which cover the two machine retainers on the right- and left-hand on the front of the machine by a cutter, and remove the front bolt of the two bolts retaining the machine retainer on the front of the machine. CAUTION Do not remove all of the four bolts which retain the machine retainers on the front of the machine. If removed, the machine is movable, and might drop from the carrier pallet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 12. Loosen the bolts which retain the two right and left machine retainers on the front of the machine, and then once loosen the adjustable feet on the front of the machine. REFERENCE In loosening the nut of the adjustable foot, use of a 13-mm spanner is recommended to improve workability. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-12 IN-13 13. Move the machine on the carrier pallet until the machine disengages from the machine retainers. Then raise the adjustable feet on the front of the machine to the uppermost position. CAUTION Be sure to raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position. If the machine is moved with the adjustable feet lowered, they might get caught on the ground, causing the machine to topple down. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 14. Remove the PP bands for retaining the slope from the accessory bags, and pass the PP bands through the holes on the carrier pallet. u NOTE u Make sure that the rubber plate has been removed, before passing the PP band. Otherwise, the adjustable foot might get caught on the rubber plate, causing the machine to topple down, when the machine is unloaded from the carrier pallet. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-13 IN-14 15. Place the slope over the step of the carrier pallet. 16. Pass the PP bands through the holes of the slope. u NOTES u - Place the slope with the surface having the label applied facing upward. Since the step of the slope serves as a guide for casters, if a wrong face is placed, a difference in levels will occur between the carrier pallet and the slope, and in addition, the casters might come off from the slope when the machine is unloaded. - Place the slope with the side with holes toward the carrier pallet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-14 IN-15 17. Put the PP band on the stopper. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 18. Tighten the PP band, and fix the slope to the carrier pallet. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-15 IN-16 19. Check to make sure that the four adjustable feet are raised to the uppermost position, before unloading the machine from the carrier pallet. CAUTION If the machine is moved with the adjustable feet lowered, the feet might get caught with the carrier pallet, the slope and the ground, causing the damage on the adjustable feet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 20. Unload the machine from the carrier pallet. CAUTIONS - Be sure to unload the machine with two persons, and support the machine from both side faces of the machine. - Hold the rear and the side faces of the machine when supporting the machine. - Do not hold in the vicinity of the cassette inserting entrance or the vicinity of the operation panel. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-16 IN-17 3.3 Transfer CAUTIONS 3.4 Temporary Placement 1. Secure space required for installation procedures and temporarily place the machine. 2. Secure the machine with the adjustable feet in place. - When transferring the machine, two persons should support the machine from both side faces to prevent the machine from toppling down. - Raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position before transfer. Otherwise, the machine might topple or the casters might get damaged. - When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as slowly as possible to avoid shock to it. Note that the step over which the machine may move is about 10 mm high at most. 1. Put the hand lifter underneath the machine. u NOTE u Do not use the hand lifter to transfer the machine into the installation place. The machine might topple and get damaged. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-17 IN-18 3.5 Checking the Items Supplied n Optional Items Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that is contained in each carton. CR IR 359 RU2 USA 1 E Description Image reader main body CR-IR 359 (For the U.S.) CR IR 359 RU2 USA 2 E Image reader main body CR-IR 359 (For the U.S.) CR IR 359 RU2 E Image reader main body CR-IR 359 (For European and other foreign countries) 1 1 Qty Remarks For retaining the machine Anti-topple retainer kit 1 IR 355 STAND #(E) Supporter 1 IR 355 CASSETTE RACK #(E) Cassette rack 1 - Inch-type specification - For FMSU direct selling - With the 50 micron upgrade kit installed IR 355 CASSETE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1 IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 - Inch-type specification - For selling by FMSU franchised stores - With the 50 micron upgrade kit installed IR 355 IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1 IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm for LCD monitor 1 Except for USA IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) Retainer for fixing to wall (long type) 1 Except for USA IR 355 MBL KIT #(E) Mobile kit 1 IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E AC cable for BSI 1 IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E AC cable for CEE 1 IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V UL E AC cable for USA 1 Qty. 1 Description IR 355 FLOOR FIX KIT RH E n Machine Main Body Abbreviated product name Abbreviated product name Remarks - For use at hospitals - Metric-type specification Except for USA Except for USA n Accessories Check Item Qty. Remarks CD-R (machine-specific data) 1 Machine-specific data CD-R CD-ROM (application) 1 For installation 3 1.0A (137S1417) 2 1.6A (137S1419) 2 2.0A (137S1420) 1 327N100288 1 327N1121608 5 TP3x6 5 BR4x8 5 DT3x6 KL ring 5 KL4 Cover 1 For power supply inlet Instruction manual 1 Fuse set Spur gear Screw Label 1 2 Brush 1 CD-ROM (HR reading option key) 1 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Exposure marker instruction label For USA CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-18 IN-19 4. Installation Procedures 4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member 1. Remove the tapes. 2. Remove the protective member. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-19 IN-20 5. 5.1 Connecting the Cables 1. Connect the power cable to the machine. 2. Place the breaker switch in the ON position. Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value CAUTIONS - Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is unplugged from the outlet. - If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING." {IN: Appendix 1._ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING} - If the power cable is not packed together with the machine accessories, be sure to use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an electric shock or a fire. <For the U.S. and Canada> UL-listed detachable power supply cable Hospital-grade plug Cable wire diameter : 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor Rated voltage : 125 VAC or higher Cable type : SJT <For Europe> Cable certified by a country in which the machine is to be installed Cable wire diameter : 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor Rated voltage : 250 VAC or higher Cable type : H05VV-F 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-20 IN-21 3. Measure the resistance value of the power cable. 5. Place the breaker switch in the OFF position. 6. Install the power cable cover. (Reference value) Terminal Resistance value 4. L-N 100kΩ - L-E ∞ N-E ∞ Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power cable and the bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there is continuity. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-21 IN-22 5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable 2. Consult the user to check the installation conditions of the machine, cable wiring locations and so on. When the I/F cable is to be drawn out from the right-hand side of the machine, pass the cable through the right-hand slot, and when it is to be drawn out from the rear of the machine, pass it through the rear slot. 3. Connect the I/F cable to the switching hub. CAUTION A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector. u NOTE u For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of Category 5E or more should be used. 1. Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the machine. CAUTION Only devices evaluated to IEC/UL60950-1 can be used. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-22 IN-23 6. Final Placement For final placement of the machine, check the requests of the user, and observe the procedures described below to secure the machine and cables in place. 6.1 Securing the Machine 1. u NOTE u WARNING When securing the adjustable feet, pay attention to the following points. - The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded. However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installation place to secure the adjustable feet on the rear side, the two adjustable feet on the front side should be secured in place. In this case, the two adjustable feet and two casters should be evenly loaded. - When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from the floor. At an institution where a long cassette is used, be sure to fasten the machine to the floor with the anti-topple retainer. {IN: Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer} l Retaining the machine with the adjustable feet; Secure the four adjustable feet down onto the floor. 2. Secure the adjustable feet. When the machine is to be retained with the adjustable feet, refer to “6.1 Securing the machine”. {IN:6.1_Securing the Machine} l Retaining the machine by the anti-topple retainer; When the machine is to be fixed by the anti-topple retainer (optional), refer to “Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer”. {IN: Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer} l Using the supporter When using the supporter (optional), see "Appendix 3. Assembling and Securing the Supporter." {IN: Appendix 3._Assembling and Securing the Supporter} l Using the mobile kit When an optional mobile kit is to be used, take the procedures in “Appendix 9 Installing the Mobile Kit”. {IN: Appendix 9._Installing the Mobile Kit} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-23 IN-24 6.2 Securing the Cable WARNING If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING." {IN: Appendix 1._ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING} 7. DX Console Installation Procedures 1. Perform the DX Console installation procedures. u NOTE u Complete "7. DX Console Installation Procedures" before performing the procedures described in "8. Installing RU Software." {DR-ID 300CL Service Manual} CAUTION Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded. 1. Plug the power cable into the outlet. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-24 IN-25 8. Installing RU Software Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU and set the "RU IP Address" and "FTP Server IP Address." The procedure described here assumes that the following addresses are to be set: RU IP address: 172.16.1.11 FTP server IP address: 172.16.1.21 8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility 1. 2. 3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. u NOTE u Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the RU power and repeat from the procedure 1. Turn ON the power of the DX Console. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-25 IN-26 8.2 Setting the RU IP Address 1. 2. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. u NOTE u Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select] button. Set the IP address of the RU specified on the DX Console. 3. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. → The address setting window appears. → In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-26 IN-27 8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address 1. Press the 2. Press the [Select] button. button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”. → The address setting window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-27 IN-28 3. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. u NOTE u Specify the IP address of the DX Console. 4. Press the 5. Confirm the network specifications of the user’s site, and set the following addresses when needed. u NOTE u Set the addresses by performing the individual setup procedures set forth in the Maintenance Utility volume. - For Subnet Mask setup {MU:3.3_Subnet Mask} - For Default Gateway setup {MU:3.5_Default Gateway} - For Secure Host setup {MU:3.6_Secure Host} - For Secure Net setup {MU:3.7_Secure Net} button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. → In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-28 IN-29 8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console 1. 2. Press the 3. Press the [Check] button. 4. Confirm the display on the operation panel. button, and select “Network Check”. Press the [Select] button. u NOTES u - “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified. - Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears. {Troubleshooting} → The “Network Check” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-29 IN-30 8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL 4. Click on [NEXT]. 5. Click on [INSTALL]. 6. Click on [Finish] when the installation is completed. u NOTE u Before procedures, please confirm the part number of the software. {Front cover : lSoftware for this machine} 1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the DX Console. → The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears. 2. Click on [INSTALL]. 3. Select “For FTP-Server”, and click on [SET]. u NOTE u Always select “For FTP-Server”. If “For Client PC” is selected, the installation cannot be done properly. If you inadvertently click [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, perform installation again as directed under "Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PC-TOOL Installation." {IN: Appendix 8._Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PCTOOL Installation.} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-30 IN-31 7. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key. REFERENCE The following window appears to register a user on the PC. When the RU PC-TOOL has been already installed, the window indicating that the registration is completed appears. 8. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key. u NOTE u The following message appears a total of three times. Press the [Enter] key each time the message appears. → Return to the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-31 IN-32 8.6 Installing RU Software REFERENCE This section describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as follows: INSTALL VERSION: 1.1 LANGUAGE: English BRAND TYPE: U.S.A (FMSU) SCREEN TYPE: HOSPITAL LINAC CASSETTE: NOT USE 1. 4. Click on [PING]. 5. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. Click on [START]. l [GOOD indication] 2. Click on [NEW]. If the following message appears, the result is normal. | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11:| | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), | l [NO GOOD indication] Other than above is all abnormal. (The selected IP address of the RU is displayed.) u NOTE u 3. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR". In the case of "NO GOOD" indication {Troubleshooting} u NOTE u If the "Reader Unit IP Address" setting was changed from the RU operation panel before RU software installation, enter the changed address. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-32 IN-33 6. Click on [INSTALL]. 10. Select "BRAND TYPE". 11. Select an operation panel screen type (SCREEN TYPE), and then click [OK]. REFERENCE When clicking on [INSTALL], “Under maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU. 7. Click on [OK]. 8. Select "INSTALL VERSION". 9. Select "LANGUAGE". REFERENCE The following languages can be selected during the installation. Japanese, English, Germany, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Norwegian, Korean, ChineseSimplified, ChineseTraditional, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek, Hebrew, Russian, Turkish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Thai, Indonesian 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 u NOTE u The proper selection varies with a network connection between the RU and DX Console. Make a proper selection in accordance with the employed network connection. If an improper selection is made, the connection between the RU and DX Console is not guaranteed. - When a "1:1 connection" is established between the RU and DX Console, choose "CLINIC." - When an "N:N connection" is established between the RU and DX Console, choose "HOSPITAL." 12. If a LINAC CASSETTE is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the LINAC CASSETTE is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET]. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-33 IN-34 13. If, for instance, the institution wishes to use nondefault CONFIGURATION information, edit the CONFIGURATION information by performing the procedure set forth under "4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION" in the Maintenance Utility volume. {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} 14. Click on [SET]. 15. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME". u INSTRUCTION u Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU. REFERENCE Up to 32 DX Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the DX Console's registered, up to four DX Console's are switchable as master CL's. For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see "4.14 EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume. {MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-34 IN-35 16. Confirm the installation precautions. 18. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter] key twice. 19. Click on [OK]. CAUTION While the flash ROM is being written into, never turn OFF the RU or DX Console. If you turn OFF the power, the program stored in the memory becomes damaged and cannot restart. 17. Click on [SET]. When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the DX Console display. While the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows. u NOTE u Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed. If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-35 IN-36 20. Check the version of the RU software, and close RU PC-TOOL. 21. Verify that the RU's LED is extinguished, and then turn OFF the RU. REFERENCE The message "Under maintenance" is displayed on the operation panel. However, turning OFF the RU power does not affect the RU's functionality. u NOTE u In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures all over again. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 22. Turn ON the power of the RU. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-36 IN-37 8.7 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit u NOTES u - Only when the user has purchased the 50 micron upgrade kit to use the IP type HR in the machine, perform installation according to the procedures below. - When the 50 micron upgrade kit is not to be installed, or when the HR reading option key has been already installed, the following procedures are not necessary. Proceed to “9. Image/Conveyance Checks”. {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} 1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM into the drive of the DX Console. → The installation menu automatically appears. 2. REFERENCES - If you have pressed the [Enter] key without making any entry in #1 of the procedure 3, the error message does not appear. Enter the RU’s IP address and press the [Enter] key. Enter “1” and press the [Enter] key. - If you have entered a wrong IP address and pressed the [Enter] key in #1 of the procedure 3, the error message appears. Press the [Enter] key to exit. Double-click the CD-ROM drive from the explorer to again perform the installation from the procedure 2. → The message for prompting the input of the RU’s IP address appears. 3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key. → The message “Installation Completed” appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-37 IN-38 4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the installation is displayed, and press the [Enter] key. 5. 6. 7. Remove the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM from the drive of the DX Console. 8. Turn OFF the power of the RU. Apply the cassette insertion operation label attached to the 50 micron upgrade kit over the cassette insertion operation label which has been stuck to the machine. Change the attached “CR-IR359 instruction manual (for options)” attached to the 50 micron upgrade kit. REFERENCE Components of the 50 micron upgrade kit 1. Cassette Insertion Operation Labels 2. HR reading option key CD-ROM 3. CR-IR instruction manual (for options) u NOTE u As sales of the machine as an image reader for use of mammography are not permitted by authorities concerned in USA and Canada, the machine cannot be used as mammographic equipment. 9. Turn OFF the power of the RU. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-38 IN-39 9. Image/Conveyance Checks In this section, the following checks are made as last-time verification for final placement. - Conveyance checks - Image checks 9.1 Check Before Procedures u NOTES u - For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the hospital should be employed. - Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data exposed. 1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. REFERENCE The screen contents of the RU's operation panel vary with the LANGUAGE and SCREEN TYPE selections made during installation. For details on the screen contents of the RU's operation panel, see "1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents" in the "Machine Description" volume. {MD:1.3.3_Operation Panel Display Screen Contents} 2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image accumulated on the IP to be used. {Instruction Manual} 3. Perform IP exposures. u NOTE u Be sure to make exposure under the following X-ray tube voltage conditions. Otherwise, the image cannot be correctly checked. - For tungsten X-ray tube: 80 kVp - For molybdenum X-ray tube: 25 kVp u INSTRUCTIONS u - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST and HR) used at the user’s site with the following doses. - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation. l When the IP type ST - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR - Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) size - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m Voltage 80 kVp Amperage 50 mA Time 0.013 sec. l When the IP type HR - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR - Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m Voltage 80 kVp Amperage 50 mA Time 0.013 sec. l When the IP type HR is to be exposed with the molybdenum X-ray tube 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 - X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube - Exposure X-ray dose: 20mR - Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size - Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m Voltage 25 kVp Amperage 100 mA Time 0.53 sec. CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-39 IN-40 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks u NOTE u Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks should be performed with the "MENU" specified below. 1. Read the IP prepared in “9.1 Check before procedures” by the DX Console menus “QC/TEST,” “Image Format” and “SINGLE,” and output an image. 2. Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the image displayed on the image monitor. u CHECK u There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction. If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine or X-ray tube. l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films → The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity. {Troubleshooting} l If positions of uneven density difference are different → The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-40 IN-41 3. Check the image format. Make sure that the white blank portion is 4 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted. u CHECK u The white blank portion should be 4 mm or less. If anything abnormal is found: {Troubleshooting} u NOTE u The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-41 IN-42 10. Confirming the S Value 10.1 2. Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the radiation dose is 1 mR. u NOTE u If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 1 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions. - Distance: ___cm - Tube voltage: ___kVp - Tube current: ___mA - Time: ___sec The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 1 mR of radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, output the read image, and check that the S value for 1 mR of radiation, which is determined from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. REFERENCE The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below: - S value control limits for user adjustments Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300 Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133 - S value control limits for service technician adjustments Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260 Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154 REFERENCE If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference values and make fine adjustments: To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments. 1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center. 3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose five times and average the measured values. --- Example --- 4. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 First measurement Second measurement Third measurement Fourth measurement Fifth measurement Average value 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04 Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step 3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table." CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-42 IN-43 5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary erasure. 8. {Instruction Manual} --- Example --Displayed S value: 200 Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 1.04 u NOTE u Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the employed IP. 6. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S value printed on the film or displayed on the DX Console screen) and the average radiation dose value obtained in step 3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) IP to X-ray radiation. u NOTE u Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution. 7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" DX Console menus, and then output the read image. 9. S value for 1 mR of radiation = = = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value 200 x 1.04 208 Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is within the control limits. --- Example --Lower control limit value 154 < 208 < Upper control limit value 260 Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is between the upper and lower control limit values. u NOTE u If the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction and then confirm the S value again. {MU:7.3 [5-5-5]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-43 IN-44 10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 20 mR of radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, output the read image, and check that the S value for 20 mR of radiation, which is determined from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. 1. Align the X-ray radiation field with the cassette size. Position the reference point of the dosimeter sensor so that it coincides with the size of the cassette to be used. REFERENCE The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below: - S value control limits for user adjustments Upper limit: 120 x 1.5 = 180 Lower limit: 120/1.5 = 80 - S value control limits for service technician adjustments Upper limit: 120 x 1.3 = 156 Lower limit: 120/1.3 = 92 To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-44 IN-45 2. Set the tube voltage to 25 kVp. Set the target/filter to molybdenum/molybdenum. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the IP radiation dose of 20 mR is achieved. 2 3. --- Example --- 2 First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value 19.6 20.0 20.2 20.4 18.8 19.8 l Achieved IP radiation dose = Dosimeter reading x L /L' L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor L':Distance between the focus and the cassette top frame Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose five times and average the measured values. 4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step 3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table." 5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary erasure. {Instruction Manual} u NOTE u Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the employed IP. 6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm or 24 cm x 30 cm IP to X-ray radiation. u NOTE u Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution. 7. u NOTE u If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 20 mR, leave the tube voltage at 25 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 20 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions. - Distance: cm - Tube voltage: kVp - Tube current: mA - Time: sec Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and "SINGLE" DX Console menus, and then output the read image. REFERENCE If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference values and make fine adjustments: - Distance (L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor) 55 cm - Distance (L': Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor) 60 cm - Tube voltage 80kVp - Tube current 100mA - Time 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 0.053sec CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-45 IN-46 8. Determine the "S value for 20 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S value printed on the film or displayed on the DX Console screen) and the average radiation dose value obtained in step 3. ---Example --Displayed S value: 120 Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 19.8 S value for 20 mR of radiation 9. = = = Displayed S value 120 118.8 x x Average radiation dose value 19.8 / 20 (mR) / 20 Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is within the control limits. --- Example --Lower control limit value 92 < 118.8 < Upper control limit value 156 Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is between the upper and lower control limit values. u NOTE u If the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction and then confirm the S value again. {MU:7.3 [5-5-6]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-46 IN-47 11. 1. Backing Up the Scanner Data Starts the RU PC-TOOL. {4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} 2. Back up the scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) by using "SCN ALL DATA" under "BACKUP". 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU 1. 2. 3. Shut down the system of the DX Console. Shut down the system of the RU. Turn OFF the power of the RU. {4.15_BACKUP} 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-47 IN-48 13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU 1. 2. 3. Clean the monitor and covers of the DX Console with a dry cloth. 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label 1. Apply the exposure marker instruction label suitable for the local language. Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth. Peel the seal off the operation panel. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-48 IN-49 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-49 IN-50 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-50 IN-51 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-51 Appx IN-1 Appendix 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible. (For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures for additional protective grounding” on the next page. This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical facility construction. Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used room” are given below. Patient Environment Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations INSTRUCTION Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed. <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding> 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the connection of additional protective grounding. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital grade earth terminal. 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply. Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room. Medically-Used Room Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-used room. Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment. Non-Medically Used Room Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-1 Appx IN-2 Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer 1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 No. Name Qty. Remarks 1 Bracket (front) 1 356Y0475 2 Bracket (rear) 1 356Y0502 3 Bracket (left-hand side) 1 356Y0499 4 Bracket (right-hand side) 1 356Y0498 5 Spacer (1 mm) 6 347N2108 6 Spacer (2 mm) 4 347N2109 7 Cap 2 317S1064 8 Hex head socket bolt (8x15) 2 304S1000820 9 Spring washer (SW8) 6 309S0220008 10 Plain washer (W8) 6 309S0110008 11 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) 4 304S5000820 12 Anchor nut (Na8) 4 305N100033 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-2 Appx IN-3 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer 1. Assemble the anti-topple retainer to determine the locations where the anchor nuts are to be embedded. 2. Place the assembled anti-topple retainer on the location where the machine is to be settled. While holding not to cause the anti-topple retainer to shift, mark the locations where the holes for embedding the anchor nuts are to be bored with a pen or the like. REFERENCE The front bracket (for use on the front face) and the rear bracket (for use on the rear face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. Although they are of similar shapes when viewed from the surface, you can distinguish them by checking from the back. The front bracket has nuts welded on the inner side. The rear bracket has no nut welded on the inner side. <Reference value> 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-3 Appx IN-4 3. Once move the anti-topple retainer. Strike a center punch at the center of a marked position to easily drill a hole. 4. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the four marked positions. CAUTION When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter. u NOTE u When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor nut cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the anti-topple retainer cannot be correctly retained. REFERENCE When drilling a hole, use of a vacuum cleaner is recommended. If the hole is drilled while sucking the chips by the vacuum cleaner, the depth of the hole can be easily checked. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-4 Appx IN-5 5. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the four drilled holes. u NOTES u - When embedding the anchor nut, strike the top of the anchor nut vertically to the nut. If the top of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for retaining the bracket cannot be installed. - Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 6. Place the anti-topple retainer in place. Put in spacers with thicknesses of 1 mm and 2 mm into the bolt retaining positions on the rear side, and temporarily retain the retainer with the button bolts. u NOTE u Be sure to use the button bolt as a bolt to retain the anti-topple retainer. If a common bolt is used, the bolt head and the adjustable foot might come into contact when the machine is moved, causing deformation on the adjustable foot. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-5 Appx IN-6 7. Remove the hex head bolts and the screws to remove the bracket. 8. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface of the nut of the adjustable foot to the bottom of the machine is approx. 5 mm, in order to mount the bracket on the machine. After the adjustment, check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. u NOTE u Check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. If there is an aperture between the nuts, the machine retaining bracket cannot be fixed properly. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-6 Appx IN-7 9. Insert the rear bracket from the rear of the machine between the nut of the adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. u NOTES u - Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. - When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. REFERENCE The front bracket (for use on the front face) and the rear bracket (for use on the rear face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. Although they are of similar shapes when viewed from the surface, you can distinguish them by checking from the back. The front bracket has nuts welded on the inner side. The rear bracket has no nut welded on the inner side. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-7 Appx IN-8 10. Insert the front bracket from the front of the machine between the nut of the adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. u NOTES u - Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. - When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 11. Slowly move the machine toward the bracket retained on the floor, until the bracket on the rear of the machine comes against the bracket retained on the floor. u NOTES u - If the machine cannot be moved as the bracket retained on the bracket comes into contact with the bracket mounted on the machine when the machine is to be moved, height adjustment is necessary with additional spacers. Take the procedure 12. - If the machine can move until the bracket on the rear of the machine comes against the bracket retained on the floor, the procedure 12 need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure 13. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-8 Appx IN-9 12. Once pull out the machine. Adjust the height of the bracket retained on the floor by adding a spacer. Then move the machine again. u NOTE u Check the portion where the bracket retained on the floor is in contact wit the bracket on the rear of the machine. Add a spacer of 1mm or 2mm thickness accordingly. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 13. Check to make sure that the spacer of 1mm thickness cannot be inserted into an aperture between the bracket retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on the machine. u NOTES u - If the spacer of 1mm thickness can be inserted into an aperture between the bracket retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on the machine, the spacer should be removed and the height need be adjusted again. Take the procedure 14. - If the spacer of 1mm thickness cannot be inserted into an aperture between the bracket retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on the machine, the procedure 14 need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure 15. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-9 Appx IN-10 14. Once pull out the machine. Loosen the button bolt, remove the spacer, and fasten the button bolt to retain the bracket. After the bracket is retained, move the machine, and again check as instructed in the procedure 13. u NOTE u When the spacer is removed, always take the procedure 13 to check the aperture. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 15. While pushing the bracket retained on the floor against the machine, additionally fasten the button bolt to retain the bracket mounted on the floor. When the bracket retained on the floor does not move, once loosen the button bolt, push the bracket against the machine, and fasten the button nut to retain the bracket on the floor. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-10 Appx IN-11 16. Put on the bolt on the front of the machine, retain the bracket, and put on the bolt cover. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-11 Appx IN-12 Appendix 3 1. Assembling and Securing the Supporter Components of the Supporter n Supporter Body 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 n Supporter Body No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name Stanchion (left-hand side) Stanchion (right-hand side) Shelf Connecting strut Bracket (left-hand side) Bracket (right-hand side) Bracket (front) Bracket (rear) Adjustable foot Spacer Qty. 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 2 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Remarks Appx IN-12 Appx IN-13 n Options, Accessories n Arm Options No. 11 12 Name Qty. 1 1 Remarks Name Connecting bracket Base Qty. 1 1 Remarks Qty. 1 Remarks Arm Bracket n Base Options No. 13 14 n Cassette Rack Options No. 15 16 Name Cassette rack Cassette rack (for long cassette) 1 n Optional Wall-Fixing Fitting (Long Type) No. 17 18 Name Qty. 2 1 Remarks Wall-fixing fitting (long type) No. 19 20 21 Name Shock absorber Cap Hex head bolt (8x20) Remarks 22 Spring washer (SW8) 23 Plain washer (W8) 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) Anchor nut (Na8) Cross recessed pan head tapping screw (4x40) Washer (W4) Stem band Insulock Insulock plate NK clamp Retaining band Seal Qty. 4 2 2 2 4 2 4 4 4 34 Screw (T5x12) 35 36 37 Screw (T6x15) W sems screw (B4x12) W sems screw (B4x8) Cross recessed pan head tapping screw (4x10) Bracket Bracket (for coupling) n Optional Items 26 37 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 For supporter body For retaining the anchor For supporter body For retaining the anchor For retaining the anchor For retaining the anchor 8 For fixing to the wall 8 4 11 11 10 1 24 18 4 4 2 2 8 4 4 3 For supporter body For arm For base For cassette rack For cassette rack (for long cassette) Wall-fixing fitting (long type) For supporter body For arm For arm 8 For wall-fixing retainer (long type) CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-13 Appx IN-14 2. Assembling the Supporter 1. 2. Mount the connecting struts on one of the stanchions. Attach the adjustable feet to the right- and left-hand stanchions. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-14 Appx IN-15 3. Mount the struts assembled in the step 2 on the other stanchion. 4. Screw the struts. u NOTE u Be sure to mount the struts with the two screws temporarily tightened. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-15 Appx IN-16 5. Mount the shelf. 6. Screw down the shelf. u NOTE u Be sure to mount the shelf with the two screws loosely installed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-16 Appx IN-17 7. Mount the brackets. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 8. Mount the shock absorbers. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-17 Appx IN-18 3. Attachment of the Options 3.1 2. Screw the arm. Mounting the Arm 1. Mount the arm. u NOTE u Be sure to mount the struts with the two screws temporarily tightened. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-18 Appx IN-19 3. Lift the connection at the tip of the arm by means of a tool such as pincers. Attach the bracket and screw it. 4. Secure the supporter. u NOTE u When the arm (optional) has been mounted, be sure to retain the supporter according to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter”. {IN: Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-19 Appx IN-20 3.2 Mounting the Base 2. Mount the base to the supporter. REFERENCE The base can be placed either on the right or the left at symmetrical positions. 1. Attach the bracket to the base. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-20 Appx IN-21 3.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack REFERENCE The cassette rack can be placed either on the right or the left at symmetrical positions. n Mounting the Cassette Rack 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 n Mounting the Cassette Rack (for Use with a Long Cassette) CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-21 Appx IN-22 4. Securing the Machine WARNING Be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall to secure the machine according to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter” in a site where a long cassette is used. {IN: Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter} 1. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface of the nut of the adjustable foot to the bottom of the machine is approx. 5 mm, in order to mount the bracket on the machine. After the adjustment, check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. u NOTE u Check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. If there is an aperture between the nuts, the machine retaining bracket cannot be fixed properly. u NOTE u Be sure to take off the power inlet cover when using the supporter. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-22 Appx IN-23 2. Insert the rear bracket from the rear of the machine between the nut of the adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. u NOTES u - Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. - When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. REFERENCE The front bracket (for use on the front face) and the rear bracket (for use on the rear face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. The rear bracket has pins on its back surface. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-23 Appx IN-24 3. Move the machine into the supporter. 4. Fix the adjustable feet on the front face of the machine. CAUTION When pushing the machine into the supporter or pulling the machine out of the supporter, exercise care so that your fingers and other parts of your body are not caught between the supporter and machine. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-24 Appx IN-25 5. Place the bracket (for the front face) and secure with hex head bolts. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-25 Appx IN-26 5. Securing the Supporter WARNING Be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall to secure the machine in a site where a long cassette is used. n REFERENCE INFORMATION Refer to “Appendix 3-5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes” on the conditions of the floor/wall and how to fix when the supporter is to be fixed to the floor/wall. {IN: Appendix 3-5.1_Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes} u NOTE u When the arm (optional) has been mounted, be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or the wall to secure the machine. To secure the supporter, it is sometimes fixed to the floor and sometimes to the wall. Depending on the conditions on the installation site, follow the reference procedures below to fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall, before securing the machine. l When the supporter is to be fixed to the floor {IN: Appendix 3-5.3_Fixing the Supporter to the Floor} l When directly fixing the supporter to the wall {IN: Appendix 3-5.4_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall} l When fixing the supporter to the wall by means of a wall-fixing fitting (long type) {IN: Appendix 3-5.5_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via the Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type)} l When fixing the supporter to the wall via an anchor nut {IN: Appendix 3-5.6_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-26 Appx IN-27 5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes The floor/wall conditions and the fixing method in respective fixing modes are as follows: Floor/wall conditions Fixing method - Concrete floor - Compression strength of 245kgf/cm2 or higher is assumed. - Strike an anchor at four positions, and secure the supporter with the bolts. In the case of a wall made of steel or lightweight steel aggregate - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of lightweight steel partition - A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is assumed. - Secure the supporter with four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40). In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of 8.8%/ pine tree with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a water content of 9.0% is assumed. - Secure the supporter with four or more course sleds. - It is assumed that the supporter is fixed to the pillar in a screwing depth of 27 mm or more. - Concrete floor - Compression strength of 245kgf/cm2 or higher is assumed. - Strike an anchor at two positions, and secure the supporter with the bolts. In the case of a wall made of steel or lightweight steel aggregate - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of lightweight steel partition - A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is assumed. - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40). - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the supporter with four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40). In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of 8.8%/ pine tree with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a water content of 9.0% is assumed. - Secure the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with four or more course sleds. - It is assumed that the supporter is fixed to the pillar in a screwing depth of 27 mm or more. - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the supporter with four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40). l When the supporter is to be fixed to the floor l When the supporter is to be directly fixed to the wall l When the supporter is to be fixed to the wall by anchor nuts l When the supporter is fixed to the wall by a wall-retaining fitting (long type) (*1) (*1) If a part of the wall where the supporter is to be fixed is wider than the supporter, the supporter is fixed to the wall via an optional wall-retaining fitting (long type). Whether the supporter is directly fixed to the wall or fixed via the wall-retaining fitting (long type) should be decided depending on the following values as reference. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-27 Appx IN-28 5.2 Nothing 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-28 Appx IN-29 5.3 Fixing the Supporter to the Floor 1. Put the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. While holding the supporter not to shift, mark with a pen or the like the positions to be bored where the anchor nuts are to be embedded. 2. Once move the supporter. Strike the center punch at the center of the marked position to easily drill a hole. <Reference value> 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-29 Appx IN-30 3. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the four marked positions. CAUTION When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter. 4. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the four drilled holes. u NOTES u - When embedding the anchor nut, strike the top of the anchor nut vertically to the nut. If the top of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for retaining the bracket cannot be installed. - Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface. u NOTE u When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor nut cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the supporter cannot be correctly retained. REFERENCE When drilling a hole, use of a vacuum cleaner is recommended. If the hole is drilled while sucking the chips by the vacuum cleaner, the depth of the hole can be easily checked. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-30 Appx IN-31 5. Place the supporter where it is to be fixed. Fix the supporter to the floor by the button bolts. 6. Secure the machine. {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)} u NOTE u Always use button bolts to fix the supporter. If a normal bolt is used, the head of the bolt comes into contact with the adjustable foot when the machine is moved, and the adjustable foot might get deformed. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-31 Appx IN-32 5.4 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall 1. <Reference value> Place the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. Check the conditions of the wall at the installation site. Mark the positions to be screwed with a pen or the like. 014-247-02E 01.31.2014 FM8222 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-32 Appx IN-33 2. Screw the supporter. REFERENCE Make a preparatory hole of approx. 1 mm on the wall before screwing. This makes the screws easy to be tightened. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 3. Secure the machine. {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)} CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-33 Appx IN-34 5.5 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via the Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type) 1. Assemble the wall-retaining fitting (long type). 2. Attach the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall. u NOTE u Observe the wall conditions at the user’s site, and secure the fitting to the pillars of the wall. REFERENCE The weight of the assembled wall-retaining fitting (long type) is approx. 2.1 kg. <Reference value> 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-34 Appx IN-35 3. Mount the supporter to the wall-retaining fitting (long type). 4. Secure the machine. {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)} <Reference value> 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-35 Appx IN-36 5.6 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts 1. <Reference value> Place the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. Check the conditions of the wall at the installation site. Mark the positions to be screwed with a pen or the like. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-36 Appx IN-37 2. Once move the supporter. Strike the center punch at the center of the marked position to easily drill a hole. 3. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the two marked positions. CAUTION When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter. u NOTE u When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor nut cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the supporter cannot be correctly retained. REFERENCE When drilling a hole, use of a vacuum cleaner is recommended. If the hole is drilled while sucking the chips by the vacuum cleaner, the depth of the hole can be easily checked. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-37 Appx IN-38 4. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the two drilled holes. 5. Place the supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. 6. Secure the machine. u NOTES u - Strike the top of the anchor nut horizontally when embedding the anchor nut. If the top of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for securing the supporter cannot be attached. - Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface. {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-38 Appx IN-39 5.7 Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed) 1. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface of the nut of the adjustable foot to the bottom of the machine is approx. 5 mm, in order to mount the bracket on the machine. After the adjustment, check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. u NOTE u Check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot. If there is an aperture between the nuts, the machine retaining bracket cannot be fixed properly. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-39 Appx IN-40 2. Insert the rear bracket from the rear of the machine between the nut of the adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. u NOTES u - Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. - When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. REFERENCE The front bracket (for use on the front face) and the rear bracket (for use on the rear face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. The rear bracket has pins on its back surface. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-40 Appx IN-41 3. Put on the spacer on the bracket (for the front). 4. Insert the front bracket from the front of the machine between the nut of the adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. u NOTES u - Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. - When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-41 Appx IN-42 5. Move the machine into the supporter. 6. Install the hex head bolts. CAUTION When pushing the machine into the supporter or pulling the machine out of the supporter, exercise care so that your fingers and other parts of your body are not caught between the supporter and machine. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-42 Appx IN-43 6. Applying the Seal 1. 7. Nothing Apply the seals to the screw holes on the supporter. REFERENCE The number of seals to be applied depends on whether an optional part has been mounted. The locations where the seals might be applied are shown below. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-43 Appx IN-44 8. Nothing 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-44 Appx IN-45 Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL This section describes the procedures for additionally register the CL2 (172.16.1.22) into the system that consists of the RU (ru0: 172.16.1.11) and CL1 (master CL: 172.16.1.21), and for switching the master CL from CL1 to CL2. 1. Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on the CL1) 1. 2. Turn ON the power of the DX Console. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. REFERENCE Up to 32 DX Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the DX Console's registered, up to four DX Console's are switchable as master CL's. For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see "4.14 EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume. {MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-45 Appx IN-46 3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. 4. Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\ RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key. u NOTE u Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the RU power and repeat from the procedure 1. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-46 Appx IN-47 5. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the master CL is to be added, and enter the "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the master CL to be added. 6. REFERENCE It takes about three minutes to register the master CL (CL2) after you click [SET]. 7. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Register the master CL (CL2) created at procedure 5 into the master CL. Close the RU PC-TOOL window. CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-47 Appx IN-48 2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2) 1. 5. (172.16.1.11) in Start the Service Utility. {FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual/Maintenance Utility (MU)/1. Starting and Exiting the Service Utility} 2. Click on [Setup Configuration Item]. 3. Click on [ALL OTHER NODES] of [NETWORK CONFIG]. Enter the host name (ru0) of the RU in 6. Select and its IP address . in the "Add Node" field, and click on . → The "FRUP Setup" screen appears. 7. 8. Check in the "Attribute" field ( Type "ru0" in → ). . REFERENCE The name should not necessarily be the same as the host name. 9. 4. Click on . Click on . → Registering the network information is now completed. → The "New Node" dialog box appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-48 Appx IN-49 3. Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) 1. 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility 1. Click on [CONNECTING EQUIPMENT] in the "Setup Configuration Item" window. From the "Config (F)" menu in the "Setup Configuration Item" window, select "Save (V)". → The save confirmation window appears. 2. Click on . → The "Connecting Equipment" dialog box appears. 3. 2. Register the machine information as shown below. Click on . → The setup is saved. 3. From the "Config (F)" menu, select "Close (C)". → The "Service Utility" window appears back on screen. 4. 4. Exit the Service Utility. I. Select "Reader". II. Select the host name (e.g., ru0). III. If several RU's are connected, select the second and subsequent host name(s) in "Equipment #2" and so on. Click on . → Registering the machine information is now completed. The "Setup Configuration Item" window appears back on screen. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-49 Appx IN-50 5. Verifying Switching of Master CL 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the 5. Press the [Select] button. button, and select “Set master CL”. Turn OFF the power of the RU. Turn ON the power of the RU. Press the [Utility] button on the operation panel. → The “Utility” window appears. → The “Select master Console” window appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-50 Appx IN-51 6. 7. Press the button, and select “CL2”. 8. 9. Turn ON the power of the RU. Perform reading, and make sure that the image is transferred to the master CL. Press the [Select] button. REFERENCE The power of the RU automatically turns OFF about 1 minute after the master CL is set. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-51 Appx IN-52 Appendix 5. Changing the RU's IP Address This appendix describes the procedure for using the machine with the RU's IP address changed. 1. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility 1. Start the machine Maintenance Utility as directed under "8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility." {IN:8.1_Starting the machine Maintenance Utility} 2. Setting the RU IP Address 1. Change the RU's IP address as directed under "8.2 Setting the RU IP Address." {IN:8.2_Setting the RU IP Address} 3. Setting the FTP Server IP address 1. 2. Change the RU's FTP server IP address as directed under "8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP address." {IN:8.3_Setting the FTP Server IP address} Reinstall the RU software as directed under "Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU Software." u INSTRUCTION u After the RU's IP address is changed, be sure to reinstall the RU software. {IN: Appendix 6._Reinstalling the RU Software} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-52 Appx IN-53 4. Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU Software Click on [DELETE]. This appendix describes the RU software reinstallation procedure that is performed when, for instance, the machine is to be used with the RU's IP address changed or the RU to be installed is improperly set up. To reinstall the RU software, first delete the RU registered in the RU PC-TOOL, and then install the RU software. 1. u NOTE u If you click [DELETE] without inserting the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console, the following error message appears. If the error message appears, insert the RU-APL CDROM into the DX Console and then repeat steps 2 and beyond. Deleting an Installed RU 1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens. 2. Click on [START]. → The "RU PC-TOOL" window opens. 3. 5. Click on [OK]. 6. Verify that the RU selected in step 3 is deleted from "LIST OF EXISTING RU." From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select an RU. 2. Reinstalling the RU Software Reinstall the RU software. For the RU software reinstallation procedure, see "Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software." {IN: Appendix 7._Installing the RU Software} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-53 Appx IN-54 Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software This appendix describes the procedure for installing the RU software. Before installing the RU software, you have to run a network check from the RU's machine Maintenance Utility to verify the connection to the DX Console. 1. Verifying the connection to the DX Console 1. Run a network check as directed under "8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console." {IN:8.4_Checking the Connection with the DX Console} 2. Installing the RU PC-TOOL u NOTE u If the RU PC-TOOL is already installed on the DX Console, the step below need not be performed. In such an instance, skip to "Appendix 7-3 Installing the RU software." {IN: Appendix 7-3_Installing the RU Software} 1. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL." {IN:8.5_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} 3. Installing the RU Software 1. Install the RU software as directed under "8.6 Installing RU Software." {IN:8.6_Installing RU Software} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-54 Appx IN-55 Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PCTOOL Installation 1. Corrective Procedure 1 This section describes the procedure for aborting the installation process and installing the RU PC-TOOL. 1. If you clicked [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, click [Cancel] in a window that opens next. 2. When a message appears to ask whether you want to cancel the installation process, click [Yes]. 3. Click on [Finish]. 4. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 7-2 Installing the RU PCTOOL." If "For Client PC" is inadvertently chosen when the RU PC-TOOL is to be installed, install the RU PC-TOOL as directed below. When the RU PC-TOOL installation procedure is improperly performed, use either of the following corrective procedures: l Abort the installation process and then perform the installation procedure again. If you find in the middle of the RU PC-TOOL installation process that "For Client PC" is inadvertently chosen, you can abort the installation process. In this instance, abort the installation process and install the RU PC-TOOL. For details on the procedure, see "Appendix 8-1 Corrective Procedure 1." {IN: Appendix 8-1_Corrective Procedure 1} l Delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform the installation procedure again. If you complete the RU PC-TOOL installation process with "For Client PC" inadvertently chosen, the CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. In this instance, delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL CD-ROM and then install the RU PC-TOOL. For details on the procedure, see "Appendix 8-2 Corrective Procedure 2." {IN: Appendix 8-2_Corrective Procedure 2} {IN: Appendix 7-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-55 Appx IN-56 2. Corrective Procedure 2 5. Click on [Remove]. 6. When the uninstallation process is completed, click [Finish]. 7. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 7-2 Installing the RU PCTOOL." This section describes the procedure for deleting the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL CD-ROM and installing the RU PC-TOOL. 1. 2. If the CLIENT PC-TOOL is running, exit it. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console. → The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens. 3. 4. Click on [UNINSTALL]. Click on [NEXT]. {IN: Appendix 7-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL} 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-56 Appx IN-57 Appendix 9. Installing the Mobile Kit u NOTE u IWhen the mobile kit is to be used, the retaining bracket need be attached to the upper part of the subscanning unit. Check that the retaining bracket has been attached when reinstalling the subscanning unit, if the subscanning unit has been removed and then reinstalled during the servicing. Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “9.1 Subscanning Unit” for the retaining bracket. {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} 1. 2. Attaching the Tape Apply the tape at the front side end of the right-hand side cover. REFERENCE Applying the tape, the cover edge can be prevented from getting broken by vibration. 1. Loosen the screws and remove the front cover. Components of the Mobile Kit The mobile kit consists of a tape and the anti-topple retainer kit (except the anchor nut). - Tape (382N1885): 1 - Anti-topple retainer kit: 1 set (except anchor nut) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-57 Appx IN-58 2. Apply the tape to the right-hand side cover. u NOTE u Be sure to apply the tape with its end pressed against a step (recess) of the right-hand side cover. 3. 3. Installing the Anti-Topple Retainer Kit Refer to the Installation “Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer” for the details of the installation procedures for the anti-topple retainer kit. {IN:Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer} Put the lower part of the front cover under the housing, before attaching. Then, retain it with the screws while holding the cover. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-58 Appx IN-59 Appendix 10. Uninstallation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit REFERENCES - If you have pressed the [Enter] key without making any entry in #1 of the procedure 3, the error message does not appear. Enter the RU’s IP address and press the [Enter] key. Described below are the procedures for uninstalling the 50 micron upgrade kit. 1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM into the drive of the DX Console. → The installation menu automatically appears. 2. Enter “2” and press the [Enter] key. - If you have entered a wrong IP address and pressed the [Enter] key in #1 of the procedure 3, the error message appears. Press the [Enter] key to exit. Double-click the CD-ROM drive from the explorer to again perform the installation from the procedure 2. → The message for prompting the input of the RU’s IP address appears. 3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key. → The message “Uninstallation Completed” appears. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-59 Appx IN-60 4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the uninstallation is displayed, and press the [Enter] key. 5. 6. 7. Remove the HR reading option key CD-ROM from the drive of the DX Console. 8. Turn OFF the power of the RU. Peel off the cassette insertion operation label attached to the 50 micron upgrade kit from the machine. Restore the CR-IR359 instruction manual (including parts for options) to the original set. 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-60 Control Sheet Issue date 05.31.2013 Revision number 01 Reason New release (FM6150) CR-IR 359 Service Manual Performance Check (PC) 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual Pages affected All pages PC-1 CR-IR 359 Performance Check List 2. Connecting the Cables {IN:5._Connecting the Cables} The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of CR-IR 359 installation to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based on the instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace the installation steps set forth in the CR-IR 359 Service Manual but is to be followed concurrently. Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking the system connection and output image quality (section 4 or later), and then pass the equipment over to the customer. 3. Installing RU Software {IN:8._Installing RU Software} Installation Information - Serial Number: Software Ver.: Site Name: Installed by: Site Number: Signature: Room Name: Installation Date/Servicing Date: 4. Image/Conveyance Checks - X-ray exposure information with a dose of ST IP 1. Preparation for Installation {IN:3._Preparation for Installation} - Checking the Items Supplied  Machine main body  Accessories Options  Anti-topple retainer kit  Supporter  Cassette rack  Rack for long cassette  Mount (IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E))  Mount (IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E)  Arm for LCD monitor  Retainer for fixing to wall (long type)  Mobile kit  AC cable for BSI  AC cable for CEE  AC cable for USA  50 micron upgrade kit (Except for USA) RU IP address:  Default (172.16.1.10)  Modify (__________) FTP server IP address:  Default (172.16.1.20)  Modify (__________) Identification code of the machine (RU): Software Version: Backup of set file (machine-specific data)  OK  NG {IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} Checklist 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 - Supply voltage/machine power supply short-circuit check  OK  NG Power supply voltage: V (specified value: 100VAC ± 10%) Continuity check between E and E:  OK  NG (specified value: with continuity) Resistance value measured between L and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω) Resistance value measured between N and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω) Resistance value measured between L and N: Ω (specified value: 100KΩ –)  OK  NG  OK  NG X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kV Tube current: mA Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber: Bulb No.: Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No  IP size: × IP barcode No.: S value: - X-ray exposure information with a dose of HR IP  OK  NG Check the following when the HR IP is to be used. X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kV Tube current: mA Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber: Bulb No.: Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No  IP size: × IP barcode No.: S value: - Image/Conveyance Checks  OK  NG - Image format check: white blank portion, ____ mm max. (specified value: 2 mm max.)  OK  NG CR-IR 359 Service Manual PC-1 PC-2 5. IP type checks - IP type used at the institution  ST-VI  HR-V  HR-VI 6. Summary test  OK  NG Includes checks for normal bootup and termination. 7. Output films or image data are stored as records for performance check.  OK  NG 8. Test equipment used for the check Test equipment: Test equipment: Test equipment: 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 Model: Model: Model: S/N: S/N: S/N: CR-IR 359 Service Manual PC-2 PC-3 BLANK PAGE 014-247-01E 05.31.2013 FM6150 CR-IR 359 Service Manual PC-3

pdfcoffee.com capsula-xl-2-new-ru2a02e-3-pdf-free

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib